Download Manual - The DijonStock AW16G digital recording support forum

Owner’s Manual
EN
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may
void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use
this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part
15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance
that your use of this product in a residential environment
will not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the
instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of
the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation
of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
Type of Equipment :
Model Name :
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620
714-522-9011
Professional Audio Workstation
AW1600
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which
is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the
three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
(2 wires)
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the device.
• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Use only the specified AC power adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha).
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,
place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
If you notice any abnormality
Do not open
• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If
it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells
or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• If this device or the AC power adaptor should be dropped or damaged,
immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from
the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service
personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Location
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the device, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately
turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.
Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may
cause feedback and may damage the speakers.
• To avoid generating unwanted noise, make sure there is adequate
distance between the AC power adaptor and the device.
• Do not cover or wrap the AC power adaptor with a cloth or blanket.
• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold
or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the
internal components.
• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
(5)-4
1/2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
3
• Avoid locations where the unit will be subject to strong vibration.
Excessive vibration can damage the internal hard disk and CD-RW drive.
Handling caution
• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top to
prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular,
do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate
ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the
device(s), or even fire.
• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the
power amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power
off, the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.
• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise,
both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it.
• Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.)
into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, disc slots, etc.) If this
happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha
service personnel.
• Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the
device (vents, disc slots, etc.).
Connections
• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all
devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume
levels to minimum.
• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw
is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and
shock prevention. Be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed
ground point before plugging the device into the mains. Improper
grounding can result in electrical shock.
• Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and
avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the device at the minimum level. When you are not using the device for
a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha
service personnel about replacing defective components.
(5)-4
4
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
2/2
Caution for Laser
This product utilizes a laser.
Use of control, adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
Laser properties of the Drive
Laser Class : Class 1 (HHS and IEC 825-1)
Wavelength : for CD 784 nm
for DVD 662 nm
The label shown below is located on the bottom of this product.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD-RW drive.
CAUTION
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION CLASSE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT
KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDS/ETTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
VARNING
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.
VARO!
KURSSI 3B NÄKYVÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖN AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERSÄTEILYLLE, ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEN.
CAUTION: CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Handling the CD-R/RW media
Please observe the following points when handling the disc.
Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or the
printed label to become blurred.
• Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity.
• Do not touch the recording surface of the disc.
Hold the disc at the edges.
• Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc.
Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may
scratch the disc.
• If the disk surface needs cleaning, wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disk with a soft damp
cloth, then gently wipe off remaining moisture in the same way with a clean dry cloth.
• Do not write on the disc or affix labels to it.
• Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents.
• Do not bend or drop the disc.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
5
Internal Hard Disk Precautions
• During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and you
might hear some mechanical noises. This is normal.
• Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock. Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard
disk.
• Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another. Data on the internal hard disk
can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on.
Copyright Notice
Copyright and other intellectual property laws in various countries permit reproduction of copyrighted materials under certain requirements. The observance of applicable laws for use of this product, however, is your
responsibility. Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this
product.
Although this product is designed for original music production, it can be utilized to make reproduction of
copyrighted music and other sound products. While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are
permitted under applicable laws, such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringement and other violation of laws. Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences, you may wish
to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use
of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
6
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Contents
1.
Before you start
9
Introduction................................................................... 9
Remember to back up your data .................................. 9
About the built-in CD-RW drive .................................. 10
Using the CD-RW drive .............................................. 10
Connecting the AC adaptor ........................................ 11
Turning the power on/off ............................................ 11
2.
Introducing the AW1600
13
Features of the AW1600 ............................................ 13
AW1600 terminology .................................................. 15
Recorder section.................................................... 15
Mixer section.......................................................... 15
Quick Loop Sampler section .................................. 16
Overall.................................................................... 16
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do ...................... 17
Top panel ............................................................... 17
Rear panel ............................................................. 21
Front panel............................................................. 23
Basic operation on the AW1600 ................................. 24
Viewing the display ................................................ 24
Accessing a screen/page/channel ......................... 24
Switching a button on/off........................................ 25
Editing a value in the display ................................. 25
Inputting text .......................................................... 25
Using the Selected Channel section ...................... 26
3.
Listening to the demo song
27
Connect external devices and turn on the power ....... 27
Loading the demo song .............................................. 28
Playing the demo song ............................................... 29
Mixing the demo song ................................................ 30
4.
Recording to a sound clip
33
Connecting your instrument or mic............................. 33
Adjusting the input level ............................................. 34
Recording/playing a sound clip .................................. 35
5.
Track recording
39
Creating a new song .................................................. 39
Direct recording and Bus recording ............................ 40
Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording).... 42
Assigning input signals to tracks (Bus recording)....... 45
Enabling the metronome ............................................ 47
Recording on a track .................................................. 48
Pairing input channels/track channels ........................ 49
Using the input library................................................. 50
Using the EQ library ................................................... 52
Using the dynamics library ......................................... 53
6.
Overdubbing
55
About overdubbing ..................................................... 55
Assigning the input signal to a track ........................... 56
Instantly recalling an EQ library.................................. 56
Instantly recalling a dynamics library.......................... 57
Setting the mix balance and pan ................................ 57
Overdubbing ...............................................................58
Punch-in/out................................................................59
Manual punch-in/out...............................................59
Auto punch-in/out ...................................................59
Using the Undo List ....................................................61
Switching virtual tracks ...............................................62
Saving the current song ..............................................63
Loading an existing song ............................................64
7.
Various types of playback
65
Using the locator .........................................................65
Using markers.............................................................67
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker .......68
Erasing a locate point or marker .................................69
Repeatedly playing a specific region
(the A-B Repeat function) ...........................................70
Finding a location while you listen to the sound
(the Nudge function) ...................................................71
Finding a location while you view the waveform .........72
8.
Using libraries and scene memories
73
About the libraries .......................................................73
About scene memories ...............................................73
Basic operation for libraries and scene memories ......74
Storing library or scene data ..................................74
Recalling library or scene data ...............................75
Deleting library or scene data.................................75
Naming library or scene data .................................76
Details on libraries and scene memory.......................77
Input library.............................................................77
EQ library ...............................................................77
Dynamics library.....................................................78
Effect library ...........................................................78
Mastering library.....................................................78
Sample library ........................................................78
Channel library .......................................................79
Scene memories ....................................................79
Using the Recall Safe function....................................80
9.
Mixdown and bounce operations
81
About mixdown and bouncing.....................................81
Preparing for mixdown ................................................83
Using the internal effects via send/return ...................85
Recording on the stereo track.....................................87
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure ...................88
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix) ...........................89
Convenient functions during
mixdown/bounce operations .......................................92
Adding input signals or pad
performances during mixdown...........................92
Using meters to check
the level of each channel ...................................93
Viewing all parameters for a certain channel .........93
Initializing a channel ...............................................94
Editing the EQ parameters .....................................95
Editing the dynamics parameters ...........................96
Editing the parameters of an internal effect............97
Inserting an effect into a track channel...................99
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
10. Creating an audio CD
101
Creating an audio CD ............................................... 101
Types of media that
you can use with the CD-RW drive........................... 101
Methods of writing an audio CD ............................... 102
Basic settings for the CD-RW drive .......................... 103
Writing audio data (Track At Once) .......................... 104
Writing audio data (Disc At Once) ............................ 106
Finalizing CD-R/RW media....................................... 108
Erasing CD-RW media ............................................. 109
Playing an audio CD................................................. 110
11. Quick loop sampler
111
About the quick loop sampler ................................... 111
Using sample libraries .............................................. 113
Recording/playing a pad performance ..................... 114
Grid Recording (Step Recording) the Pads .............. 116
Importing from an audio CD/WAV file to a pad ........ 117
Importing from an audio track/stereo track to a pad . 119
Importing From a Computer To the Pads ................. 120
Editing the sample name .......................................... 121
Trimming the playback region .................................. 122
Switching the playback mode for each pad .............. 123
Using the Slice function ............................................ 124
Deleting an unwanted sample .................................. 126
12. Track editing
127
What you can do using editing commands............... 127
Basic procedure for track editing ......................... 128
List of editing commands.......................................... 130
ERASE................................................................. 130
DELETE ............................................................... 131
INSERT................................................................ 131
COPY................................................................... 132
MOVE .................................................................. 133
EXCHANGE......................................................... 134
TIME COMP/EXP
(Time Compression/Expansion) ...................... 134
PITCH CHANGE.................................................. 135
EXPORT .............................................................. 135
MERGE................................................................ 135
Exporting WAV files and
importing audio CD or WAV files .............................. 136
Importing and Exporting Audio Data
From and To a Computer ................................ 136
Exporting WAV files ............................................. 136
Transferring WAV Files To and
From a Computer ............................................ 137
Importing WAV Files ............................................ 139
Importing from the CD-RW drive.......................... 140
13. Song management
143
About songs ............................................................. 143
Editing the song name.............................................. 145
Editing various settings for the song ........................ 146
Copying or deleting a song....................................... 147
Optimizing a song..................................................... 148
8
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Creating a tempo map ..............................................149
Importing data from an existing song........................151
Backing up songs and sample libraries ....................152
Restoring songs or sample libraries .........................154
Exchanging Song Data
With Other AW-series Audio Workstations ...............155
14. MIDI and utility functions
157
What you can do using MIDI.....................................157
Basic MIDI Settings ..................................................158
Setting MIDI messages.............................................158
Using the MIDI Remote function ...............................163
About the MIDI Remote function ..........................163
Using the MIDI Remote function presets..............163
Using the user-defined Remote function ..............165
Using the test tone oscillator.....................................167
Digital input settings and
Initializing the internal hard disk................................168
Overall settings for the AW1600 ...............................169
15. Using the AW1600 with external devices
171
Using the AW1600 with a “workstation synth” ..........171
Synchronizing the AW1600
with the workstation’s sequencer.....................171
Recording/playing AW1600 mix
operations on the workstation’s sequencer .....172
Switching AW1600 scenes from
the workstation’s sequencer ............................173
Remotely controlling a tone generator module .........174
Using external effects ...............................................175
Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT ...177
Mixing down to a digital recorder..........................177
Recording audio data from a digital recorder .......178
Appendix
179
Input library list..........................................................179
Mastering library list ..................................................180
EQ library list ............................................................181
Dynamics Parameters ..............................................182
Dynamics library list ..................................................185
Effects library list.......................................................186
Effects Parameters ...................................................188
Sample library list .....................................................200
Troubleshooting ........................................................202
Display message list .................................................206
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600 ........209
MIDI data format .......................................................215
MIDI Implementation Chart .......................................219
Specifications............................................................220
Dimensions ...............................................................222
Index .........................................................................223
Block diagram ...........................................................227
Chapter 1
Before you start
Before you start
1
This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the
AW1600.
Introduction
■ Check the included items
The AW1600 package contains the following items. If any
are missing, please contact your dealer.
•
•
•
•
The AW1600
AC adaptor (PA-300)
Owner’s manual (this book)
CD-ROM
■ Copyright
Copying of commercially available music sequence data
and/or digital audio files for any purpose other than your
own personal use is strictly prohibited.
■ Trademarks
• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc. USA in the United States and other countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation USA in the United States and other countries.
• Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg
Media Technologies AG.
• Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
USA in the United States and other countries.
• SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Systems, Inc.
• ProTools is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid
Technology, Inc. and affiliated companies.
• Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
■ Yamaha Website (English only)
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
■ Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
Remember to back up your data
■ Storing produced data
■ Responsibility for loss of data, etc.
Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken
operation. We recommend that you store all important
data on your computer, CD-R/CD-RW discs, or other
external storage medium.
Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages
(including consequential or incidental) incurred by the
customer or any third party as a result of loss or impairment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD-R media,
regardless of whether such loss could have been or actually was foreseen by Yamaha.
Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect
that may render it unusable.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
9
About the built-in CD-RW drive • Using the CD-RW drive
About the built-in CD-RW drive
1
Before you start
A built-in CD-RW drive is a device that lets you create or
play audio CDs, backup and restore data from the internal
hard disk, and read data from a CD-ROM.
■ Handling
1 Never touch the objective lens.
B Be careful that the objective lens does not become
IMPORTANT
• Even if a CD-RW drive is operating normally, it may fail a read
or write operation approximately once in five hundred times.
• Yamaha will take no responsibility for any damages, direct or
consequential, that may result from the use of the above CDRW drive.
dusty or dirty.
C If the objective lens becomes dusty, use a commercially available blower etc. to blow the dust off with
clean air.
D Since the inside of the drive contains powerful magnetic circuitry, do not allow any magnetic material to
come near the drive. (In particular, any metallic fragments, screws, or pins that enter the drive mechanism
will cause operation to fail.)
Using the CD-RW drive
To insert a disc into the CD-RW drive, press the eject
switch. The disc tray will open. Place the disc on the tray,
and gently push the disc tray in.
NOTE
• The disc tray is ejected electrically. If the disc tray is not ejected
when you press the eject switch, turn on the power of the AW1600
and press the eject switch once again.
■ Removing a CD in an emergency
If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject
switch, insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter (such as a
straightened paper clip) into the eject hole, and push gently. However, pressing the eject switch will not eject the
disc when the AW1600 is in the following states, so do not
use this method in such cases.
• When the AW1600’s power is “STANDBY”
• When the disc is being accessed (data is being read,
written, or erased)
• While in CD PLAY mode
CAUTION
Eject hole
10
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Eject switch
• This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when
you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc
tray or a power failure. Do not use this method unnecessarily,
since doing so will damage the CD-RW drive.
Connecting the AC adaptor • Turning the power on/off
Connecting the AC adaptor
1
Before you start
When connecting the included AC adaptor (PA-300), you
must first connect it to the DC IN jack of the AW1600, and
then to the AC wall outlet. After connecting the AC adaptor to the AW1600, wrap the cable around the hook as
shown in the diagram. This will prevent the cable from
being accidentally pulled out, causing the AW1600 to
unexpectedly lose power.
Turning the power on/off
You must use the following procedure to switch the power
of the AW1600 between ON and STANDBY. If you fail to
follow this procedure, the internal hard disk or your external monitor system may be damaged.
1 In the Work Navigate section located in the
upper left of the top panel, press the
[SONG] key several times to access the following SHUTDOWN page.
■ Turning the power on
In a system that includes the AW1600, turn the power of
each device on in the following order.
1 External devices such as audio sources and effect
processors connected to the input/output jacks of
the AW1600
B The AW1600 itself
C The monitor system connected to the AW1600’s output jacks
2 Press the [ENTER] key located in the middle right of the top panel.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
CAUTION
• Before you turn on the power, make sure that the AC adaptor is
firmly connected to the AW1600 and to the AC outlet. If the
power is disconnected while the AW1600 is being used, the
AW1600 itself or the hard disk may be damaged.
When you turn on the power of the AW1600, an opening
screen will appear, and then the following screen will
appear.
3 Using the CURSOR [
]/[ ] keys located
in the upper right of the top panel, move the
cursor (the blinking area in the screen) to
the YES button if you want to save the current song, or to the NO button if you do not
want to save it. Then press the [ENTER] key.
4 When the “Now safe to turn off...” message
appears, turn off the [POWER] switch
located on the rear panel.
IMPORTANT
■ Turning the power off (shut down)
In a system that includes the AW1600, turn the power of
each device off in the following order.
1 The monitor system connected to the AW1600’s out-
• If you turn off the power of the AW1600 without performing the above shutdown procedure, not only will any
unsaved changes be lost, but you also risk damaging the
data on the hard disk, and damaging or drastically shortening the lifespan of the hard disk itself and the internal
CD-RW drive. Please use caution.
put jacks
B The AW1600 itself
C External devices such as audio sources and effect
processors connected to the input/output jacks of
the AW1600
CAUTION
• A small amount of electrical current is flowing even when
the power is in STANDBY mode. If you will not be using
the AW1600 for an extended period of time, be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor from your AC outlet.
When turning off the power of the AW1600, you must
perform the following “shut-down” procedure.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
11
1
Before you start
12
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 2
Introducing the AW1600
2
Introducing the AW1600
This chapter describes the features of the AW1600, the name of each part
and its function, and introduces terminology you need to know when using
the AW1600.
Features of the AW1600
The AW1600 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer, multi-effect processor, hard
disk recorder, sampler, and CD-RW drive.
The following diagram shows the signal flow within the AW1600.
Mixer
×2
×8
INPUT jacks 1–8
×2
DIGITAL
STEREO IN jack
Sound clip
Input channels 1–8
Track channels 1–16
Return channels 1/2
Pad channels 1–4
×2
×2
×2
×2
Buses L/R
AUX buses 1/2
Effect buses 1/2
Stereo buses L/R
×8
×2
STEREO/AUX OUT jacks
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
MONITOR OUT jacks
PHONES jack
Metronome
×2
Effect 1
×2
×2
Stereo output channel
Internal effects
Effect 2
×2
Recorder input
patching
×2
1
2
3
×16
4
×2
CD Play
×16
CD Write
Quick loop sampler
Recorder
Data Backup/
Restore
WAV File Import
CD-RW drive
Now let’s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW1600.
■ Mixer section
● Full-fledged mixer with 36 input channels
The AW1600 contains a digital mixer with a total of 36
input channels, including analog inputs x 8, stereo digital
input x 1, recorder tracks x 16, and effect returns x 2.
Audio quality is guaranteed by 24-bit AD/DA and 32-bit
internal processing. A Hi-Z input jack for directly connecting an electric guitar or bass is also provided.
● Totally redesigned operation
The AW1600 is designed to be operated directly by the
musician (guitarist, vocalist, drummer etc.). With a minimum number of steps, you can assign input signals to
tracks, switch the monitor signal, and record with effects,
EQ, and dynamics processing applied.
● Four-band EQ and dynamics processors on
each channel
Four-band full-parametric EQ and dynamics processing is
provided on virtually every channel. You can recall the
desired preset from the library, and use the panel knobs
and keys to quickly adjust the settings.
● Two high-quality multi-effect units are
built-in
The two built-in effect units deliver a wide variety of
effects including spatial-type effects such as reverb and
delay, modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger,
and guitar-type effects such as distortion and amp simulation. These effects can be used either via send/return, or
inserted into a desired channel.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
13
Features of the AW1600
2
Introducing the AW1600
■ Recorder section
■ Quick Loop Sampler section
● 8-track Simultaneous Recording & 16-track
Simultaneous Playback (16-bit songs)
The AW1600 has a built-in pad-type sampler. You can
assign sixteen stereo waveforms to the four pads with
sample banks. Audio tracks from the hard disk, or WAV
files from a CD-ROM disc or computer can be loaded.
The timing at which each pad is pressed can be recorded
on a dedicated pad track, and edited later. Drum phrases
from the sample library can be assigned to pads, and you
can then record pad operations to use this function as a
simple rhythm machine.
The maximum polyphony is four stereo notes, and the
maximum playback time is a total of approximately 47
seconds (approximately 29 seconds in 24-bit songs) of stereo for the entire Quick Loop Sampler.
You can record multiple tracks of instruments one by one,
or set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live performance by an entire band. A stereo track for direct mixdown of all 16 tracks is also provided, letting you manage
the multi-track audio and the two-track mix as a single
package of data.
For the multi-tracks as well as the stereo track, you can
use eight virtual tracks for each track. When recording
parts or during mixdown, you can switch virtual tracks to
record multiple takes, and select the best take later.
The “bit depth” (number of quantization bits) of the audio
data recorded on each track can be set to 16 or 24 bits for
each individual song. 16-bit songs allow simultaneous
recording of up to 8 tracks, and simultaneous playback of
up to 16 tracks. A maximum of eight 24-bit song tracks
can be recorded or played simultaneously (→ p. 143).
● Versatile editing functionality
Audio data recorded on a track can be copied, moved, or
edited using a variety of commands. You can make
detailed edits, or even make radical changes to the structure of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or
increasing the number of choruses.
“Time Compression” lets you compress or expand the
time axis of the audio data in a range of 50%–200%.
“Pitch Change” lets you modify the pitch in a range of one
octave upward or downward. You can use the Undo function to reverse the results of as many as the last fifteen
editing operations.
● A variety of Locate methods, and auto
punch-in/out
Seven locate points (start/end, relative zero, A/B, in/out)
and 99 markers can be assigned at any desired point in the
song, for quick access via Locate operations. Auto punchin/out and A-B repeat playback functions are also provided. The AW1600 also has a metronome that follows the
tempo map.
● Sound Clip function
The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an
input signal without affecting the recorder tracks. You can
use this as a sketch for your ideas for a song or arrangement.
● Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix
A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjustment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation
of chorus parts from a main vocal line. This feature can
also be used to change the character of a vocal sound.
14
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
■ CD-RW drive
A dedicated CD-RW drive is installed in the AW1600. You
can produce an audio CD from the stereo tracks of the
songs recorded on the hard disk. Markers assigned within
a song can also be used as the track numbers of the CD.
You can even use advanced techniques such as assigning
more than one track number within a single song.
The CD-RW drive can also be used to backup/restore
songs, to play back audio CDs, and to load WAV data
from a CD-ROM.
■ Connecting to a Computer
The AW1600 can be directly connected to a computer via
the built-in USB interface. This allows WAV-format audio
files to be copied between the AW1600 and computer for
convenient management and processing in computerbased
applications, and “backup” song files can be stored on the
computer’s memory media.
AW1600 terminology
AW1600 terminology
■ Paired tracks
■ Tracks
A location where data is recorded is called a “track.” The
AW1600’s recorder section uses the following types of
track.
● Audio tracks
The physical tracks used to record and play back audio
data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The
AW1600 has sixteen audio tracks. You can record eight
tracks simultaneously, and play back 16 tracks simultaneously (16-bit songs).
● Stereo track
Independently from audio tracks 1–16, the AW1600 has a
“stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal.
The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown
track for recording the final mix.
● Virtual tracks
Each audio track 1–16 and the stereo track consists of
eight tracks. Each of these eight tracks is called a “virtual
track.” For the audio tracks and the stereo track, only one
virtual track can be recorded or played at any time. However, you can switch virtual tracks to continue recording
other takes while preserving the previously-recorded content.
The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks.
The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–16, and the
vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The
shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently
selected for recording or playback.
Audio tracks
Virtual tracks
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Virtual tracks
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
■ Locate points/markers
Locations within a song that you specified in order to execute a function such as auto punch-in/out or A-B repeat
playback are called “locate points.” Locate points include
the in/out points and the A/B points, and you can use the
keys of the Locate section to move instantly to these
points.
Independently of the locate points, you can assign “markers” at desired locations within a song so that you will be
able to find these locations quickly. The AW1600 lets you
set up to ninety-nine markers (1–99). By using the keys of
the Locate section you can move instantly to the previous
or next marker.
2
Mixer section
■ Channels
A signal route that processes a single signal within the
mixer and sends it to various sections is called a “channel.” The mixer section of the AW1600 lets you use the
following channels.
● Input channels 1–8
These apply EQ and dynamics processing to the signals
that are input from MIC/LINE INPUT jacks 1–8, and send
them to the recorder tracks or to the STEREO OUT jacks.
● Track channels 1–16
These channels apply EQ and dynamics processing to the
audio playback signals from audio tracks 1–16 of the
recorder, and send the signals to the stereo track and the
STEREO OUT jacks. You can also perform “bounce
recording” by sending these channels to different tracks.
● Return channels 1/2
Stereo track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
For audio tracks 9/10–15/16, adjacent pairs of tracks are
handled by the mixer as a single unit. These pairs of tracks
are referred to as “paired tracks.” A paired track can be
used to record a stereo source, or a dual-guitar performance, etc.
Introducing the AW1600
Recorder section
These channels send the return signals from the internal
effects to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks.
● Pad channels 1–4
These channels apply EQ and dynamics processing to the
playback of Quick Loop Sampler pads 1–4, and send the
signals to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks.
● Stereo output channel
This applies EQ and dynamics processing to the signal of
the stereo bus (which combines the signals of the various
channels), and sends it to the stereo track or to the STEREO OUT jacks. The same signal is also output from the
MONITOR OUT jacks and from the PHONES jack.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
15
AW1600 terminology
■ Paired channels
2
Introducing the AW1600
For track channels 9/10–15/16, pad channels 1–4, and
return channels 1/2, the parameters (except for pan and
phase) are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels.
These are called “paired channels.”
For input channels 1–8 and track channels 1–8, you can
also switch two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
channels to function as paired channels. The parameters
(except for pan and phase) of paired channels will be
linked, so that adjusting one parameter will cause the
same parameter of the other channel to follow.
■ Buses
A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple channels and send them to an output jack or recorder track
input is called a “bus.”
Unlike channels, which handle only a single signal, a bus
can combine multiple signals into one or two, and send
them to a destination. (The term “bus” comes from the
vehicle that carries numerous people simultaneously.)
The AW1600’s mixer section lets you use the following
buses.
● Stereo bus
This mixes the input signals to stereo, and sends them via
the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the
recorder or to the STEREO OUT jacks.
● AUX buses 1/2
These combine the signals from the various track, input,
return, and pad channels, and output them via the STEREO/AUX OUT jacks to an external device. Use these
when you will use an external effect processor, or to create
a mix differing from the stereo channel for musicians to
monitor.
● Effect buses 1/2
These combine the signals from the track, input, return,
and pad channels, and input them to built-in effects 1 and
2. (However, it is not possible for the return channel 1/2
signals to be returned to the input of the same effect.)
● Buses L/R
These combine the signals of track, input channels, and
send them to recorder track inputs.
Quick Loop Sampler section
■ Sample banks and samples
In the Quick Loop Sampler section you can assign stereo
waveforms to the four pads, and strike the pads to play
them back. These stereo waveforms are called “samples.”
The memories to which the samples are assigned are
called “sample banks,” and each pad provides four sample
banks (A–D).
■ Pad track
The AW1600 can realtime-record and play back your
strikes on the pads. The memory that records these pad
operations is called the “pad track.” Unlike the tracks that
record audio, the pad track simply records the timing at
which you “pressed a pad” or “released a pad.”
Overall
■ Songs
The smallest unit by which the AW1600 manages a composition is called a “song.” When you save a song on the
hard disk, all data necessary for reproducing that song will
be saved; i.e., not just the audio data, but also mixer settings and the samples used by the quick loop sampler. You
can return to the original state at any time by loading the
saved song.
■ Scenes and scene memories
A “scene” is a stored set of settings for the mixer section
and effects. The area of memory that holds the scenes is
called “scene memory,” and 96 scenes can be stored for
each song. Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as
part of the song.
■ Libraries
A “library” is an area of memory that stores individual settings such as for EQ or dynamics. The AW1600 has separate libraries for EQ, dynamics, effect, channel, input, and
mastering settings. Each library is saved on the hard disk
as part of the song.
■ Tempo map
The “tempo map” records changes in tempo and time signature that occur during the course of a song. The tempo
map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song.
■ System data
Various global settings that apply to all songs are collectively referred to as “system data.” System data is stored
on the hard disk independently of the individual songs.
16
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
This section explains the names and functions of the various items on the AW1600’s top panel,
rear panel, and front panel.
2
Work Navigate section (P. 18)
Input/output section (P. 17)
Selected Channel section (P. 19)
Introducing the AW1600
Top panel
Data entry/control
section (P. 20)
Display (P. 18)
Quick Navigate section
(P. 18)
Quick Loop Sampler section
(P. 18)
Mixer section
(P. 19)
Transport section
(P. 21)
Locate section
(P. 20)
■ Input/output section
1
3
2
1 [GAIN] knobs 1–8
These adjust the sensitivity of the signals that are input
from the rear panel MIC/LINE INPUT jacks 1–8.
C [MONITOR/PHONES] knob
This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from
the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack.
B [INPUT SEL] keys 1–8
These keys select the mixer input channel that you will
operate.
HINT
• Pressing and holding an [INPUT SEL] key will display the INPUT
SETTING popup window, allowing you to make settings for the
corresponding input channel.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
17
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
■ Work Navigate section
2
C [TRACK] key
This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you can
check whether each track contains data, and switch the
virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback.
Introducing the AW1600
1
2
3
4
D [EDIT] key
This key accesses the EDIT screen, where you can copy or
erase tracks.
5
6
E [REMOTE] key
This key accesses the REMOTE screen, where you can
use the front panel faders and [TRACK SEL] keys to control an external MIDI device or sequencer software on
your computer.
1 [SONG] key
This key accesses the SONG screen, where you can save
or load songs, and perform the shut-down procedure.
F [UTILITY] key
This key accesses the UTILITY screen, where you can
make MIDI, oscillator, and digital input settings, and format the hard disk.
B [CD] key
This key accesses the CD screen, where you can write or
play an audio CD, and backup or restore data.
■ Quick Navigate section
1 [RECORD] key
1
This key accesses the RECORD screen, where you can
quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of
each track, and make settings for recording.
2
B [MONITOR] key
This key accesses the MONITOR screen, where you can
quickly select the signal to be monitored, or switch the
stereo track playback on/off.
■ Display
1 Access indicator
1
This indicator indicates the access status of the internal
hard disk. When the hard disk is being read or written, this
indicator will light.
CAUTION
• Never turn off the power of the AW1600 when the access indicator is lit. Doing so will not only damage the data on the internal hard disk, but may also damage the hard disk itself. When
you want to turn off the power of the AW1600, you must perform the shutdown procedure (→ p. 11).
2
This is a backlit liquid crystal display that indicates the
current operating status or the settings of the various
parameters. The screens that are displayed will depend on
the front panel keys and knobs that are operated.
B Contrast
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
■ Quick Loop Sampler section
1 [SELECT] key
Hold down this key and press a pad 1–4 to select a
pad for operations.
B Pads 1–4
Each of these pads plays back the sample that has
been assigned to it.
1
18
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
2
3
C [SAMPLE EDIT] key
This key accesses the SAMPLE screen, where
you can make settings and perform operations for
the quick loop sampler.
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
■ Mixer section
1
2
3
Introducing the AW1600
2
4
5
6
D Faders 1–8
E Faders 9/10–15/16
1 [TRACK SEL] keys 1–8
B [TRACK SEL] keys 9/10–15/16
C [STEREO SEL] key
Use these keys to select the mixer track channels or
recorder tracks that you want to control.
Normally, these faders adjust the playback level of each
recorder track. By changing the internal settings, you can
also use these faders to control the input levels of input
channels 1–8 and pads 1–4.
F [STEREO] fader
This adjusts the output level of the stereo bus.
■ Selected Channel section
C [EFFECT 1] knob
D [EFFECT 2] knob
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
J
1 [EQ] knob
Turning this knob will adjust the EQ (equalizer) gain for
the currently selected channel. You can press this knob to
access the EQ screen, where you can adjust all of the EQ
settings.
B [DYN] knob
Turning this knob will adjust the dynamics depth for the
currently selected channel. You can press this knob to
access the DYN screen, where you can adjust all of the
dynamics settings.
Turning these knobs will adjust the amount of signal that
is sent from the currently selected channel to the internal
effects 1 and 2 (i.e., effect send levels 1 and 2). You can
press these knobs to access the EFF1 or EFF2 screens,
where you can adjust the parameters of the internal
effects.
E [PAN/BAL] knob
Turning this knob will adjust the pan of the currently
selected channel (or the balance of the stereo output channel). You can press this knob to access the PAN screen,
where you can adjust pan for multiple channels.
F
G
H
I
[HIGH] key
[HI-MID] key
[LO-MID] key
[LOW] key
These keys select one of the four EQ bands (HIGH, HIMID, LO-MID, LOW) to be adjusted.
J [VIEW] key
This key accesses the VIEW screen, where you can check
the level of each channel, or perform on-screen adjustments to the faders and other mix parameters of each
channel.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
19
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
■ Data entry/control section
2
B [SCENE] key
This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you can save
or recall scene memories.
1
4
2
Introducing the AW1600
3
C [JOG ON] key
This key is an on/off switch for the Nudge function (→
p. 71) which uses the [DATA/JOG] dial (5). When this
function is on, the key will light.
D [CURSOR] keys ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys)
These keys move the cursor in the screen (the blinking
frame) to select a specific item.
5
E [DATA/JOG] dial
Use this dial to change the value of a parameter. If the
[JOG ON] key (3) is on, this dial operates the Nudge
function.
6
1 [UNDO/REDO] key
This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing
operation (Undo), or re-executes a cancelled operation
(Redo).
F [ENTER] key
Use this key to operate a button displayed in the screen, or
to execute a specific function.
HINT
• This key will light if Undo can be performed.
• If you press and hold this key, the UNDO LIST screen will appear.
Here you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to revert as many as the
last fifteen operations (→ p. 61).
■ Locate section
4
1
7
2
8
3
9
5
6
F [A]/[B] keys
These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function
will begin (point A) and end (point B). These keys can
also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or
point B.
G [MARK] key
This key places a mark at the current location of the song.
This key accesses the CLIP screen, where you can record
or play sound clips.
H [SET] key
Use this key in conjunction with the [IN]/[OUT] keys or
the [A]/[B] keys to register the current location as a locater.
B [AUTO PUNCH] key
This key switches the audio punch-in/out function on/off,
letting you automate recording.
I [CANCEL] key
Use this key in conjunction with the [IN]/[OUT] keys or
the [A]/[B] keys to cancel a locater that you registered.
1 [SOUND CLIP] key
C [REPEAT] key
This key switches the A-B repeat function on/off, letting
you repeatedly play a specified region.
D MARK SEARCH [ ]/[ ] keys
These keys search for markers placed within the song.
20
E [IN]/[OUT] keys
These keys specify the points at which auto punch-in/out
recording will begin (the In point) and end (the Out point).
These keys can also be used as locate keys to move
directly to the In point or Out point.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
■ Transport section
2
C FF [
] key
This key fast-forwards the current location. Each time you
press this key, you will alternate between 8x speed and
16x speed.
3
D STOP [■] key
This key stops playback, recording, fast-forward, or
rewind.
4
1 RTZ [
5
6
] key
This key moves directly to the relative zero time location.
Used in conjunction with the [SET] key, this registers the
current location as the relative zero time.
HINT
• Broadly speaking, the times displayed in the AW1600’s counter
can be either absolute time (ABS) or relative time (REL). The
absolute time zero location is fixed, but the relative time zero location can be freely specified.
B REW [
] key
This key rewinds the current location. Each time you press
this key, you will alternate between 8x speed and 16x
speed.
E PLAY [ ] key
If you press this key while the recorder is stopped, playback will begin.
If you press this key during fast-forward or rewind, normal-speed playback will begin.
If you press this key during recording, recording will stop
and playback will resume (“punch-out”).
2
Introducing the AW1600
1
F REC [●] key
If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key
while the recorder is stopped, recording will begin.
If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key
during playback, you will switch from playback to recording (“punch-in”).
Rear panel
5
4
3
2
N
M
L
1 MIC/LINE INPUT jacks 1–8
(XLR/TRS Phone)
These balanced input jacks accept both XLR-3-31 and
TRS phone plug type connectors. Nominal input sensitivity can be adjusted from –46 dBu to +4 dBu. Just about
any type of balanced source can be connected here –
microphones, direct boxes, or the output from equipment
with balanced line-level outputs. Unbalanced lines with
standard phone plug connectors can be directly connected
to the TRS inputs. Connector wiring is as shown below.
Male XLR
connector
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
1/4" TRS
phone plug
Ring (cold)
Tip (hot)
1
K
J
9
8
7
6
B MIC/LINE INPUT jack 8 (Hi-Z)
This is a high impedance 1/4" phone input jack (unbalanced). The nominal input level is –46 to +4 dBu. An
instrument with high output impedance such as an electric
guitar or bass with passive-type pickups can be connected
here.
C STEREO/AUX OUT jacks
These are 1/4" phone output jacks (unbalanced) that output the signals of the stereo bus or AUX bus 1/2.
D MONITOR OUT jacks
These are 1/4" phone output jacks (unbalanced) for connection to your monitor setup, such as a stereo system or
powered speakers.
E PHONES jack
This is a 1/4" TRS phone output jack for connecting your
headphones for monitoring.
Sleeve (ground)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
21
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
2
Introducing the AW1600
F USB Connector
This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to
a USB-equipped computer via a standard USB cable
(compatible with USB 2.0). When the USB Storage mode
is selected WAV files and song files can be transferred
between the AW1600 and the computer. In the “normal”
mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control.
The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals.
NOTE
• The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard
disks or CD-R/RW drives.
G DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT jacks
These jacks allow direct transfer of digital audio between
the AW1600 and DAT recorders, MD (MiniDisc) recorders, CD recorders, and other consumer-format digital
audio gear. These connectors conform to the IEC-60958
standard.
H FOOT SW jack
A separately sold foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be connected here to control transport operations such as start/
stop, or to perform punch-in/out.
NOTE
• The AW1600 can be connected to either a USB 2.0 or USB 1.1
interface, but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1.1 interface is
used.
• The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch
other than the Yamaha FC5 (or equivalent).
• When connecting via USB 2.0 be sure to use a cable specified for
USB 2.0 use.
• Does not function when the MTC MODE is “SLAVE” or while the
REW[
], FF[
], or [JOG ON] key is being used.
• The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM must be
properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and reception.
• When a record track is assigned in the RECORD screen the functions are switched in the following order: PLAY[
] → Punch In
→ Punch Out → STOP[■]. When Auto Punch-in/Out is engaged,
however, the order becomes Punch In → STOP[■].
• When connecting USB cables, make sure to connect the AW1600
directly to a computer without USB hub.
I MIDI IN connector
J MIDI OUT/THRU connector
Caution when using the USB connector
You must observe the following points when connecting the AW1600 to your computer via the USB
connector. If you fail to observe these points, your
computer or the AW1600 may stop operating (“hang
up”), causing data to be corrupted or lost. If the
computer or the AW1600 stops working, turn the
power off and then on again, and restart the computer.
• Before connecting the computer via the USB connector, disable the power management mode
(suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your computer.
• Connect the USB connector to the computer
before you power-on the AW1600.
• Execute the following before turning the power to
the AW1600 on/off, connecting/disconnecting the
USB cable, or turning the USB Storage mode on/
off.
• Close all application programs.
• If the USB Storage mode is off, make sure that data
is not being transmitted from the AW1600.
• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, make sure
that reading and writing files is not in progress.
• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, safely remove
the AW1600 from the Windows taskbar or drag the
AW1600 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the
trash after closing all AW1600 windows.
• Leave an interval of at least six seconds between
powering the AW1600 on and off, or between disconnecting and connecting the USB cable.
These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged
with external devices.
MIDI IN receives MIDI messages.
MIDI OUT/THRU can be internally switched to function
either as a MIDI OUT jack (which transmits MIDI messages generated within the AW1600) or MIDI THRU jack
(which re-transmits messages that are received at the
MIDI IN jack).
K PHANTOM +48V CH1–4 and CH5–8 Switches
Independent phantom power switches are provided for the
XLR-type MIC/LINE INPUT connector groups 1 through
4 (CH1–4) and 5 through 8 (CH5–8). Turn phantom power
to the appropriate connectors ON when using one or more
phantom-powered condenser microphones.
CAUTION
• Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phantom power is not required.
• Make sure that no equipment other than phantom-powered
microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input
group for which phantom power is turned on. Applying phantom power to devices that are not phantom-powered can
cause damage. Balanced dynamic microphones, however,
can usually be connected without adverse effect.
• To prevent speakers damage turn power amplifiers (or powered speakers) off when switching phantom power on or off.
It’s also a good idea turn all master faders and output volume
controls down to minimum. The noise generated when phantom power is switched on or off can damage system components and may even cause hearing damage if amplified to
sufficiently high levels.
L Ground Screw
For maximum safety the ground screw should be properly
connected to a confirmed ground point. Proper grounding
will also ensure minimum hum, noise, and interference.
22
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Parts of the AW1600 and what they do
M POWER switch
This switches the power between ON and STANDBY.
NOTE
• When switching the power of the AW1600 between ON and
STANDBY, you must follow the “Turning the power on/off” (→
p. 11) procedures described.
2
Introducing the AW1600
N DC IN connector
Connect the included AC adaptor (PA-300) to this connector.
CAUTION
• Use only the included AC adaptor (PA-300) for this unit. Using
other types may be a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Front panel
■ CD-RW drive
321
1 Eject switch
This switch ejects the disc tray.
B Eject hole
This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually.
C Access indicator
This indicator will light while the CD inserted in the drive
is being accessed.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
23
Basic operation on the AW1600
Basic operation on the AW1600
This section explains basic operations on the AW1600.
2
● Buttons
Viewing the display
Introducing the AW1600
The display of the AW1600 shows the following information.
1
2
3
4
Buttons in the display are used to
switch a parameter on/off, to select
one of multiple choices, or to execute a specific function. A button
that is currently on will be displayed in black with white text. A
button that is currently off will be
displayed in white with black text.
● Knob/fader/parameter display area
The knob/fader/parameter display area within the display is used to edit the value of the corresponding
parameter.
5
1 Screen name
This is the name of the currently selected screen.
B Selected channel
This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for operations. The display has the following significance.
• TRACK 1–8.......................Track channels 1–8
• TRACK 9/10–15/16...........Track channels 9/10–15/16
• INPUT 1–8 ........................Input channels 1–8
• STEREO ...........................Stereo output channel
• PAD 1–4............................Pad channels 1–4
Operating the knobs or keys of the Selected Channel section will edit the parameters of the channel that is selected
here.
C Counter (left side)
This indicates the current location within the song. When
the AW1600 is in the default state, this counter will indicate the absolute time (the time from where you began
recording the song) in units of hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds. At the left of this value is displayed the locate
point or marker that was passed most recently.
D Counter (right side)
This indicates the current location within the song in units
of measures/beats. The measures/beats are calculated
according to the tempo and time signature specified in the
tempo map for the song. The current tempo and time signature are displayed at the left of this value.
E Main screen
The information displayed in this area will depend on the
key that was last pressed. The following types of object
are displayed in the main screen.
● Cursor
The blinking frame within the display
is called the “cursor.” When an object
in the screen is enclosed by the cursor,
that object is selected for operations.
24
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Knob
fader
parameter
display area
● Page display area
Most screens are divided by function into two or more “pages.” The
page display area lists the pages
that can be selected within that
screen. The name of the currently
selected page is highlighted.
Accessing a screen/page/channel
When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW1600,
or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or
knob shown in the display, you will need to access the
desired screen and page.
1 Press the key or knob for the desired
screen.
The keys and knobs of various sections listed below
have their own screens, and the corresponding screen
will be displayed when you press a key or knob.
•
•
•
•
•
All keys in the Work Navigate section
All keys in the Quick Navigate section
The [VIEW] key of the Selected Channel section
All knobs of the Selected Channel section
The [SAMPLE EDIT] key of the Quick Loop Sampler
section
HINT
• When you switch screens, the page that was last used in that
screen will be displayed.
Basic operation on the AW1600
either repeatedly press the same key as in
step 1, or hold down the same key as in
step 1 and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
If there are more pages than can
be shown in one screen, an
arrow like the following will
appear in the page display area.
This arrow means that one or
more additional hidden pages
exist in that direction.
To access a hidden page, hold down the same key as in
step 1, and press the [CURSOR] key of the same
direction as the arrow.
In pages that display a list of parameters for multiple
channels, the screen may be divided into a page for the
input channels/pad channels and a page for the track
channels, since not all of the parameters can be shown
in a single screen. In this case, use the [INPUT SEL]
keys, pads 1–4, or [TRACK SEL] keys to select the
channels that you want to view.
Switching a button on/off
Here’s how to switch a button in the screen on/off.
1 Use the [CURSOR] keys to
move the cursor to the
desired button in the
screen.
2 Press the [ENTER] key.
The button will be switched on/
off.
If you move the cursor to a button that executes a specific function and then press the [ENTER]
key, that function will be executed.
Editing a value in the display
Here’s how to edit the value of a fader, knob, or parameter
shown in the display.
1 Use the [CURSOR]
keys to move the cursor to the desired
fader, knob, or parameter value.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to edit the value.
Inputting text
When you create a new song or save a scene memory or
library setting, a popup window will appear, allowing you
to assign a name for the song or setting.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
This popup window contains the following items and
functions.
2
Introducing the AW1600
2 To switch pages within a screen, you can
1 Text input box
This box lets you input characters, numerals, and symbols.
When you save the data for the first time, the box will contain a default name.
You can input a scene/library name or song name of up to
twelve characters.
B Text palette
This displays the characters, numerals, and symbols that
can be input in the text input box.
C CANCEL button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, you will return to the previous screen without changing the name.
D OK button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the scene/library will be saved or the new
song will be created.
E
button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the character that is currently selected in
the text input box will be switched between uppercase and
lowercase.
F INS button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, an “_” (underscore) will be inserted at the
location of the currently selected character (underlined), and
subsequent characters will move one character backward.
G DEL button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the currently selected character (underlined) will be deleted, and subsequent characters will
move one character forward.
To assign a new name, use the [CURSOR] keys to move
the cursor in the text input box to the character that you
want to change, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a
character.
When you have finished inputting the name, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to apply
the new name.
NOTE
• If you want to add characters to a name that has less than the
maximum number of characters, move the cursor to the INS button and press the [ENTER] key to insert “_”, then change the
name as required.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
25
Basic operation on the AW1600
Using the Selected Channel section
2
You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel
section to directly operate the mix parameters (EQ,
dynamics, pan, etc.) of the currently selected channel.
1 Use the [TRACK SEL] keys, [INPUT SEL]
Introducing the AW1600
keys, [STEREO SEL] keys, or pads 1–4 to
select the channel that you want to operate.
When using the
Selected Channel
section, you must
first select the channel that you want to
operate. The currently selected channel is indicated in
the upper left of the screen.
The channels correspond to each key or pad as follows.
• [TRACK SEL] keys 1–8 ....Track channels 1–8
• [TRACK SEL]
keys 9/10–15/16 ................Track channels
9/10–15/16
NOTE
• Simply turning the knobs of the Selected Channel section will
not cause the screen to change.
• If you turn the [DYN] knob immediately after recalling a preset
library that includes dynamics settings, multiple dynamics
parameters will change simultaneously, affecting the way in
which dynamics processing is applied. The depth of this
change will depend on the library that is recalled.
3 If you want to access the screen for a
parameter and edit it in greater detail, press
one of the five knobs or the [VIEW] button.
Pressing each knob or button will access the following
screens.
Press the [EQ] knob
The EQ screen will appear.
Press the [DYN] knob
The DYN screen will appear.
Press the [EFFECT 1] knob
The EFF 1 screen will appear.
• [INPUT SEL] keys 1–8 ......Input channels 1–8
• [STEREO SEL] key ...........Stereo output channel
Press the [EFFECT 2] knob
The EFF 2 screen will appear.
• Pads 1–4............................Pad channels 1–4
2
According to the parameter you want to
edit, turn the five knobs of the Selected
Channel section.
The following items will change when you turn each
knob.
Press the [PAN/BAL] knob
The PAN screen will appear.
Press the [VIEW] key
The VIEW screen will appear.
● EQ screen EDIT page
Turn the [EQ] knob
This changes the amount of boost/cut for the selected EQ
band. To select the EQ band, use the [HIGH], [HI-MID],
[LO-MID], and [LOW] keys located at the right.
Turn the [DYN] knob
This changes the depth of
dynamics processing.
Turn the [EFFECT 1] knob
This adjusts the level of the
signal that is sent from that
channel to internal effect 1.
(If the stereo output channel
is selected, this adjusts the
return level from internal
effect 1.)
Turn the [EFFECT 2] knob
This adjusts the level of the
signal that is sent from that
channel to internal effect 2.
(If the stereo output channel
is selected, this adjusts the
return level from internal
effect 2.)
Turn the [PAN/BAL] knob
This adjusts the pan of the signal that is sent from that channel
to the stereo bus. (If the stereo output channel is selected, this
adjusts the balance of the left and right channels.)
26
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
4 Move the cursor in the screen to the
desired parameter, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial or the [ENTER] key to operate the
parameter.
NOTE
• If you change individual parameters in the DYN screen, the
parameter that you operate last will be assigned to the [DYN]
knob.
• If you want to return to the state in which turning the [DYN]
knob will adjust multiple parameters simultaneously, you must
once again recall the library containing the dynamics settings
you recalled prior to editing in the DYN screen.
Chapter 3
Listening to the demo song
Connect external devices and turn on the power
The following diagram shows a typical example of connections to the AW1600. Connect your
mics, instruments, and external devices as shown in this diagram.
Rhythm machine
Synthesizer
Mics
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
INPUT 8
(HI-Z)
INPUT 1–8
3
Listening to the demo song
When the AW1600 is shipped from the factory, its hard disk contains a demo
song. This chapter explains how to play back the demo song while you operate the faders and keys of the front panel.
Electric guitar/
Electric bass
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT
DAT recorder, MD recorder, etc.
00.00.00.00
DIGITAL
STEREO IN
MONITOR OUT
PHONES
Headphones
Monitor system
VOL
VOL
When you have finished making connections, turn on the power switch of each device in the following order.
1 External devices such as audio sources or effect
After the opening screen, the following screen will appear.
processors connected to the input/output jacks of
the AW1600
B The AW1600 itself
C The monitor system connected to the output jacks of
the AW1600
When you turn on the power of the AW1600, the last-used
song will be loaded automatically. When you turn on the
power of the AW1600 with the factory settings, a blank
song will be loaded, so you can start recording immediately.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
27
Loading the demo song
Loading the demo song
Here’s how to load the demo song from the hard disk.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[SONG] key.
3
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
“The_Only_One.”
The SONG screen will appear, where you can save or
load songs.
Listening to the demo song
4 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
2 Either press the [SONG] key repeatedly or
hold down the [SONG] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the LIST
page.
In this page, you can select a song on the hard disk,
and load or delete it.
2
A popup window like the following will appear. This
window asks you whether you want to save the current
song.
1
5 Move the cursor to either YES (save the current song) or NO (don’t save the current
song), and press the [ENTER] key.
1 List
This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard
disk. The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the center of the list indicates the song that is selected for
operations. The highlighted line indicates the song that
is currently loaded into the AW1600. (This is called
the “current song.”)
NOTE
• Each row of the list will display the song name, data size, and
bit depth (16/24 bit).
B SORT field
These three buttons let you select how the songs in the
list will be sorted. Choose the NAME button (sort
alphabetically), OLD button (sort by save date), or
SIZE button (sort by size).
28
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
The song data will be loaded, and “The_Only_One”
will become the current song.
NOTE
• If you select NO, any changes that you made to the current
song since you last saved it will be lost.
“You’re the Only One”
© Timothy Akers
Playing the demo song
Playing the demo song
Here’s how to play back the demo song you loaded, and adjust the monitor level.
hold down the [VIEW] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the VIEW
screen METER page.
3 Press the PLAY [
] key.
3
The demo song will begin playing, and the level of
each track channel will be displayed in the METER
page of the VIEW screen.
4 To adjust the monitor level appropriately,
use the AW1600’s [MONITOR PHONES]
knob and the volume control of your monitor system.
Listening to the demo song
1 Either press the [VIEW] key repeatedly or
HINT
• The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings
of the mixer. This means that playback will occur using the
pre-specified balance — you do not need to operate the faders.
The VIEW screen METER page contains meters that
show the input level of each channel and the output
level of the stereo output channel. It is convenient to
display this page when you want to check the level of
each track.
NOTE
5 To stop the song, press the STOP [■] key.
• Make sure that the selected channel area at the upper left of
the METER page indicates either TRACK 1–8 or TRACK 9/
10–15/16. If neither of these are displayed, press either the
[TRACK SEL] key 1–8 or 9/10–15/16.
2 Lower the AW1600’s [STEREO] fader to the
– infinity position. Also make sure that the
AW1600’s [MONITOR PHONES] knob and
the volume of your monitor system are
turned down.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
29
Mixing the demo song
Mixing the demo song
When you play back a song, tracks 1–16 of the recorder are directly connected to track channels
1–8 and 9/10–15/16 of the mixer. The signals that pass through track channels 1–8 and 9/10–15/
16 are sent to the stereo bus, routed through the stereo output channel, and sent from the STEREO/AUX OUT jacks or the MONITOR OUT jacks.
3
● Signal flow during song playback
Listening to the demo song
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Track 12
Track 13
Track 14
Track 15
Track 16
Stereo
output
channel
Track
channels
Stereo bus
Mixer section
Track channels 1–8 and 9/10–15/16 are directly controlled by the faders and [TRACK SELECT]
keys of the panel. Here’s how you can adjust the mix level of each track channel and switch it on/
off while the song plays back.
30
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Mixing the demo song
] key.
5 Press the [TRACK SEL] key(s) for the track
channel(s) that you want to mute. (You may
select more than one channel.)
3
The demo song will be rewound to the beginning.
2 Press the PLAY [
] button.
The demo song will begin playing.
3 While listening to the demo song, try operating faders 1–8 and 9/10–15/16.
Notice that the level of the corresponding track will
change. Operating the [STEREO] fader will change
the overall level of the song.
For example if you press [TRACK SEL] keys 1 and 3,
the screen will change as follows, and track channels 1
and 3 will be muted. At this time, [TRACK SEL] keys
1 and 3 will go dark. The graphic in the display will
also indicate this.
NOTE
• The [TRACK SEL] key you press last will always light orange
regardless of the mute status. This indicates that this channel
is the “selected channel” (→ p. 26).
4 To mute the playback of
a specific track, access
the MONITOR screen
ON/OFF page, either by
repeatedly pressing the
[MONITOR] key or by
holding down the [MONITOR] key and using
the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
Listening to the demo song
1 Press the RTZ [
NOTE
• In this page, pressing the [STEREO SEL] key will have no
effect.
6 To cancel the muted state, press the same
[TRACK SEL] key you pressed in step 5, to
make the indicator light green.
The MONITOR screen ON/OFF page lets you switch
each channel on/off. A channel that is switched off in
this page will not be sent to the stereo bus or AUX bus,
and will be muted.
NOTE
• This mute function switches muting on or off for the mixer
track channels. Recorder track playback can be muted via the
TRACK screen VIEW page (→ p. 48).
7 If you want to monitor the playback of just a
specific track, access the MONITOR screen
SOLO page by either repeatedly pressing
the [MONITOR] key or by holding down the
[MONITOR] key and using the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys.
The SOLO page of the MONITOR screen lets you
mute all other channels while listening to only a specific channel. (This is called the “solo” function.)
When you sol a channel in this page, the signals of the
remaining channels will be muted, and will no longer
be sent to the stereo bus or AUX buses.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
31
Mixing the demo song
8 Press the [TRACK SEL] key of the track
channel that you want to solo.
3
Listening to the demo song
For example if you press [TRACK SEL] key 3, the
screen will change as follows, and channels other than
track channel 3 will be muted. At this time, [TRACK
SEL] key 3 will light orange, and the other [TRACK
SEL] keys and [INPUT SEL] keys will go dark.
NOTE
• Only one channel can be soloed at a time.
9 To cancel soloing, press the currently
selected [TRACK SEL] key (lit orange) once
again.
NOTE
• While playing the demo song, the level or the on/off status of
a channel you adjusted manually may return to its previous
setting. This is because the Scene function has switched the
state of the mixer settings, and is not a malfunction (→
p. 149). You can use the Recall Safe function to temporarily
prevent scenes from being recalled. (→ p. 80)
32
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 4
Recording to a sound clip
Connecting your instrument or mic
First, the instrument or mic that you want to record must be connected to a MIC/LINE INPUT
jack. The various types of jack are compatible with the following sources.
● MIC/LINE INPUT (XLR) jacks 1–8
These are XLR-type balanced input jacks. Use a male
XLR ↔ female XLR cable to connect your mic, direct
box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a balanced output
jack.
Alternatively, you can use a 1/4" phone ↔ 1/4" phone
cable to connect an instrument with unbalanced output,
such as a synthesizer or rhythm machine.
4
Recording to a sound clip
The AW1600 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back
independently of the recorder section. You can use a sound clip to quickly
record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to
the AW1600 or on the pads. This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song
or arrangement, or to record a simple accompaniment for practicing a part.
This chapter explains how an instrument or mic connected to an input jack
can be recorded as a sound clip.
1/4" phone ↔ phone cable
Synthesizer/
rhythm machine
Balanced cable
(male XLR ↔ female XLR)
Mic
Preamp or effect processor with balanced output
Direct box
MIC/LINE INPUT
(TRS phone) jacks 1–8
MIC/LINE INPUT
(XLR) jacks 1–8
Electric
guitar/bass
● MIC/LINE INPUT jack 8 (Hi-Z)
Use a 1/4" phone ↔ phone cable to directly connect an
electric guitar/bass that has passive pickups.
● MIC/LINE INPUT (TRS phone) jacks 1–8
These are TRS-type balanced input jacks. Use a 1/4" TRS
phone ↔ female XLR cable to connect your mic, direct
box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a balanced output
jack.
1/4" phone ↔ phone cable
MIC/LINE INPUT
(HI-Z) jacks 8
1/4" TRS phone ↔
female XLR cable
Electric guitar/bass with
passive pickups
Mic
Preamp or effect processor with balanced output
Direct box
MIC/LINE INPUT
(TRS phone) jacks 1–8
Electric
guitar/bass
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
33
Adjusting the input level
Adjusting the input level
The signals that are input from MIC/LINE INPUT jacks 1–8 are sent to input channels 1–8
respectively. Here’s how to adjust the input level of the input channel, and make settings so that
you can hear the sound from your monitor system via the stereo bus.
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-
tion. Also turn down the [GAIN] knob for the
MIC/LINE INPUT jack to which your instrument/mic is connected.
4 2 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key for the
jack to which your instrument/mic is conRecording to a sound clip
nected.
When you press and hold an [INPUT SEL] key, the
INPUT SETTING popup window will appear, allowing you to make settings for the corresponding input
channel. The following diagram is an example of the
screen that will appear if you press and hold [INPUT
SEL] key 1.
2
3 While you watch the level meter in the
popup window, produce sound on your
instrument, and turn the [GAIN] knob to
adjust the input level.
As you turn the [GAIN] knob toward the right, the
level meter in the popup window will move more
widely. (However, you will not yet hear anything from
your monitor system.)
For the best audio quality, adjust the level as high as
possible without allowing the meter to clip when the
loudest volume occurs.
4 While you play your
instrument, raise the
[STEREO] fader to the
0 dB position.
The LR meters at the right
of the screen will now
move. As you turn the
[MONITOR/PHONES]
knob toward the right, you
should begin to hear sound
from your monitor system.
4
1
3
NOTE
1 INPUT LEVEL knob
Move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA/
JOG] dial to adjust the level of the input channel. Normally you will leave this at the default setting of 0 dB.
The current level is shown by the value (dB units)
above the knob.
B Stereo bus assign switch
When you move the cursor to this knob and press the
[ENTER] key, the signal that is sent from the corresponding input channel to the stereo bus will be
switched on/off.
C Level meter
This indicates the input level of the input channel. The
symbol in the window indicates the location at
which the level is detected.
D EXIT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
34
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• If you still do not hear sound after raising the [STEREO] fader,
check the INPUT SETTING popup window to make sure that
the stereo bus assign switch is turned on, and that the INPUT
LEVEL knob value has not been set below 0.0 dB.
5 To exit the INPUT SETTING popup window,
move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the previous screen.
HINT
• The level settings described above are the basic settings for
any type of recording — not just for a sound clip. By using the
[GAIN] knob to raise the level as far as possible without allowing distortion to occur, you can ensure that the input signal is
converted into digital form with the highest possible quality
before it is input to the mixer section. If the [GAIN] knob is not
raised sufficiently, you may not be taking full advantage of the
available dynamic range of the mixer section and recorder
section. When the input LEVEL knob and [STEREO] fader are
set to the 0 dB position, the input level will be output without
change to the recorder and monitor.
Recording/playing a sound clip
Recording/playing a sound clip
Now that preparations are complete, let’s record to a sound clip.
The post-fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly on a sound clip. For
playback, the signal will be sent immediately before the stereo output channel fader. (EQ and
dynamics cannot be applied to the playback of a sound clip.)
● Signal flow when using a sound clip
Recording to a sound clip
4
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
Metronome
MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks
Sound
clip
Input
channels
Stereo
output
channel
Stereo bus
Mixer section
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
35
Recording/playing a sound clip
4 In the Transport section, hold down the
■ Recording a sound clip
REC [●] key and press the PLAY [
1 In the Locate section, press the [SOUND
CLIP] key.
The CLIP screen will appear, where you can record
and play sound clips.
] key.
The metronome will begin sounding, and the counter
display will advance. The counter in the CLIP screen
always starts from 0, and indicates the current time in
minutes/seconds/milliseconds. This counter is separate
from the counter of a conventional song.
5 Play your instrument in time with the metronome.
HINT
4
Recording to a sound clip
1
2
3 4
5
1 Metronome button
Switches the metronome on/off.
B Metronome knob
Adjusts the volume level of the metronome. The value
shown above the knob shows the current setting in dB
units.
C START button
Specifies the current location as the start point of the
sound clip (the location at which playback will begin).
The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/milliseconds at the left.
D END button
Specifies the current location as the end point of the
sound clip (the location at which playback will end).
The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/milliseconds at the left.
E CLIP button
When you turn this button on, the START button (3)
and END button (4) settings will be enabled.
NOTE
• Recording and playback in the Recorder section cannot be
performed while the CLIP screen is displayed.
2 If you want to use the metronome, move the
cursor to the metronome button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The time signature and tempo used by the metronome
are displayed above the metronome button.
3 To change the tempo of the metronome,
move the cursor to the tempo value and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.
NOTE
• The time signature of the metronome is determined by the
tempo map setting immediately prior to accessing the CLIP
screen. Please be aware that the setting cannot be edited
from this screen. (For details on tempo map settings →
p. 149)
36
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• The metronome sound will not be recorded in the sound clip.
If necessary, you can move the cursor to the metronome knob
and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the volume level of the
metronome sound.
• In addition to an instrument connected to the MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks, your performance on the quick loop sampler
pads can also be recorded.
• The knobs/keys of the selected channel are active even while
the CLIP screen is displayed. If necessary, you can record the
signal processed by EQ and dynamics (→ p. 50).
6 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
The display will show S and E symbols to indicate the
start point and end point.
HINT
• With the default settings of the AW1600, a maximum of 30
seconds can be recorded in a sound clip. If you continue
recording for longer than 30 seconds, the last 30 seconds of
your playing before you stopped recording will be recorded.
(However, the counter display during recording will continue
to advance.)
• In the UTILITY screen PREFER page, you can specify up to
180 seconds as the maximum length that can be recorded in
a sound clip. You are free to make this setting before creating
a new song, but this cannot be changed once the song has
been created. (→ p. 169)
Recording/playing a sound clip
4 Stop playback, move the cursor to the CLIP
■ Playing a sound clip
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
sound clip, press the PLAY [
] key.
The region from where you began recording to where
you stopped recording will play repeatedly. To stop,
press the STOP [■] key. If you record again, the previous data will be overwritten.
In the CLIP screen, the keys of the Transport section
will have the following functions.
Key
RTZ [
REW [
] key
] key
Function
Returns to the location at which you
began recording. If the CLIP button is on,
this returns to the Start point.
Rewinds the current location toward the
beginning. You will stop when you reach
the location at which you began recording
or the Start point.
] key
Fast-forwards the current location. You will
stop when you reach the location at which
you stopped recording or the End point.
STOP [■] key
Stops playback, recording, rewind, or fastforward.
PLAY [
Starts playback. Pressing this key during
playback does nothing.
FF [
] key
REC [●] key
If you hold down this key while stopped
and press the PLAY [
] key, recording
will begin. Pressing this key during playback does nothing.
HINT
• You will not hear the metronome and pads 1–4 while a sound
clip is playing. However, you can still monitor the signals of
input channels 1–8.
The CLIP button will turn on, and the specified Start
point and End point will be enabled.
NOTE
• The START button, END button, and CLIP button are disabled
while the sound clip is playing.
HINT
• The region of data between the specified Start point and End
point can be copied to an audio track of the Recorder section
by using the EDIT screen COPY command (→ p. 132).
5 To exit the CLIP screen, press the [SOUND
CLIP] key.
A popup window will ask you for confirmation. Move
the cursor to the OK button to exit the CLIP screen or
to the CANCEL button to cancel, and press the
[ENTER] key.
When you exit the CLIP screen, you will return to the
TRACK screen VIEW page. However you can press
the [SOUND CLIP] key at any time to play back the
previously recorded content or record a new performance.
4
Recording to a sound clip
1 To hear the content that you recorded in the
NOTE
• When you record a sound clip, the previous recording will be
lost. Please be aware that the Undo function cannot be used
to recover a deleted sound clip. Even if you save the song
immediately prior to recording a new sound clip, the previous
sound clip will not be restored if you recall the song data.
HINT
2 If you want to change the playback region
of the sound clip, stop at the location that
you want to specify as the Start point, move
the cursor to the START button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
• A popup window will also ask you to confirm that you want to
exit the CLIP screen if you press a key in the Work Navigate
section or Quick Navigate section while playback is stopped
in the CLIP screen.
• The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored for each
song.
The current location will be registered as the Start
point.
3 In the same way, stop at the location that
you want to specify as the End point, move
the cursor to the END button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
37
4
Recording to a sound clip
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
38
Chapter 5
Track recording
This chapter explains how to create a new song, and record the audio signal
from an instrument or mic connected to the AW1600 onto the first track of
your song.
Creating a new song
In order to begin recording on the AW1600, you must first create a new song.
HINT
1 In the Work Navigate section, either press
the [SONG] key repeatedly or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the LIST page.
2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
4 Select either 16 BIT or 24 BIT, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Next, a popup window will appear, allowing you to
specify the items whose settings will be carried over
from the current song.
Track recording
5
• When you start up the AW1600 for the first time, an empty song will be loaded automatically.
If you use this automatically-loaded song, the procedure described here is not necessary.
You may choose one or more of the following items if
desired.
• SCENE button........... Scene memories
• LIBRARY button ....... EQ, dynamics, effects, and
channel libraries
• TEMPO button .......... Tempo map
3 Move the cursor to YES (to save the current
song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the
current song) and press the [ENTER] key.
The song bit depth selection window will then appear.
For example if you have saved effect settings in a
library for the current song and would like to use these
settings for the new song as well, you would turn on
the LIBRARY button.
HINT
• You may also import these settings from another song later
(→ p. 151).
5 Use the buttons to choose the items that
will be carried over from the current song.
Then move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• See page 143 for more information on song bit depth (quantization bits).
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing
you to assign a name to the song.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
39
Creating a new song • Direct recording and Bus recording
6 Assign a name to the song (for details on
assigning a name → p. 25).
7 To create the new song, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
A new song will be created, and you will return to the
SONG screen LIST page.
HINT
• If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the
OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the
SONG screen LIST page without creating a new song.
• You may also edit the song name later (→ p. 145).
5
Direct recording and Bus recording
Track recording
Instruments/mics connected to the AW1600 can be assigned to tracks in one of the following two
ways.
■ Direct recording
With this method, input channels are assigned to tracks in a one-to-one correspondence.
This method requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you
use. However, this method has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume,
pan (stereo position), and tone of each instrument after it has been recorded.
Synthesizer/rhythm machine
MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks
Input
channels
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
40
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Stereo output
channel
Mixer section
Direct recording and Bus recording
■ Bus recording
With this method, you can send multiple input channels to the L/R bus, and assign the
mixed signal to one or two tracks. This method requires fewer tracks. However, you will
need to decide on the final volume, pan, and tone of each instrument at the time of
recording. (You will not be able to adjust these independently after recording.)
Synthesizer/rhythm machine
MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks
Stereo
output
channel
Input
channels
Track recording
5
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
L/R bus
Track 3
Track 4
Mixer section
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
NOTE
• The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend
on the method you choose.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
41
Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)
Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
2 Connect instruments/mics to MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks 1–8.
3
In the Quick Navigate section, either press
the [RECORD] key repeatedly or hold down
the [RECORD] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the DIRECT page of
the RECORD screen.
5
C 1–8 button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, input channels 1–8 will be connected to
tracks 1–8.
D 9–16 button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, input channels 1–8 will be connected to
tracks 9–16.
E SAFE button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all connections will be cancelled.
Track recording
4 Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input
channel to which your instrument/mic is
connected.
The [INPUT SEL] keys and [TRACK SEL] keys will
blink red.
The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key will light red,
and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys will go dark. If
this input channel is not yet assigned to a track, all
[TRACK SEL] keys will blink red. This blinking indicates that the tracks can be selected as the recording
destination.
The screen will indicate how input channels are connected to tracks.
1
In the screen, the symbol for
that input channel will be highlighted.
HINT
3 4 5 2
1 INPUT
Indicates the connection status of input channels 1–8.
If you move the cursor to numbers 1–8 and press the
[ENTER] key, the INPUT SETTING popup window
will appear, allowing you to make settings for the corresponding input channel.
If you move the cursor to the symbol and press the
[ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted, and the
corresponding input channel will be selected as a
recording source.
B TRACK
Indicates the connection status of tracks 1–16.
If you move the cursor to the symbol and press the
[ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted, and the
corresponding track will be selected as a recording
destination.
42
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• You can also select an input channel by moving the cursor to
the
symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the
[ENTER] key.
• If you select an input channel to which a track is already
assigned, only the corresponding [TRACK SEL] key will blink
red.
• If you press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key of an input channel, the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear, allowing
you to make settings for the corresponding input channel. To
exit this window and return to the previous screen, move the
cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key.
Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)
5 Press the [TRACK SEL] key of the track on
which you want to record.
The selected input channel and track will be connected
internally. At this time, only the selected [INPUT
SEL] key and [TRACK SEL] key will be blinking red.
The blinking [TRACK SEL] key indicates that the corresponding track is in record-ready mode.
• To change the recording destination, press the [INPUT SEL]
key to make it light red, and then press the [TRACK SEL] key
of a different track.
• If both the recording-source inputs and the recording-destination tracks are paired and connected using the [INPUT SEL]/
[TRACK SEL] keys, two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels will be simultaneously assigned to two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered tracks.
7 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key for the
recording-source input channel, to access
the INPUT SETTING popup window.
HINT
8 Use the [GAIN] knob to adjust the input
level of the signal.
For details on adjusting the input level, refer to
“Recording to a sound clip” (→ p. 33).
5
Track recording
In the screen, a line will be
drawn to indicate the connection.
• You can also access the INPUT SETTING popup window by
moving the cursor to an input channel number in the
RECORD screen DIRECT page, and pressing the [ENTER]
key.
HINT
• You can also select a track by moving the cursor to the
symbol of the desired track and pressing the [ENTER] key.
• The input channel and track will be internally connected even
if you first press the [TRACK SEL] key and then press the
[INPUT SEL] key afterward.
• When an input channel is selected as a recording source, its
assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off,
and it will be connected to allow monitoring via the track channel.
• EQ and dynamics settings will be flat for a track channel that
is selected as the recording destination.
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as “M”
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks (→
p. 143), tracks 9 – 16 are muted and will not play back.
• The bit depth of a song can be verified via the SONG screen
LIST page.
6 If you want to record more than one instrument or mic simultaneously, assign other
input channels to tracks in the same way.
If an input channel is connected to a recording-destination, that recording-destination and the METER button will be added to the display in the INPUT
SETTING popup window.
By moving the cursor to the METER button and pressing the [ENTER] key, you can switch the location at
which the level is detected between “pre-fader”
(default setting; immediately after A/D) and “postfader” (after the signal has passed through EQ,
dynamics, and the level knob). Check that the increase
in level after passing through EQ and dynamics does
not cause the signal to clip.
9 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position.
10 To monitor the signal that you are record-
ing, raise the fader of the track channel that
you selected as the recording destination.
HINT
• To cancel a connection that you made, press the [INPUT SEL]
key to make it light red, and then press the [TRACK SEL] key
of the track that is selected as the recording destination. To
cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Normally when recording, you do not monitor the
input channel signal before it is recorded, but rather
the signal after passing through the recorder, via the
track channel. This lets you monitor the signal that is
actually being recorded, and also lets you adjust the
volume and tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal that is being recorded.
If the track channel fader for the recording-destination
track is set to the 0 dB position, the monitor level during recording will be the same as the playback level
after recording.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
43
Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)
● Monitor signal flow during recording
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
from the input
channels
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
5
Stereo
output
channel
Track recording
Track
channels
Stereo bus
Mixer section
11 To adjust the pan of the monitor signal,
press the [TRACK SEL] key for the corresponding track channel, and turn the [PAN/
BAL] knob of the Selected Channel section.
NOTE
• The pan setting of an input channel will have no effect if that
input channel is assigned to a track by direct recording.
44
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Assigning input signals to tracks (Bus recording)
Assigning input signals to tracks (Bus recording)
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
2 Connect instruments/mics to MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks 1–8.
3 In the Quick Navigate section, either press
4 Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input
channel to which you connected your
instrument or mic.
The current setting [INPUT SEL] key will light
orange, and that input channel will be selected for
operations.
the [RECORD] key repeatedly or hold down
the [RECORD] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the MIXED page of
the RECORD screen.
1
2
5
In the screen, the symbol for
the corresponding input channel
will be highlighted, and a line will
appear, indicating that this channel is connected to the bus.
Track recording
In the MIXED page of the RECORD screen, you can
assign the input channel signals to any one or two
tracks via the L/R bus.
HINT
• You can also select an input channel by moving the cursor to
the
symbol for the desired input channel and pressing the
[ENTER] key.
54 3
1 INPUT
Selects the record-source input channel.
B L/R bus
The two horizontal lines indicate the bus L/R signal
route. You can check the on/off status of the signal that
is sent from the record-source input channel(s) to bus
L or R, and check the tracks that will be the recorddestination of the L/R bus.
C TRACK
Selects the track(s) that will be the record-destination
of the L/R bus signal.
D SAFE button
To cancel all record-sources and record-destinations,
move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key.
E BUS button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, a dedicated fader and level meter for
the L/R bus will appear in the right of the screen. You
can use this to adjust the master level of the L/R bus.
• If you press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key of an input channel, the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear, allowing
you to make settings for the corresponding input channel. To
close this popup window and return to the previous screen,
move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER]
key.
5 Repeatedly press the
same [INPUT SEL] key as
in step 4, and the signal
sent from that input channel to the L/R bus will be
switched on/off.
Each time you press the
[INPUT SEL] key, the screen
will change as follows.
HINT
• For an input channel that is
selected as a record-source, the
assignment to the stereo bus will
automatically be turned off, and
connections will be made so that
the signal can be monitored via
the track channel.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
45
Assigning input signals to tracks (Bus recording)
6 As necessary, use the same procedure to
specify other input channels as recordingsources.
7 Press the [TRACK SEL] key(s) for the
record-destination track(s).
5
You can select up to two tracks as the record-destination.
If you select track 1, 3, 5, or 7, the signal will be connected to bus L. If you select track 2, 4, 6, or 8, the signal will be connected to bus R. If you select tracks 9/
10–15/16, odd-numbered tracks will be connected to
bus L, and even-numbered tracks will be connected to
bus R.
The screen will display lines to indicate how the signals are connected to the track(s).
11 To set the pan of each input channel, use
the [INPUT SEL] key to select a channel,
and turn the [PAN/BAL] knob of the
Selected Channel section.
When you use bus recording, it will not be possible to
adjust the pan or volume balance for individual instruments after they have been recorded on the track(s).
This means that you must finalize the pan and volume
balance when you send the signals from the input
channels to the L/R bus.
12 To adjust the volume balance of each input
channel, repeatedly press the [VIEW] key in
the Selected Channel section to access the
FADER page.
Track recording
When you want to set the volume balance of the input
channels, it is convenient to use the FADER page of
the VIEW screen. Here you can adjust the on/off status
and input levels for the input channels, pad channels,
and track channels — all in one page.
HINT
• EQ and dynamics settings will be flat for a track channel
whose track has been selected as a record-destination.
• If a single track is selected, the pan of the track channel will
be centered. If a paired track (→ p. 49) is selected, the oddnumbered/even-numbered track channels will be panned to
left and right respectively.
• The connection will be cancelled if you once again press the
[TRACK SEL] key of a currently selected track.
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as “M”
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks (→
p. 143), tracks 9 – 16 are muted and will not play back.
• The bit depth of a song can be verified via the SONG screen
LIST page.
13 While producing sound on your instru-
ments, use the [INPUT SEL] keys or CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
input channel that you want to control, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the volume balance.
NOTE
• We recommend that you not use the [GAIN] knob to adjust
the volume balance of the input channels. This will degrade
the S/N ratio, and may cause the sound to distort.
HINT
8 For each input channel to which you con-
nected an instrument or mic, press and
hold the [INPUT SEL] key to access the
INPUT SETTING popup window, and use
the [GAIN] knob to adjust the input level of
the signal.
For details on adjusting the input level, refer to
“Recording to a sound clip” (→ p. 33).
9 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position.
10 Raise the track channel fader for the
record-destination track, so that the monitor level is appropriate.
Now you will be able to monitor the signal that is
being sent to the track(s) via the L/R bus.
46
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• You can also use the INPUT LEVEL knob in the INPUT SETTING popup window to adjust the volume balance of the input
channels.
• Normally, the panel faders are dedicated to the track channels. However by changing an internal setting, you can use
the faders to control the input levels of the input channels. (→
p. 169)
Enabling the metronome
Enabling the metronome
Before you begin recording, set the tempo and volume of the metronome. If you will not be using
the metronome while recording, you can skip the following procedure.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the VIEW page.
4 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
]
press the [SONG] key or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the TEMPO page.
]
The TEMPO page lets you create a tempo map that
specifies the tempo and time signature of the song.
The tempo and time signature that you specify here
will be the basis for the measure/beat display counter,
the internal metronome, and the MIDI clock messages
generated by the AW1600.
2
Track recording
1
1 Metronome button
Switches the metronome on/off.
B Metronome knob
Adjusts the metronome volume level. The current
value is shown above the knob in dB units.
2 Move the cursor to the metronome button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The metronome will be turned on.
3 When you press the [PLAY] key to begin
playback, the metronome will begin sounding. As necessary, move the cursor to the
metronome knob and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the metronome level.
If you want to change the tempo or time signature,
press the [STOP] key to stop playback, and perform
the following procedure.
5
1
1 Tempo map events
These are the events recorded in the tempo map. When
you create a new song, a tempo map event of time signature = 4/4 and tempo = 120 will be created at the
beginning of the song (measure 1, beat 1).
5 Move the cursor to the TEMPO field of the
event, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to set
the tempo value.
You can set a tempo in a range of 30–250 (BPM).
6 If necessary, move the cursor to the METER
field and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
change the time signature.
You can set a time signature in a range of 1/4–8/4.
HINT
• It is also possible to change the tempo or time signature during a song. For details, refer to “Song management” (→
p. 143).
• It is also possible to use the Quick Loop Sampler as a rhythm
machine, instead of the metronome. For details, refer to
“Using sample libraries” (→ p. 113).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
47
Recording on a track
Recording on a track
Now that you have completed your preparations, let’s record on a track.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the VIEW screen.
2
3
2 In the Transport section, hold down the
REC [●] key and press the PLAY [
]
1
] key.
The metronome will begin sounding, and the counter
display will advance.
In the track view within the screen, the vertical line
that indicates the current location will advance toward
the right.
3 Play your instrument in time with the metronome.
5
Track recording
4 5
6
1 Track view
Graphically indicates the presence of data and markers
in tracks 1–16, pad tracks 1–4, and the stereo track.
B TRACK field
Selects the track that you want to operate in the screen.
You can select 1–16 (audio track 1–16), ST (stereo
track), or PAD 1–4 (pad track 1–4).
NOTE
• Changing the track here will not change the track to be
recorded.
C MUTE button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to mute the currently selected track.
NOTE
• This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder
track playback. This also affects the number of simultaneous
playback tracks in the recorder section (→ p. 143). It’s a good
idea to mute all unused tracks.
• Since 24-bit songs allow a maximum of 8 playback tracks (→
p. 143), mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 9 – 16.
• Mixer track channels can be muted via the MONITOR screen
ON/OFF page (→ p. 31).
D Track name
If you selected 1-16 or ST in the TRACK field, this
area displays the name that has been assigned to the
virtual track. If nothing has been recorded, a name of
“-NO REC-” will be assigned.
E WAVE button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the waveform of the currently selected
track will be displayed. This button will appear only if
you have selected 1–16 or ST in the TRACK field.
F NAME button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the TITLE EDIT popup window will
appear, allowing you to assign a name to the track.
48
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
The metronome sound will not be recorded on the
track. If necessary, move the cursor to the metronome
knob and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the metronome volume level.
4 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
I (In point) and O (Out point) symbols will appear in
the track view of the VIEW page, indicating the location of the most recent recording operation.
The [UNDO/REDO] key of the data entry/control section will light. This indicates that you can press the
[UNDO/REDO] key to execute the Undo function.
5 To hear the recorded content from the
beginning, press the RTZ [
] key to return
the counter display to zero, and press the
PLAY [ ] key.
6 If you want to redo the recording, press the
[UNDO/REDO] key.
The [UNDO/REDO] key will go dark, and you will
return to the state prior to recording. Repeat steps 2–5.
7 When you finish recording, press the Quick
Navigate Section [RECORD] key once
again, move the cursor to the SAFE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you for confirmation, so
move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key. Assignments of the input signals to
tracks will be cancelled. It will no longer be possible
to press the [REC] key, and this will prevent recording
from occurring accidentally.
8 If you are satisfied with the recorded con-
tent, save the song. (For details on saving
→ p. 63)
Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost
if you turn off the power of the AW1600 before saving
the song.
Pairing input channels/track channels
Pairing input channels/track channels
Pad tracks 1–4 and track channels 9/10–15/16 are permanently paired.
However, you may also specify pairing for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8) or track channels (1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8). When two channels are paired, most
of their parameters will be linked, so that operating one of the channels will cause the same setting to occur on the other channel as well.
This is convenient when you are recording a stereo audio source, or when you want to play back
two bus-recorded tracks as a single stereo track.
SEL] key) of one channel that you want to
pair, and then press the other [INPUT SEL]
key (or [TRACK SEL] key).
3 To defeat pairing, hold down the [INPUT
SEL] key (or [TRACK SEL] key) of one of
the channels, and press the other [INPUT
SEL] key (or [TRACK SEL] key).
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to cancel pairing.
4 To cancel pairing, press the OK button. If
you decide not to cancel pairing, move the
cursor to the CANCEL button and press the
[ENTER] key.
5
Track recording
1 Hold down the [INPUT SEL] key (or [TRACK
HINT
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the pairing.
• In the case of paired channels, setting the pan to far left or far
right will produce nominal level. (The levels before and after
passing through Pan will be the same.) In the case of paired
channels, setting the pan to center will produce nominal level.
2 Move the cursor to one of the following buttons and press the [ENTER] key.
• INPUT (TRACK) x → y
(x= odd number, y= even number)
...........Copy the settings of input (track) channel x
to y, and pair them.
• INPUT (TRACK) y → x
(x= odd number, y= even number)
...........Copy the settings of input (track) channel y
to x, and pair them.
• RESET BOTH
...........Initialize both input (track) channels, and
pair them.
• CANCEL
...........Cancel pairing.
When input channels are paired, all mix parameters
other than the [GAIN] knob and phase/pan settings
will be linked.
When track channels are paired, all mix parameters
other than the phase/pan settings will be paired. Operating just the odd-numbered fader will adjust the level
of both odd-numbered/even-numbered channels.
(While channels are paired, the even-numbered fader
has no effect.)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
49
Using the input library
Using the input library
The input library is a library of settings used to apply internal effects, EQ, or dynamics settings to
the input signal when you want to record the processed signal. Here’s how to apply input library
settings to the signal of an input channel.
1 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key of the
input channel for which you want to use the
input library, to access the INPUT SETTING
popup window.
4 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
desired input library data.
The input library data is organized into the following
categories.
Number
Abbreviation
00
5
Track recording
2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Category
Data for initializing the input channel.
01–25
EG
26–30
AG
Data suitable for electric guitar.
Data suitable for acoustic guitar.
31–35
BA
Data suitable for bass.
36–40
VO
Data suitable for vocals.
NOTE
• All input library data is read-only.
The following popup window will appear.
5 Select the desired data, and press the
[ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the recall
operation.
In this popup window, you can select whether the
internal effect 1 or 2 will be patched to the input channel.
NOTE
• When you use the input library, internal effect 1 or 2 will be
disconnected from the send/return of the mixer, and patched
to a specific input channel. For this reason, you can use the
internal effects on a maximum of two channels.
3 Move the cursor to the EFF1 button or EFF2
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The INPUT LIBRARY popup window will appear,
allowing you to select an input library.
1
2
3
1 List
This is the library list. The line surrounded by a dotted
line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected
for loading. When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial, the
data in the list will scroll upward or downward.
B RECALL button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to load the currently selected data.
C EXIT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to close the popup window.
50
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The data of the selected library will be loaded, and the
internal effect, EQ (or speaker simulator), and dynamics effect will be applied to the input signal.
Using the input library
Input library
MIC/LINE
INPUT jack
Speaker
simulator
Internal effect
to the bus
Dynamics
EQ
INPUT LEVEL
NOTE
• If the input channel is paired, the same settings will be applied to both channels.
7 If you want to adjust the effect, use the
[INPUT SEL] key to select the input channel. While you produce sound on your
instrument, adjust the [EQ] knob, [DYN]
knob, or [EFFECT 1]/[EFFECT 2] knobs of
the Selected Channel section.
8 In the same way, select input library set-
Track recording
5
Input channel
tings for the other input channels.
However, a maximum of two input channels can use
the internal effects at the same time.
Immediately after you select an input library, turning
the knobs of the Selected Channel section will control
the following items.
• Turning the [EQ] knob
...........Adjusts the amount of boost/cut for each
EQ band. To select the band that will be
adjusted, use the [HIGH] key, [HI-MID] key,
[LO-MID] key, or [LOW] key located at the
right.
• Turning the [DYN] knob
...........Simultaneously adjusts multiple dynamics
parameters to adjust the dynamics effect.
The result will depend on the library that
you selected.
• Turning the [EFFECT 1] knob
...........Adjusts the balance of direct sound and processed sound for internal effect 1.
• Turning the [EFFECT 2] knob
...........Adjusts the balance of direct sound and processed sound for internal effect 2.
NOTE
• Depending on the input library you select, the level of the
input channel may change. Re-adjust the volume balance
using the INPUT LEVEL knob in the INPUT SETTING popup
window.
HINT
• If turning the [EQ] knob or [DYN] knob does not produce the
desired result, you can reload new settings from the EQ
library or dynamics library (→ p. 77, 78).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
51
Using the EQ library
Using the EQ library
The EQ library contains EQ settings appropriate for a variety of instruments. Use these when you
want to apply EQ to an input channel while you record, or when you want to modify the EQ settings after recalling an input library.
1 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key of the
input channel for which you want to use the
EQ library, to access the INPUT SETTING
popup window.
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library that you want to use, and press the
[ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the library
recall operation.
5
Track recording
2 Move the cursor to the EQ button in the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
the [ENTER] key.
The EQ library will appear.
The selected library will be loaded.
1
5 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
6 If you want to adjust the EQ settings, press
the [HIGH] key, [HI-MID] key, [LO-MID] key,
or [LOW] key of the Selected Channel section to select the band, and turn the EQ
knob to adjust the amount of boost/cut.
2
3
1 List
This is the library list. The line surrounded by a dotted
line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected
for loading. When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial, the
data in the list will scroll upward or downward.
B RECALL button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to load the currently selected data.
C EXIT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to close the popup window.
HINT
• You can also access the EQ library by pressing the [EQ] knob
of the Selected Channel section. For details, refer to “Using
libraries and scene memories” (→ p. 73).
52
4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
• If turning the EQ knob does not change the tone, check
whether EQ may have been turned off for that channel
(→ p. 95).
HINT
• If necessary, you can also adjust the frequency and Q parameters of each band. For details, refer to “Using libraries and
scene memories” (→ p. 73).
Using the dynamics library
Using the dynamics library
The dynamics library contains dynamics settings suitable for a variety of instruments. As for the
EQ library, you can use this to apply dynamics processing to an input channel while you record,
or when you want to modify the dynamics settings after recalling an input library.
1 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key of the
input channel for which you want to use the
dynamics library, to access the INPUT SETTING popup window.
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
library that you want to use, and press the
[ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the library
recall operation.
2 Move the cursor to the DYN button in the
4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
the [ENTER] key.
The dynamics library will appear.
The selected dynamics library will be loaded.
1
5 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
Track recording
5
press the [ENTER] key.
6 If you want to adjust the dynamics settings,
turn the [DYN] knob of the Selected Channel section.
2
3
1 List
This is the library list. The line surrounded by a dotted
line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected
for loading. When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial, the
data in the list will scroll upward or downward.
B RECALL button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to load the currently selected data.
C EXIT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to close the popup window.
Turning the [DYN] knob immediately after a library
has been recalled will simultaneously adjust multiple
dynamics parameters to control the dynamics effect.
(The result will depend on the library that you select.)
NOTE
• If turning the [DYN] knob does not change the tone, check
whether dynamics may have been turned off for that channel
(→ p. 96).
HINT
• If necessary, you can also make detailed adjustments to the
individual dynamics parameters. For details, refer to “Using
libraries and scene memories” (→ p. 73).
HINT
• You can also access the dynamics library by pressing the
[DYN] knob of the Selected Channel section. For details, refer
to “Using libraries and scene memories” (→ p. 73).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
53
5
Track recording
54
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 6
Overdubbing
This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other
tracks while you listen to the previously-recorded tracks. This chapter also
explains how to switch virtual tracks and save songs.
About overdubbing
6
Overdubbing
“Overdubbing” is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you
monitor the playback of previously-recorded tracks.
The diagram below shows the signal flow when you play back tracks 1–4 and overdub track 5. In
this example, the signal that is input from MIC/LINE INPUT jack 1 is routed through recorder
track 5 and sent to track channel 5. This signal is then sent to the stereo bus, mixed with the playback sound of track channels 1–4, and output from the STEREO/AUX OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks / PHONES jack.
● Signal flow when overdubbing
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
MIC/LINE input
jacks
Input
channels
Track
channels
Stereo output
channel
Stereo bus
Mixer section
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
55
Assigning the input signal to a track • Instantly recalling an EQ library
Assigning the input signal to a track
In order to overdub, you must first assign the mic or instrument to a new track. The basic procedure is the same as when recording the first track.
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
2 Connect your instrument or mic to a MIC/
LINE INPUT jack.
3 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
4 Assign the input channel to which your
instrument/mic is connected to a new track,
and adjust the level.
For details on this step, refer to “Track recording” (→
p. 39). The diagram below shows an example of when
input channel 1 is assigned to track 5.
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the DIRECT page of the
RECORD screen.
6
The [INPUT SEL] keys and [TRACK SEL] keys will
blink red.
NOTE
Overdubbing
• The number of tracks that can be assigned in a 24-bit song is
limited (→ p. 143).
HINT
• In this example we will use “direct recording,” in which one
input channel is assigned to one track. However, you may
also use “bus recording,” in which multiple input channels are
sent to the L/R bus and recorded on one or two tracks.
Instantly recalling an EQ library
The chapter entitled “Track recording” explained how to access the LIBRARY page of the EQ
screen and load an EQ library to change the EQ. This section explains how you can instantly
recall an EQ library.
1 Press the [INPUT SEL] key of the input
channel for which you want to use a library.
The corresponding input channel will be selected for
operations.
When you turn the [EQ] knob to left or right while
pressing it, the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen will
appear.
2 In the Selected Channel section, press
down the [EQ] knob and turn it.
Turn while
pressing
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select an EQ
library. Then move the cursor to the
RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
The selected library will be loaded.
4 If you want to adjust the EQ settings, use
the [HIGH] key, [HI-MID] key, [LO-MID] key,
and [LOW] key of the Selected Channel section to select the EQ band, and turn the
[EQ] knob to adjust the amount of boost or
cut.
HINT
• If necessary, you can make detailed adjustments to EQ
parameters such as the center frequency and Q (→ p. 95).
56
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Instantly recalling a dynamics library • Setting the mix balance and pan
Instantly recalling a dynamics library
A dynamics library can be instantly recalled in the same way as an EQ library.
1 In the Selected Channel section, press
down the [DYN] knob and turn it.
When you turn the [DYN] knob to left or right while
pressing it, the LIBRARY page of the DYN screen
will appear.
Turn while
pressing
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a DYN
The selected library will be loaded.
3 If you want to adjust the dynamics effect,
turn the [DYN] knob in the Selected Channel section.
HINT
6
Overdubbing
library. Then move the cursor to the
RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
• In the same way, you can press and turn the [EFFECT 1]
knob or [EFFECT 2] knob in the Selected Channel to recall an
effect library.
• If necessary, you can make detailed adjustments to the
dynamics parameters (→ p. 96).
Setting the mix balance and pan
Here’s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously-recorded tracks and the tracks
that you now will be overdubbing.
1 While you play back the song, raise the
track channel faders for the previouslyrecorded tracks to an appropriate monitoring level.
2 Press the track channel [TRACK SEL] key
for a previously-recorded track, and use the
[PAN/BAL] knob of the Selected Channel
section to set the pan.
3 Stop the recorder, and while producing
sound on your instrument, adjust the fader
of the recording-destination track channel
so that the monitoring level is appropriate.
The track channel for the recording-destination track
will send the input signal to the stereo bus while
recording or stopped, and will send the track playback
signal to the stereo bus during playback. This means
that in order to monitor the input signal, you must stop
the recorder.
HINT
• The position of the track channel faders will not affect the
recording level. However if you set the faders to 0 dB, the
playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the
tracks.
4 Press the [TRACK SEL] key for the recording-destination track channel, and use the
[PAN/BAL] knob of the Selected Channel
section to set the pan.
In the same way as for the input channel signal, you
can also use EQ and dynamics to process the track
channel. To do this, press the [TRACK SEL] key to
select the track channel, and use the [EQ] knob or
[DYN] knob of the Selected Channel section to recall
a library and adjust the settings. This procedure will
not affect the signal that is recorded on the track.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
57
Overdubbing
Overdubbing
Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording-destination.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the VIEW page.
4 While monitoring the previously-recorded
]
tracks, play the instrument that you want to
overdub.
5 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control
section will light.
6 To listen to the recorded performance from
2 Move the cursor to the metronome button,
6
Overdubbing
58
and press the [ENTER] key to switch the
setting on or off as desired.
You can perform overdubbing whether the metronome
is on or off.
3 In the transport section, hold down the REC
[●] key and press the PLAY [
] key.
The metronome will begin sounding, and the counter
display will advance.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
the beginning, press the RTZ [
] key to
return the counter display to zero, and
press the PLAY [ ] key.
HINT
• If you recorded from the middle of the song, you can press the
[IN] key to move to the location at which you began recording.
7 If you are satisfied with the recorded performance, save the song. (For details on saving → p. 63)
If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/
REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps
3–7.
Punch-in/out
Punch-in/out
If you make a mistake while overdubbing, you can re-record just the region in which you made
the mistake. This process is called “punch-in/out.”
Punch-in/out can be performed either as “manual punch-in/out” in which you switch between
recording and playback manually, or as “auto punch-in/out” in which recording and playback will
switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand.
Here’s how to perform punch-in/out using the keys of the
transport section or a foot switch.
you want to perform punch-in/out using a
1 Iffoot
switch, connect a separately sold foot
switch (Yamaha FC5 or equivalent) to the
rear panel FOOT SW jack.
listen to the newly-recorded content,
8 To
locate to a point just before the punch-in
point, and press the PLAY [
you are satisfied with the newly-recorded
9 Ifcontent,
save the song. (For details on saving → p. 63)
If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/
REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps
4–9.
The following diagram shows the manual punch-in/out
procedure.
the DIRECT page of the RECORD
2 Access
screen, and make sure that your instrument/mic is assigned to the track on which
you want to punch-in.
At this time, the [INPUT SEL] key of the recordingsource and the [TRACK SEL] key of the recordingdestination will blink red.
] key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Overdubbing
Manual punch-in/out
To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key
7 (or
press the foot switch).
16
play
record
play
to a point earlier than where you
3 Locate
want to punch-in.
You may find it convenient to register a marker at a location one or two measures earlier than the point at which
you want to punch-in, so you can quickly return to that
point. (For details on registering a marker → p. 67)
transport section, press the PLAY
4 In[ the
] key. (Alternatively, press the foot
switch.)
The song will begin playing. At this time, the track
playback sound of the recording-destination track
channel will be sent to the stereo bus, so you will not
be able to monitor the input signal.
the point where you want to begin
5 At
recording, hold down the PLAY [ ] key
and press the REC [●] key (or press the
foot switch once again), and begin playing
your instrument.
punch-in
punch-out
Auto punch-in/out
Auto punch-in/out is a function that performs the punch-in
and punch-out operations automatically. In order to use
this function, you must first specify the punch-in location
(the In point) and the punch-out location (the Out point).
the DIRECT page of the RECORD
1 Access
screen, and make sure that your instrument/mic is assigned to the track on which
you want to punch-in.
The recording-destination track will switch from playback to recording (“punch-in”).
The recording-source [INPUT SEL] key and the
recording-destination [TRACK SEL] key will light
red, and the signal of the corresponding track channel
will switch from the track playback to the input signal.
the point where you want to stop record6 At
ing, press the PLAY [ ] key (or press the
foot switch).
The recording-destination track will switch from
recording back to playback (“punch-out”).
The recording-source [INPUT SEL] key and the
recording-destination [TRACK SEL] key will blink
red.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
59
Punch-in/out
2 Locate to the point at which you want to
8 To perform the actual auto punch-in/out,
punch-in.
stop the recorder, then hold down the REC
[●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.
3 In the Locate section, hold down the [SET]
1 Only the PLAY [
] key will light, and playback
will begin from the pre-roll point.
key and press the [IN] key.
The current location will be registered as the In point.
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC
4 Locate to the point at which you want to
[●] key will light, and recording will begin
(“punch-in”).
punch-out.
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the
5 In the Locate section, hold down the [SET]
REC [●] key will go dark, recording will stop, and
you will return to playback mode (“punch-out”).
key and press the [OUT] key.
The current location will be registered as the Out
point.
D When you reach the post-roll point, you will return
to the pre-roll point and stop.
9 To check the newly-recorded content, press
HINT
6
the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make it go dark,
and then press the PLAY [ ] key.
• If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely, you
can use the Nudge function (→ p. 71) which repeatedly plays
a short region before or after the current location, or use the
WAVE DISPLAY popup window (→ p. 72) which lets you view
the contents of the track as a waveform.
10 If you are satisfied with the newly-recorded
Overdubbing
content, save the song. (For the Save procedure → p. 63)
• The In point and Out point will be updated each time you
record. The location at which you last started recording will be
registered as the In point, and the location at which you last
stopped recording will be registered as the Out point.
If you decide to re-do the recording, you can go back
to the best take using the Undo list after performing
several overdubs by repeating steps 6–9 (→ p. 61).
The following diagram shows the auto punch-in/out
procedure.
6 In the Locate section, press the [AUTO
PUNCH] key.
The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and the Auto
Punch-in/out function will be enabled. You will automatically locate to a point a specific distance (the “preroll time”) ahead of the In point. This point is called
the “pre-roll point.”
7 To rehearse the auto punch-in/out, press
the PLAY [
] key.
Pre-roll
point
Auto punch-in
point
Auto punch-out
point
1
2
3
4
5
16
locate
play
rehearsal
1 The PLAY [
] key will light, and playback will
begin from the pre-roll point.
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC
[●] key will begin blinking, and the signal that you
are monitoring from the recording-destination
track channel will switch from the track playback
to the input signal (recording-source). (However,
recording will not actually occur.)
rehearsal
punch-in
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the
REC [●] key will go dark, and the signal that you
are monitoring from the recording-destination
track channel will return to the track playback.
D When you reach a point that is a specific distance
(the “post-roll time”) after the Out point (this point
is called the “post-roll point”), you will return to
the pre-roll point and stop.
HINT
• If you turn the Locate section [REPEAT] key on before step 7,
operations 1–4 of step 7 will be repeated up to fifteen times.
(The A-B Repeat function is disabled during this time.) If you
want to stop repeating the rehearsal, press the [REPEAT] key
once again or press the STOP [■] key.
• With the initial settings of the AW1600, the pre-roll and postroll times are each set to four seconds. You can adjust these
values in a range of 0–5 seconds (→ p. 169).
60
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
actual recording
punch-out
play
Post-roll
point
Using the Undo List
Using the Undo List
By using the AW1600’s Undo list, you can not only cancel the most recent recording or editing
operation, but can even backtrack through your work for as many as fifteen previous steps. This
is convenient when, for example, after performing several overdubs, you decide that you would
rather go back to the state immediately after you had recorded the third solo.
1 Press and hold the [UNDO/REDO] key.
The UNDO LIST popup window will appear.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a step
number.
3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The current song will revert to the state of the step you
selected.
6
1 Undo list
This is a list of the previously-performed recording
and editing operations.
From the left, the list shows a step number that indicates the order in which the operations were performed, the content of the operation, and the track/
virtual track that was affected by the recording or editing operation.
The current song is now in the state of the step that is
highlighted.
The step enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the step
to which the Undo function will return the song.
NOTE
• If you have already cancelled recent operations using the
Undo function before displaying the Undo list, previous steps
may not remain at all.
4 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The popup window will close, and you will return to
the previous screen.
Overdubbing
1
NOTE
• Please note that if you perform recording or editing after
“undoing” back to a certain step, the undo/redo data subsequent to that step will be erased. For example if you “undo”
the previous three steps, and then perform a recording or
editing operation, the undo/redo data for the previous steps 1
and 2 will be erased.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
61
Switching virtual tracks
Switching virtual tracks
Each audio track 1–16 contains eight virtual tracks. After overdubbing a solo part, you can switch
the virtual track for that track, and record a different take while preserving the previouslyrecorded content. Here’s how to switch the virtual track that is selected for a track.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the V.TR page.
2 Use the CURSOR [
]
In the V.TR page you can switch the virtual track (1–8)
that will be used for recording/playback by each audio
track 1–16.
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to
select the virtual track number that you
want to assign to the desired track.
3 Press the [ENTER] key.
The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of
the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will
now be used for recording/playback.
1
6
Overdubbing
2
1 TRACK
Indicates the track number 1–16.
B V.TR
Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual
track that is currently selected for each track is indicated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are
currently not selected, those that have been recorded
are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been
recorded are indicated as “–”.
4 If you want to assign a name to each virtual
track, repeatedly press the Work Navigate
[TRACK] key or hold down the [TRACK] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the VIEW page.
5 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a track
number.
6 Move the cursor to the NAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing
you to assign a name to the virtual track.
7 Assign a new name to the virtual track.
For details on how to assign a name, refer to page 25.
62
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Saving the current song
Saving the current song
This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk. If you accidentally turn off
the power of the AW1600 without saving the song, all recordings or operations that you performed since last saving the song will be lost. You should make a habit of saving the song at
appropriate breaks in your work.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [SONG] key or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the LIST page.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
]
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to save the current song.
In this page you can select a song on the hard disk, and
load or delete it.
1
3 To save the song, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button
(instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key,
the Save operation will be cancelled.
3
1 List
This is a list of the songs saved on the hard disk. The
line enclosed by a dotted frame in the center of the list
is the song to which your operation you perform will
apply. The highlighted line is the song that is currently
loaded into the AW1600. (This is referred to as the
“current song.”)
NOTE
• The song save operation always saves the current song,
regardless of the song that is selected in the list.
• You cannot save a song that is protected. If for example you
have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you
must disable the protect setting and then save the song.
(Making various settings for a song → p. 146)
HINT
B SORT field
• If necessary, you can change the name of the song before
you save it (→ p. 145).
Use these three buttons to select how the songs in the
list will be sorted. You can choose NAME (sort alphabetically), OLD (sort by date of saving), or SIZE (sort
by size).
• In the following situations, a popup window will ask whether
you want to save the current song; when you load an existing
song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or
when you shut-down the AW1600.
C SAVE button
• However, we recommend that you frequently save the song
you are working on, as a safeguard against accidents such as
the AW1600’s power cable being accidentally disconnected.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the current song will be saved.
6
Overdubbing
2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
63
Loading an existing song
Loading an existing song
Here’s how to load an existing song from the hard disk.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [SONG] key or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the LIST page.
]
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a song.
6
Overdubbing
3 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
save the current song.
4 Move the cursor to either YES (if you want
to save the current song) or NO (if you do
not want to save the current song), and
press the [ENTER] key.
The song you selected will be loaded.
NOTE
• If you select NO, all changes you made after last saving the
current song will be lost.
64
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 7
Various types of playback
This chapter explains how to use the locator and marker functions, and various other playback methods provided by the AW1600.
Using the locator
“Locate points” are locations you specify within a song in order to execute functions such as auto
punch-in/out and A-B repeat. You can use this function to “locate” (move the current location of
the song) to one of these points just by pressing a single key. On the AW1600, you can use the
following locate points.
These locate points are used to specify the region for auto
punch-in/out (→ p. 59). Normally, the beginning and end
of the recording you last performed will be automatically
set as the In point and Out point. However, you may
change these points as desired.
Start point = 00:00:00:00.00
Counter
display format
ABS 00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
SEC 00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
T.C
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:00:00.00
● A/B points
These locate points are used to specify the region for the
A-B Repeat function (→ p. 70). The A point and B point
can be set to any point in a song, either by pressing a key
or by operations in the screen.
S
Start point = 00:00:05:00.00
Counter
display format
● Start/end points
These locate points normally correspond to the beginning
and end of the song. When you create a new song, the
Start point will initially be set to absolute time
00:00:00.000. When you record, the end of the song will
automatically be set as the End point. If you record past
the previously-set End point, the End point will automatically move back.
If you select SEC or T.C. as the counter display format,
the Start point will be the basis (the zero point) of the time
and time code that are displayed. This means that if you
change the Start point, the display will change as follows,
depending on the counter display format.
HINT
• When you create an audio CD, the Start and End points can be
used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to
the audio CD (→ p. 102).
ABS 00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
SEC –00:00:05:00.00
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
T.C
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05:00.00
23:59:55:00.00
7
Various types of playback
● In/out points
S
HINT
• When the AW1600 transmits MTC to an external device, the Start
point will be the basis (the zero point) of the time code that is generated. The Start point will also be the basis (measure 1 beat 1) for
the measures displayed in the counter.
● Relative zero point
This locate point stores the relative zero position. When
you press the RTZ [
] key in the transport section, you
will move to this location. If the song is in the initial state,
the relative zero point will be the same as absolute time
00:00:00.000, but you can change this if desired by using
key operations or operations in the screen.
If you select REL as the counter display format, the current location will be displayed with the Relative Zero
point as 0.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
65
Using the locator
The following procedure shows how to register the current
location in one of the locate points, and then move the
song to that locate point.
1 Move the song to the point that you want to
register as a locate point.
3 To move to a locate point you registered,
press the corresponding key while the song
is stopped or playing.
The song will move to that location, and an icon will
appear at the left side of the counter to indicate the
currently selected locate point.
You can set a locate point whether the song is playing
or stopped.
Locator icon
2 Hold down the [SET] key and press the key
for the desired locate point.
This icon will remain visible until you play or rewind/
fast-forward past the previous or next locate point or
marker location.
Locate points that you register are displayed in the
TRACK screen VIEW page or PAD page as shown
below.
The locate points correspond to the following keys.
7
Various types of playback
In point
Locator icon
Out point
A point
HINT
B point
• Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of
the song.
Relative
Zero point
• Locate points can be adjusted as desired (→ p. 68). Locate
points other than the Start point and End point may also be
erased (→ p. 69).
• [IN] key .......................In point
• [OUT] key ...................Out point
• [A] key ........................A point
• [B] key ........................B point
• RTZ [
] key ............Relative Zero point
NOTE
• If you want to change the Start point or End point, use the
SONG screen POINT page. These points cannot be set by
key operations.
• The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when
you perform a recording operation.
66
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Using markers
Using markers
“Markers” are symbols that you assign at desired locations in a song, so that you can move
quickly to a desired point. You can assign up to 99 markers in each song. Use the [ ]/[ ] keys
to find and move to markers.
1 Move to the position in the song at which
you want to assign a marker.
You can assign a marker whether the song is playing
or stopped.
3 Press the [
] key to locate to the previous
marker, or press the [ ] key to locate to
the next marker.
2 Press the [MARK] key.
The top line of the display will briefly indicate
“MARK POINT SET.” This indicates that a marker
has been set. A new marker will be added each time
you press the [MARK] key.
Markers are automatically numbered 1–99 starting at
the beginning of the song. If you register a new marker
between two existing markers, subsequent markers
will be automatically renumbered upward.
Register a new marker
Marker icon
This icon will remain visible until you play or rewind/
fast-forward past the previous or next locate point or
marker location.
Markers that you register are displayed in the TRACK
screen VIEW page or PAD page as shown below.
7
Various types of playback
The song will move to that location, and an icon will
appear at the left of the counter to indicate the currently selected marker number.
Marker icon
HINT
• Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the
song.
• Markers can be deleted (→ p. 69) or moved (→ p. 68) as
desired.
• If you press the [MARK] key at a location in which a marker
has already been registered, the display will indicate “CANNOT SET MARK,” and a new marker will not be created.
NOTE
• Markers other than the marker displayed at the left of the
counter are shown as icons without a number, and indicate
their approximate location.
HINT
• When creating an audio CD, you can use markers to divide
the stereo track into the tracks that will be written to the audio
CD (→ p. 102).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
67
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker
Here’s how you can adjust the position of a previously-registered locate point or marker.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [SONG] key or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the POINT page.
Locate point
]
In the POINT page you can adjust the time location of
each locate point and marker.
POSITION field
MEAS field
REL.ZERO
Time code
START
Time code
Measure/beat
—
END
Time code
Measure/beat
IN
Counter display format
Measure/beat
OUT
Counter display format
Measure/beat
A
Counter display format
Measure/beat
B
Counter display format
Measure/beat
HINT
• If a locate point has not been registered, the numerical field
will indicate “--.”
1 2
7
3 Move the cursor to the locate point value
3
that you want to adjust, and turn the [DATA/
JOG] dial to change the value.
1 LOCATOR button
B MARKER button
Various types of playback
These buttons select whether the screen will show
locate points or markers. The button that is currently
turned on will be highlighted.
Only in the case of the Start point, a “Change START
Position?” popup window will ask you for confirmation when you attempt to change the value. Move the
cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key,
and then change the value.
C Locator point/marker display area
This area shows a list of the locate points or markers,
depending on whether you have selected the LOCATOR button or the MARKER button.
NOTE
• Changing the Start point will mean that locations already
recorded in a track will move relative to the measure lines
defined by the tempo map. Please be aware of this if you are
using measure display for the metronome or for the quick loop
sampler.
2 If you want to adjust the position of a locate
point, make sure that the LOCATE button is
turned on (highlighted) in the display.
When the LOCATOR button is on, the POINT page
will display the positions of each locate point.
1
2
3
4 To adjust the location of a marker, move the
cursor to the MARKER button in the display
and press the [ENTER] key.
When the MARKER button is on, the POINT page
will list the markers that have been registered.
2
3
5
4
1
1 Locate points
Shows the type of locate point and its abbreviation.
B POSITION
Shows the position of each locate point as time code or
the counter display format.
C MEAS
Shows the position of each locate point as measures/
beats. This value is calculated according to the tempo
and time signature of the tempo map (→ p. 149).
The format in which the position is displayed will
depend on the locate point. The following table shows
the display format for each locate point.
68
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
1 List
Lists the markers that have been registered. The line
that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for operations.
B MARKER
These are the marker numbers 01–99.
C POSITION
Shows the position of each marker, in the counter display format.
Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker • Erasing a locate point or marker
D MEAS
Shows the position of each marker, in measure/beat
units.
E DELETE button
To delete the currently selected marker, move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.
5 Move the cursor to the MARKER area, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
that the dotted frame encloses the marker
number that you want to edit.
6 Move the cursor to the value that you want
to edit, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit
the value.
NOTE
• You cannot change the location beyond the next or previous
marker.
Erasing a locate point or marker
If necessary, you can erase a previously-registered locate point (except for the Relative Zero,
Start, and End points) or marker.
NOTE
• A locate point that you erase cannot be recovered.
■ Erasing a locate point
■ Erasing a marker
To erase a locate point, hold down the [CANCEL] key in
the Locate section, and press the corresponding locate key
([IN]/[OUT] key, [A]/[B] key). That locate point will be
erased, and a message of “LOCATE POINT ERASED”
will be displayed for a time.
You can erase a marker in one of two ways; using key
operations, or in the screen.
To erase a marker using key operations, locate to the
marker that you want to erase. Then hold down the [CANCEL] key of the Locate section and press the [MARK]
key. The corresponding marker will be erased, and a message of “MARK POINT ERASED” will be displayed for
a time.
To erase a marker by operations in the screen, access the
list of markers in the POINT page of the SONG screen,
select the marker that you want to erase, move the cursor
to the DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Various types of playback
7
69
Repeatedly playing a specific region (the A-B Repeat function)
Repeatedly playing a specific region (the A-B Repeat function)
The AW1600 provides an “A-B Repeat” function that repeatedly plays the region between the A
point and B point. This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the
song while you adjust the mix.
1 Register the A point and B point to the locations at which you want the repeated playback to start and end.
For details on how to set the A point and B point, refer
to “Using markers” (→ p. 67).
HINT
• If you set the B point earlier than the A point, the B → A
region will play repeatedly.
2 While the transport is stopped, press the
3 To begin repeat playback, press the PLAY
[
] key.
Playback will begin from the A point. When you reach
the B point, you will automatically return to the A
point and continue playback.
HINT
• Playback will stop automatically when the A/B region has
been repeated 99 times.
• If you press the [REPEAT] key while the song is playing,
repeat playback between the A and B points will begin automatically, regardless of the current position.
[REPEAT] key.
7
The [REPEAT] key will light, and the A-B Repeat
function will be on. The song will automatically locate
to the A point.
NOTE
Various types of playback
• The A and B points must be at least one second apart. If they
are closer than this, a message of “REPEAT POINTS TOO
CLOSE” will appear when you press the [REPEAT] key, and
repeat playback will not be possible.
4 To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key.
Playback will stop, but the A-B Repeat function will
remain turned on.
When the A-B Repeat function is on, pressing the
PLAY [ ] key will immediately resume repeat playback, regardless of the current position.
5 To cancel repeat playback, press the
[REPEAT] key.
The [REPEAT] key will go dark, and the A-B Repeat
function will be cancelled. If you cancel the A-B
Repeat function during repeat playback, normal playback will occur from that point.
HINT
• If you perform a recording operation while the A-B Repeat
function is on, the A-B Repeat function will be temporarily disabled.
70
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Finding a location while you listen to the sound (the Nudge function)
Finding a location while you listen to the sound (the Nudge function)
“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location. By
using the Nudge function, you can find a precise location while listening to the playback. This is
useful when you need to specify a location precisely, such as when specifying the auto punch-in/
out points, or when editing the contents of a track.
1 Locate to the vicinity of the point you want
12
to find.
2 With the transport stopped, press the [JOG
ON] key.
3
To move the current location forward, turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the right. To
move the current location backward, turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the left.
If time display is selected as the counter display format, you can move the current location forward or
backward in millisecond units. If time code display is
selected, you can move in sub-frame units.
Current
location
1 NUDGE MODE
Specifies the region of sound (before or after the current location) that will be played by the Nudge function.
B NUDGE TIME
Specifies the duration of the region that will be played
by the Nudge function.
6 To change the playback duration (nudge
time), move the cursor to the value of the
NUDGE TIME field, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial to set the nudge time.
You can set the nudge time in a range of 25 ms – 800
ms. (Default = 500 ms).
7 To change the playback position (nudge
Song
track
Nudge time
mode), move the cursor to the NUDGE
MODE button, and press the [ENTER] key to
switch between the following two nudge
modes.
7
Various types of playback
The [JOG ON] key will light, and the Nudge function
will be turned on. A fixed region (referred to as the
“nudge time”) starting at the current location will play
repeatedly.
● AFTER
HINT
• Even while using the Nudge function, you can use locate
points or markers to change the location, or register locate
points or markers (→ p. 65).
4 To turn off the Nudge function, press the
[JOG ON] key or the transport section
STOP [■] key.
Repeatedly play for the duration of the nudge time,
starting at the current location (default).
● BEFORE
Repeatedly play for the duration of the nudge time,
ending at the current location.
NUDGE MODE: BEFORE
Current location
NUDGE MODE: AFTER
Current location
The [JOG ON] key will go dark, and the Nudge function will be turned off.
5 If you want to change the playback duration
or the playback mode, repeatedly press the
Work Navigate section [UTILITY] key or
hold down the [UTILITY] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the PREFER page of the UTILITY screen.
NOTE
• You cannot change the nudge time or nudge mode while
using the Nudge function. You must turn off the Nudge function, and change these settings while the [JOG ON] key is
dark.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
71
Finding a location while you view the waveform
Finding a location while you view the waveform
The AW1600 lets you find a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on the
track.
1 Locate to the vicinity of the point you want
to find.
2 Repeatedly press the Work Navigate sec-
tion [TRACK] key or hold down the [TRACK]
key and use the CURSOR[ ]/[ ] keys to
access the VIEW page of the TRACK screen.
3 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the number of the track whose waveform you want
to view.
7
Various types of playback
4
Move the cursor to the WAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear.
This popup window displays the waveform of the
audio data recorded in the current track of the track
(1–16) you selected in step 3.
1 2
D AMP
By moving the cursor to this area and turning the
[DATA/JOG] dial, you can expand or shrink the waveform display in the amplitude axis. The value of this
field indicates the level range of the waveform displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window. If you
select 0 dB, the top and bottom edges of the screen
will correspond to the maximum level.
E LISTEN button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the waveform in the display area of the
WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once.
During playback, the vertical line (pointer) that indicates the current location will move, and the counter
value will also change.
You cannot perform conventional transport operations
when playing back by pressing the LISTEN button.
F EXIT button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, you will exit the WAVE DISPLAY
popup window and return to the previous VIEW page.
HINT
• Even after displaying the WAVE DISPLAY popup window, you
can use the [TRACK SEL] keys to switch the track for viewing.
3
5 As necessary, move the cursor to the TIME/
AMP fields and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
adjust the vertical and horizontal scale of
the waveform display.
6 To specify a location within the popup win5 6 4
1 TRACK
Indicates the currently selected track number. You can
also move the cursor to this field and turn the [DATA/
JOG] dial to switch tracks.
B Counter
Displays the location of the vertical line (pointer) indicating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY
popup window. You can move the cursor to this field
and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to move the current
location forward or backward.
C TIME
By moving the cursor to this area and turning the
[DATA/JOG] dial, you can expand or shrink the waveform display in the time axis. The value of this field
indicates the length of time displayed in the WAVE
DISPLAY popup window.
If you select 1SEC, the distance from the left edge to
the right edge of the screen will correspond to one second. Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest
magnification, and each horizontal pixel will correspond to one sample (1/44,100 second).
72
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
dow, move the cursor to the counter and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.
Turning the dial toward the right will move the pointer
forward, and turning the dial toward the left will move
it backward. If necessary, you can use the LISTEN
button to play the waveform region shown in the
WAVE DISPLAY popup window, and check the location by listening.
HINT
• You can also change the pointer position by using the locate
points or markers that are registered in the song (→ p. 65,
67).
• The position displayed in the counter can be registered as a
locate point or marker (→ p. 65, 67).
7 When you have finished specifying the
location, move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the previous VIEW page, and the
location that you specified in the popup window will
remain the current location. As desired, register the
location as a locate point or marker.
Chapter 8
Using libraries and scene memories
This chapter explains how to use libraries and scene memories.
About the libraries
Memory areas that store settings for sections such as EQ, dynamics, and effects are called
“libraries.” By recalling (loading) data from a library, you can instantly use the desired set of settings. Most types of library also let you store the current settings. The AW1600 provides the following libraries.
● Input channel library
● Mastering library
EQ, dynamics, and internal effect settings can be loaded
from this library into the currently selected input channel.
This library is read-only, and cannot be used to store your
own settings.
EQ and dynamics settings can be loaded from this library
into the stereo channel. This library is read-only, and cannot be used to store your own settings.
● Sample library
EQ settings can be loaded from this library into the currently selected channel.
Sets of samples can be loaded from this library into the
Quick Loop Sampler.
● Channel library
● Dynamics library
Dynamics settings can be loaded from this library into the
currently selected channel.
Major mix parameters can be loaded from this library into
a channel.
● Effect library
Effect settings can be loaded from this library into internal
effects 1/2.
About scene memories
On the AW1600, settings for the mix parameters of all channels and the effect parameters
etc. can be stored in internal memory as a
“scene” with the name you specify.
When you recall one of the various libraries
described above, the library settings you
recall will be loaded into the settings that you
are currently using (referred to as the “current
scene”). You can then save the current settings as a scene memory, which will contain
the settings that you loaded from a library.
Libraries and scene memories are saved on
the hard disk as part of the song.
The following diagram shows how libraries,
scene, and the song are related to each other
on the AW1600.
Current scene
Input library
EQ/dynamics/effects for an input
channel
EQ library
EQ for the selected channel
Dynamics library
Dynamics for the selected
channel
Effect library
Internal effects 1/2
Mastering library
EQ/dynamics for the stereo
output
Sample library
Sample data for the Quick Loop
Sampler
Channel library
Mix parameters for each
channel
8
Using libraries and scene memories
● EQ library
Scene memory
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
73
Basic operation for libraries and scene memories
Basic operation for libraries and scene memories
Here are the basic procedures for recalling and storing a library or scene.
Storing library or scene data
Here’s how to store the current settings in a library or
scene memory.
NOTE
• The input library and mastering library, and the EQ, dynamics, or
effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window
are all read-only, and therefore have no STORE button.
1 Access the desired library page or the
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
that the dotted frame encloses the library or
scene to which you want to store the data.
Regardless of where the cursor is located, turning the
[DATA/JOG] dial will scroll the list.
3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing
you to assign a name to the data.
scene memory page.
For details on how to access each library or scene
memory page, refer to the explanations on page 77 and
following. The illustration below shows an example of
when you have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ
screen.
NOTE
• If you selected read-only data (indicated by a “lock” icon) in
step 2, a message of “Read Only” will appear, and it will not
be possible to execute the Store operation.
8
• Scene number 00 is read-only data used to initialize the current scene. Scene numbers 01–96 are writable data.
Using libraries and scene memories
4 5
3 2
1
1 List
This area lists the data stored in the library or scene
memory. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is selected for operations. Readonly data is indicated by a “lock” icon.
B RECALL button
Recalls the library data or scene that is selected in the
list.
C STORE button
Stores the current settings into the location selected in
the list.
D CLEAR button
Deletes the library or scene that is selected in the list.
E TITLE button
Accesses the TITLE EDIT popup window, where you
can edit the name of the library or scene selected in the
list.
HINT
• For some libraries or scene memories, buttons other than
those listed here may appear, or some of these buttons may
not appear. For details, refer to the explanations on page 77
and following.
74
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
4 Assign a name to the data as desired. Then
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key. (For details on how to
assign a name → p. 25)
The library or scene will be stored.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the TITLE
EDIT popup window does not appear when you perform the
Store operation. For details, refer to “Overall settings for the
AW1600” (→ p. 169).
Basic operation for libraries and scene memories
Recalling library or scene data
Here’s how to recall (load) settings from a library or
scene.
1 Access the desired library or scene memory page.
For details on how to access each library or scene
memory page, refer to the explanations on page 77 and
following.
The illustration below shows an example of when you
have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen.
Deleting library or scene data
Here’s how you can delete unwanted library or scene
memory data.
NOTE
• The input library and mastering library, and the EQ, dynamics, and
effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window
are all read-only, and do not have a CLEAR button.
1 Access the page for the desired library or
scene memory.
The illustration below shows an example of when you
have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
3
Move the cursor to the RECALL button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall
operation.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
that the library data or scene you want to
delete is enclosed by the dotted frame.
3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the Delete operation.
4 To execute the recall, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The library or scene will be recalled.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation popup window does not appear when you perform the
Recall operation. For details, refer to “Overall settings for the
AW1600” (→ p. 169).
8
NOTE
• If you selected read-only data (indicated by a “lock” icon) in
step 2, a message will indicate “Read Only,” and the Delete
operation will not be executed.
Using libraries and scene memories
that the library data or scene you want to
recall is enclosed by the dotted frame.
4 To execute the Delete operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The library or scene will be deleted.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
75
Basic operation for libraries and scene memories
Naming library or scene data
Here’s how you can assign a new name to existing library
or scene data.
NOTE
• The input library and mastering library, and the EQ, dynamics, or
effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window
are all read-only, and therefore have no TITLE button.
1 Access the page for the desired library or
scene memory.
The illustration below shows an example of when you
have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so
that the library data or scene you want to
rename is enclosed by the dotted frame.
8 3 Move the cursor to the TITLE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Using libraries and scene memories
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.
NOTE
• If you selected read-only data (indicated by a “lock” icon) in
step 2, a message of “Read Only” will appear, and you will be
unable to edit the name.
4 Assign a name to the data. Then move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key. (For details on assigning a
name → p. 25)
The edited name will be finalized.
76
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Details on libraries and scene memory
Details on libraries and scene memory
This section explains how to access each type of library or scene memory, and describes the
functions that are unique to each of these screens.
Input library
3 Move the cursor to the EFF1 or EFF2 button
and press the [ENTER] key.
From this library you can recall EQ, dynamics, and internal effect settings to the currently selected input channel.
Use this when you want to apply EQ, dynamics, and internal effects to the input signal that you are recording.
Library numbers 00–40 are all read-only, and 00 is data
for initializing an input channel.
In order to use the input library, you will need to insert
internal effect 1 or 2 into that input channel.
The corresponding internal effect will be inserted into
the input channel, and the INPUT LIBRARY popup
window will appear.
■ Recalling input library data
1 EXIT button
1 Press and hold the [INPUT SEL] key for the
1
Closes the popup window and returns to the previous
INPUT SETTING popup window.
desired input channel.
EQ library
From this library you can recall EQ settings to the currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,
numbers 001–040 are read-only, and 041–128 can be written.
2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you whether you want to
insert internal effect 1 or 2 into that input channel.
This popup window will change as follows, depending
on how internal effects 1/2 are being used.
● If the song is in the default state
■ Recalling EQ library data
1 Use the [INPUT SEL] keys, [TRACK SEL]
keys, [STEREO SEL] key, or pads 1–4 to
select the channel into which you want to
recall the EQ settings.
2 Perform one of the following actions to
access the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen
• Press the [EQ] knob repeatedly
• Hold down the [EQ] knob and press the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys
• Hold down the [EQ] knob and turn it to left or right
8
Using libraries and scene memories
The INPUT SETTING popup window will appear.
● If effect 1 is already inserted into a specific input channel
● If effects 1 and 2 are already inserted into
specific input channels
You can also recall EQ library data into an input channel directly from the INPUT SETTING popup window. To do so, move the cursor to the EQ button in the
window and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• If an effect has already been inserted into that input channel,
the INPUT LIBRARY popup window will appear immediately.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
77
Details on libraries and scene memory
Dynamics library
From this library you can recall dynamics settings to the
currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,
numbers 001–040 are read-only, and 041–128 can be written.
NOTE
• The [M] symbol indicates monaural input, and [S] indicates that
stereo input is supported. If an effect indicated by [M] is inserted
into paired channels (such as the stereo output channel), the
sense of stereo will be lost.
• 019. HQ.Pitch cannot be recalled to effect 1.
■ Recalling dynamics library data
1 Use the [INPUT SEL] keys, [TRACK SEL]
keys, [STEREO SEL] key, or pads 1–4 to
select the channel into which you want to
recall the dynamics settings.
2 Perform one of the following actions to
access the LIBRARY page of the DYN
screen
• Press the [DYN] knob repeatedly
• Hold down the [DNY] knob and press the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys
• Hold down the [DYN] knob and turn it to left or right
Mastering library
This library contains settings used to apply EQ and
dynamics processing to the stereo output channel during
mixdown. It contains EQ and dynamics settings suitable
for processing the final mix. All library numbers 00–13
are read-only, and 00 is data for initializing the stereo output channel.
■ Recalling mastering library data
1 Repeatedly press the [RECORD] key or
hold down the [RECORD] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen.
8
2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button in
the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
Using libraries and scene memories
You can also recall dynamics library data into an input
channel directly from the INPUT SETTING popup
window. To do so, move the cursor to the DYN button
in the window and press the [ENTER] key.
Effect library
This library is used by internal effects 1/2. Of library numbers 001–128, numbers 001–041 are read-only, and 042–
128 can be written.
The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will
appear.
1
1 EXIT button
Closes the popup window and returns to the previous
MIXDOWN page.
■ Recalling effect library data
1 Perform one of the following actions to
access the LIBRARY page of the EFF 1/2
screen
• Press the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] knob repeatedly
• Hold down the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] knob and
press the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys
• Hold down the [EFFECT 1] or [EFFECT 2] knob and
turn it to left or right
Sample library
This library contains sets of up to sixteen samples for use
with the Quick Loop Sampler. Sets of drum loop or soundeffect samples are saved on the hard disk as sample libraries. When you recall one of these, those samples will be
assigned to the pads and sample banks, so you can immediately play them from the pads.
NOTE
• Unlike the other libraries, the sample library data is shared by all
songs.
You can also recall library data for an effect that has
been inserted in the input channel directly from the
INPUT SETTING popup window. To do so, move the
cursor to the EFF1 or EFF2 button in the window and
press the [ENTER] key.
78
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Details on libraries and scene memory
■ Recalling sample library data
■ Recalling channel library data
Repeatedly press the Quick Loop Sampler section [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the
LIBRARY page of the SAMPLE screen.
Repeatedly press the Selected Channel section [VIEW]
key or hold down the [VIEW] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the CH LIB page of the VIEW
screen.
1
HINT
5
1 SORT field
Use these three buttons to specify how the library data in
the list will be sorted. You can choose NAME (sort alphabetically), OLD (sort by save date), or SIZE (sort by size).
B LISTEN button
If you move the cursor to this button, press the [ENTER]
key, and then press a pad, the sample assigned to sample
bank A of the library will play.
C DELETE button
Deletes the selected library data from the hard disk.
D PROTECT button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the Protect setting will be switched on/off
for the library data selected in the list. Library data for
which Protect is turned on is indicated by a “lock” icon,
and cannot be edited or deleted.
E NEW button
Creates new library data on the hard disk.
• If the recall-destination is the stereo output channel or a paired
channel, the parameters will be the same for the L and R channels, with the exception of Phase and Pan (phase and pan settings will not change).
Scene memories
Scene memories recall the effect parameter and mix
parameter settings of all channels.
Scene number 00 is read-only data used to initialize the
current scene. Scene numbers 01–96 are writable data.
■ Recalling a scene memory
In the data entry/control section, repeatedly press the
[SCENE] key or hold down the [SCENE] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the LIBRARY page of
the SCENE screen.
Channel library
This library contains mix parameter settings that can be
loaded into a channel. It is convenient to use this library
when you want to use the settings of a specific channel for
another channel. Library numbers 00–01 are read-only
data for initializing a channel, and 02–64 can be written.
Channel library data contains the following parameters.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Channel on/off
Attenuator
EQ on/off
EQ parameter settings
Dynamics processor on/off
Dynamics processor parameter settings
Fader position
Aux buses 1/2 pre-fader/post-fader setting
Send levels to Aux buses 1/2
Effect buses 1/2 pre-fader/post-fader setting
Send levels to effect buses 1/2
8
Using libraries and scene memories
23 4
• Data for parameters that do not exist in the recall-destination
channel will be ignored.
1
1 PROTECT button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the Protect setting will be switched on/off
for the scene selected in the list. Scene data for which Protect is turned on is indicated by a “lock” icon, and cannot
be edited or deleted.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
79
Using the Recall Safe function
Using the Recall Safe function
You can specify that specific faders or specific channels will be excluded from Recall operations
when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device. This function is
called “Recall Safe.”
For example, this is convenient if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes, but want
to control specific channels manually.
1 In the data entry/control section, repeatedly
press the [SCENE] key or hold down the
[SCENE] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the RCL SAFE page of the
SCENE screen.
1
2
3
2 Select the fader(s) or channel(s) that you
want to set to Recall Safe, and turn the corresponding button(s) on (highlighted).
3 If you selected a fader in step 2, move the
cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE button and
press the [ENTER] key to switch the display
to ENABLE.
Fader or channel Recall Safe has now been enabled.
The selected fader(s) and/or channel(s) will not be
affected by scene recall operations until you change
this setting.
HINT
1 FADER RECALL SAFE
8
Using libraries and scene memories
Here you can select the fader(s) for which recall safe
will be enabled. The fader(s) you select here will not
change even when another scene is recalled. These
buttons correspond to the faders as follows.
• PAD 1–4................Pad channel 1–4 faders
• INPUT 1–8 ............Input channel 1–8 faders
• TRACK 1–8,
9-10–15-16............Track channel 1–8 and 9/10–15/
16 faders
B ENABLE/DISABLE button
This button switches Fader Recall Safe between
ENABLE and DISABLE states. Move the cursor to
this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch the
display between ENABLE and DISABLE.
C CH RECALL SAFE
Selects the channel(s) for which Recall Safe will be
enabled. Mix parameters of the selected channel(s)
will not change even when another scene is recalled.
The buttons correspond to the following channels.
• PAD.......................All pad channels
• INPUT ...................All input channels
• TRACK..................All track channels
• RTN.......................Return channels 1/2
• ST OUT.................Stereo output channel
80
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• The settings of the RCL SAFE page are shared by all songs.
Chapter 9
Mixdown and bounce operations
This chapter explains mixdown operations, in which you mix previouslyrecorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track. This chapter also
covers “bouncing” or “ping-pong recording” of multiple tracks to a mono track
or stereo tracks, as well as operation of the Pitch Fix function to polish up a
vocal track.
About mixdown and bouncing
“Mixdown” is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to stereo, and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song. The contents of the stereo
track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD.
The diagram below shows the signal flow during mixdown. The playback of each track is sent to the stereo bus,
passes through the stereo output channel, and is recorded
on the stereo track. At this time you also add the signals
from pad channels 1–4 and input channels 1–8.
● Signal flow during mixdown
Recorder section
Track 1
9
Track 3
Track 4
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
MIC/LINE
INPUT jacks
1
Pad
channels
1–4
2
3
Sound clip
4
Track
channels
1–16
Input
channels
1–8
Mixdown and bounce operations
Track 2
Stereo
output
channel
Stereo bus
Mixer section
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
81
About mixdown and bouncing
“Bounce” is the process by which the signals recorded on
multiple tracks are mixed to the stereo bus, and rerecorded on one or two other tracks. (This process is also
called “ping-pong recording.”)
The diagram below shows the signal flow during bouncing. This process differs from mixdown in several points;
you use the L/R bus instead of the stereo bus, only the
track channels are the recording sources, and that the
recording-destination is one or two vacant tracks. This
diagram shows an example in which the track 1–8 signals
are bounced to tracks 9/10. After bouncing, you can
switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1–8, and use these
tracks to record other instrumental performances.
● Signal flow during bouncing
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
9
Stereo
output
channel
Track
channels
Mixdown and bounce operations
Buses L/R
Mixer section
The Pitch Fix function can be used to edit and correct the
pitch and other properties of vocal tracks. Pitch Fix is different from Bounce in that only one source and destination track can be selected, and that no other effects can be
used while the Pitch Fix function is active.
82
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Preparing for mixdown
Preparing for mixdown
To prepare for mixdown, select the track channels that you will mix down, and adjust the balance
and tone of each track.
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
2 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the MIXDOWN page of
the RECORD screen.
The MIXDOWN page is where you can perform mixdown operations. In this page you can select the channels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the
stereo track.
2
1
3
3 Use the [INPUT SEL] keys,
[TRACK SEL] keys, and pad
keys 1–4 to select the channels that you want to send to
the stereo bus.
The screen will change as follows
each time you press a key or pad
repeatedly.
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as “M”
(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.
• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks (→
p. 143), tracks 9 – 16 are muted and will not play back.
HINT
• All channels will be turned on by default. However in order to
obtain the best S/N ratio, you should turn off any channels
that you are not using.
• You can also add the signals of the input channels or pad
channels to the mixdown (→ p. 92).
1 REC button
Puts the stereo track in record-ready mode.
B SAFE button
Defeats the record-ready state of the stereo track.
4 If you want to use the mastering library,
move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will
appear. Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the desired
library data, then move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
C LIBRARY button
Accesses the mastering library.
D Stereo bus
Indicates the on/off status of the channels being sent to
the stereo bus. The numbers within the screen correspond to the following channels.
• INPUT 1–8 ..................Input channels 1–8
• P1–P4 .........................Pad channels 1–4
• TRACK 1–16...............Track channels 1–16
HINT
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
4
• The mastering library contains data for loading EQ/dynamics
settings into the stereo output channel. (For details, refer to →
p. 78)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
83
Preparing for mixdown
5 If you want to adjust the pan of each track
channel, repeatedly press the Selected
Channel section [PAN/BAL] knob or hold
down the [PAN/BAL] knob and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the PAN page
of the PAN screen.
In this page you can set pairing, phase, and pan for
each channel.
1
6 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of each
track channel, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial
to adjust the pan setting.
HINT
• Another way of adjusting the pan is to press a [TRACK SEL]
key to select a track channel, and then turn the [PAN/BAL]
knob in the Selected Channel section. This method is convenient when you want to adjust the pan without displaying a different screen.
If you use the [PAN/BAL] knob to adjust the pan of track channels 9/10–15/16, moving the knob will initially cause only the
pan value of one side to change. When that pan value
reaches the far right or left, the other pan value will then begin
to change.
7 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position.
2
3
1 PAIR
Indicates the paired status of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered channels. A heart symbol indicates
channels that are paired, and a broken heart symbol
indicates channels that are not paired. You can also set
or defeat pairing in this page by moving the cursor to a
heart symbol and pressing the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
9
• Track channels 9/10–15/16 and pad channels 1–4 always
function as paired channels. Pairing cannot be defeated for
these channels.
Mixdown and bounce operations
B PHASE
Switches the phase of the signal of each channel
between normal and reversed. Move the cursor to this
location and press the [ENTER] key to switch between
N (Normal) and R (Reverse) phase.
C PAN
Adjusts the pan (the left/right position when the signal
is sent to the stereo bus or L/R bus) of each channel.
NOTE
• If the page is different than shown above, make sure that you
have selected track channels as the object of operations.
(This is indicated in the upper left of the screen.) If input channels and pad channels are selected, press any one of the
[TRACK SEL] keys.
• Even if channels are paired, their phase and pan are not
linked. Set these parameters individually for each channel.
84
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
8 While you play back the song, raise the
track channel faders to an appropriate level.
If necessary, adjust the EQ and dynamics of
each track channel.
You can adjust the track channel EQ/dynamics in a
similar way as for the input channels; press a [TRACK
SEL] key to select a track channel, and use the
Selected Channel section [EQ] knob and [DYN] knob.
Using the internal effects via send/return
Using the internal effects via send/return
You can use the internal effects via send/return to add effects to the mixdown. As an example,
here’s how to use internal effect 1 in this way.
■ Internally connecting an
internal effect via send/return
The “Track recording” chapter explained how to insert an
internal effect into an input channel by using the input
library. If an insert effect has been inserted in a channel,
you must first “un-insert” that effect (cancel the insertion)
before you can use it in a send/return configuration.
1 Press any [INPUT SEL] key to select an
input channel for operations.
2
Repeatedly press the [EFFECT 1] knob or
hold down the [EFFECT 1] knob and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the SEND
page of the EFF1 screen.
■ Adjusting the effect send level
Here’s how to load an effect library into internal effect 1,
and adjust the level (effect send level) of the signal that is
sent from each channel via effect bus 1 to internal effect 1.
1 Repeatedly press the [EFFECT 1] knob or
hold down the [EFFECT 1] knob and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the
LIBRARY page of the EFF1 screen.
2 Select the effect library that you want to
use, and load it into internal effect 1.
In this example, we will select a reverb-type library.
The SEND page of the EFF1 screen will appear.
1
the SEND page of the EFF1 screen.
If insert effect 1 is connected via the mixer section
send/return, the following items will be added to the
SEND page of the EFF1 screen.
1
1 EFF INSERT
Inserts/cancels an insert effect for a specific channel.
The display will indicate “on” for a channel into which
an effect is currently inserted.
HINT
• If the page you see is different than shown above, make sure
that input channels are selected as the object of your operations. (This is shown in the upper left of the screen.) If track
channels are selected, press one of the [INPUT SEL] keys.
3 Move the cursor to the EFF INSERT field of
2
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
3 Press the [EFFECT 1] knob once to access
1 EFF
the channel into which effect 1 is inserted,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Adjusts the send level of the signal that is sent from
each channel to insert effect 1.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to cancel (release) the effect insertion.
B PRE/POST
Selects the location from which the signal from each
channel will be sent to insert effect 1. Move the cursor
to this area and press the [ENTER] key to switch
between the following two settings.
• PRE (pre-fader) ......... The signal from immediately
before the fader will be sent.
4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
• POST (post-fader)..... The signal from immediately
after the fader will be sent.
Insertion of insert effect 1 into that channel will be
cancelled, and now you are free to use this effect in the
mixer section via send/return.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
85
Using the internal effects via send/return
NOTE
• If the page you see is different than shown above, make sure
that track channels are selected as the object of your operations. (This is shown in the upper left of the screen.) If input
channels/pad channels are selected, press one of the
[TRACK SEL] keys.
4 Move the cursor to the PRE/POST field in
the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
specify the location from which the signal
will be sent from each channel to internal
effect 1.
Select POST if you want the volume of the effect
sound to be affected by the fader position. Select PRE
if you want to set the volume of the effect sound independently of the fader position.
5 While you play back the song, move the
cursor to the EFF knobs in the screen, and
adjust the level of the signal that is sent
from each channel to internal effect 1.
HINT
• Another way of adjusting the send level to internal effect 1 is
to press a [TRACK SEL] key to select a track channel, and
then turn the [EFFECT 1] knob of the Selected Channel section. This method is convenient if you want to adjust the effect
level without displaying a different screen.
9 6 To adjust the master level of the effect
send, repeatedly press the Selected ChanMixdown and bounce operations
nel section [VIEW] key or hold down the
[VIEW] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the BUS page of the VIEW
screen.
The BUS page of the VIEW screen lets you use onscreen faders to adjust the master level of each bus.
12
3
4
5
1 PEAK button
This is an on/off switch for the peak hold function of
the level meters. If this button is on, a peak indicator
will show the level meter peaks, and will remain
displayed. To reset this indicator, you can temporarily
switch the PEAK button off. This setting is shared
with the METER page of the VIEW screen.
86
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
B PRE/POST button
This selects whether the level meters of the BUS page
will indicate the pre-fader level (PRE) or the postfader level (POST). This setting is independent from
the METER page of the VIEW screen.
C AUX
D EFF
E BUS
Use these faders to adjust the master levels of AUX
buses 1/2, effect buses 1/2, and the L/R bus. The level
of each bus is indicated by the level meters at the right
of each fader.
7 Move the cursor to the fader for effect bus
1, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to raise or
lower it.
HINT
• You can also adjust the level of the return signal that is
returned from the internal effect to the mixer section. For
details, refer to “Editing the parameters of an internal effect”
(→ p. 97).
Recording on the stereo track
Recording on the stereo track
Here’s how to record the final mix on the stereo track.
1 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the MIXDOWN page of
the RECORD screen.
1 ST.TRACK ON/OFF button
Switches stereo track playback on/off.
B Virtual track
Selects the virtual track that is assigned to the stereo
track. The currently selected virtual track is indicated
by a “●.” Of the other virtual tracks, those that have
already been recorded are indicated by “ ,” and the
unrecorded tracks are indicated by “–”.
C Track view
In this area, markers and the presence or absence of
track data are displayed graphically.
MIXDOWN page, and press the [ENTER] key
to turn the button on.
The panel [STEREO] key will blink red. This blinking
indicates that the stereo track is in record-ready mode.
3
Press the RTZ [
] key to rewind the song.
Then hold down the REC [●] key and press
the PLAY [ ] key.
The song will begin playing, and the playback will be
recorded on the stereo track.
HINT
• The data that is recorded here on the stereo track will be the
data that is used to create an audio CD. If you want to precisely specify the beginning or end of the song, it is convenient to use Auto Punch-in/out (→ p. 59).
4 When you reach the end of the song, move
the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to cancel record-ready mode. Move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
5 To play back the stereo track, repeatedly
press the Quick Navigate section [MONITOR] key or hold down the [MONITOR] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the ST.TRACK page of the MONITOR screen.
1
2
3
D PRE/POST buttons
These buttons select whether the level meter in the
ST.TRACK page will indicate the pre-fader level
(PRE) or the post-fader level (POST). This setting is
shared with the BUS page of the VIEW screen.
E Level meter
This indicates the output level of the stereo track.
6 Switch the ST.TRACK ON/OFF button ON.
When this button is on, the stereo track output will be
sent to a point directly before the [STEREO] fader,
and can be monitored from the STEREO/AUX OUT
jacks or the MONITOR OUT jacks. At this time, the
record-ready status of all tracks will be cancelled.
HINT
• Even while the stereo track is playing, you can still monitor the
signals from the input channels.
NOTE
• EQ and dynamics processing are applied to the playback of
the stereo track.
7 Press the RTZ [
] key to rewind the song,
and press the PLAY [ ] key.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
2 Move the cursor to the REC button of the
The stereo track will be played back. Use the [STEREO] fader to adjust the monitor level.
When playback ends and you want to move to a different screen, switch the ST.TRACK ON/OFF button
OFF.
HINT
• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] button to cancel
the recording that was made on the stereo track (→ p. 61), or
use the ST.TRACK page to switch virtual tracks and record
another take (→ p. 62).
8 Save the song.
4
5
If the song is not saved after it has been recorded as a
stereo track, it cannot be selected for burning to a CD.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
87
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure
Here’s how to perform the bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure, which lets you combine multiple tracks onto one or two tracks.
HINT
• If you plan to add an effect to a specific track, be sure to insert the effect you plan to use into
the appropriate track channel beforehand (→ p. 99).
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
2 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the BOUNCE page of
the RECORD screen.
In the BOUNCE page you can select the bouncesource tracks, and record them via the L/R bus onto
one or two bounce-destination tracks.
F51
2
3 In the upper TRACK area,
select a bounce-source
track, move the cursor to
the symbol for that track,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Each time you press the [ENTER]
key, the screen will change as follows.
HINT
• If a track channel is selected as a
bounce-source, its assignment to
the L/R bus will automatically be
turned off.
NOTE
• The track numbers of muted tracks
will be displayed as “M” (mute), but
you can still record to muted tracks.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
43
1 TRACK (upper line)
Selects the bounce-source tracks.
B Bus L/R
The two horizontal lines indicate the L/R bus signal
route. This lets you see the on/off status of the signals
that are sent from the bounce-source tracks, and see
the selected bounce-destination track(s).
C TRACK (lower line)
Here you can select the bounce-destination track(s).
• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks (→ p. 143),
tracks 9 – 16 are muted and will not
play back.
4 Select other bounce-source tracks in the
same way.
5 Use the [TRACK SEL] keys to select a
bounce-destination track.
The [TRACK SEL] key will blink red, indicates that
the corresponding track is selected as the bounce-destination. A line will appear in the screen to indicate the
connection to the track. (To cancel your selection,
press the same key once again.)
D SAFE button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all bounce-source and bounce-destination assignments will be cancelled.
E BUS button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the right side of the screen will show a
fader for adjusting the output level of the L/R bus, and
a dedicated level meter for the L/R bus.
F PITCH FIX button
Position the cursor at this button and press [ENTER]
to engage the PITCH FIX mode. Use PITCH FIX to
correct the pitch and other properties of a vocal track
(→ p. 89).
You can select up to two bounce-destination tracks. If
you select track 1, 3, 5, or 7, bus L will be connected.
If you select track 2, 4, 6, or 8, bus R will be connected. If you select track 9/10–15/16, bus L will be
connected to the odd-numbered track, and bus R will
be connected to the even-numbered track.
HINT
• If you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the
[ENTER] key, all connections will be cancelled.
• EQ and dynamics settings will be “flat” for the track channels
of the tracks you select as the recording-destination.
88
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure • Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
6 Raise the [STEREO] fader and the faders of
the track channel(s) you selected as the
bounce-destination to the 0 dB position.
7 Press the RTZ [
] key to rewind the song.
Then hold down the REC [●] key and press
the PLAY [ ] key.
The song will begin playing back, and will be
recorded on the bounce-destination track(s).
8 While you record the song, raise the faders
of the bounce-source track channels to an
appropriate level. Adjust the pan, EQ, and
dynamics of each track channel as necessary.
NOTE
• The bounce-destination faders will not affect the content that
is recorded. However, the bounce-source faders specify the
volume balance that will be recorded.
HINT
• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the
bounce source track channels during playback even when not
recording.
9 When you reach the end of the song, stop
the song and press the RTZ [
rewind.
] key to
HINT
• If you’re not satisfied with what has been recorded, press the
[UNDO/REDO] button to undo the recording and go back to
step 7.
10 To check the recorded result, move the cur-
sor to the SAFE button and press the
[ENTER] key to cancel the recording settings.
11 Access the ON/OFF page of the MONITOR
screen (→ p. 31), turn off all track channels
other than the bounce-destination, and
press the PLAY [ ] key.
HINT
• If you attempt to change the screen or page without using the
SAFE button, a popup window asking “Clear Current REC
Setting?” will appear, asking you whether it is ok to clear the
current recording settings. Move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] button to cancel the
bounce-recording operation (→ p. 61), or switch the virtual track
of the bounce-destination and record another take (→ p. 62).
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
The Pitch Fix function can be used to “fix” the pitch of a vocal track, or create chorus parts based
on a main vocal part. An Auto Punch-in/out function is also provided which allows a specified
segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced. Pitch Fix can be useful in the following
situations:
• Correct the pitch of slightly flat or sharp vocals.
• Correct the pitch of a specified segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch-in/out function.
• Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part – a third
above the main vocal, for example.
• Change the key of a vocal track.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
• If you select an unpaired track, the pan of the track channel
will be at the center position. If you select paired tracks, the
pan of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered track channels will be spread to left and right respectively.
NOTE
• If you will be using to an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or a chorus part, the MIDI OUT connector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected to the AW1600 MIDI IN connector via a standard MIDI cable. In this
case the UTILITY MIDI 1 page IN PORT parameter must be set to MIDI. Keyboard connection can also be made via the USB port.
1 When you want to specify a segment of a
vocal track to be processed, it is necessary
to set up the Auto Punch-in/out function.
Details on setting up the Auto Punch-in/out function
can be found in steps 1 through 7 under “Auto punchin/out” on page 59.
2 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the BOUNCE page of
the RECORD screen.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
89
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
3 Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear which allows you to
select the source edit track.
4 Specify the source edit track in the TRACK
filed, then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear which allows you to
select the record destination track and the virtual track.
B BYPASS button
To monitor the vocal track prior to pitch correction,
move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER].
C From TR
Indicates the track to be edited (the source track). This
field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
D To TR/V.TR
Indicates the track and virtual track to which the processed source track will be recorded (the destination
track). This field is only for display, and cannot be
edited.
E CTRL
Selects the method of pitch correction/shift from the
three ways below.
• SCALE ........Specify the scale via received MIDI
notes to adjust the pitch. For example,
if you play a chord on a connected
MIDI keyboard, the pitch is shifted by
the notes included in the chord.
• NOTE...........The pitch is changed according to the
received MIDI note.
• PANEL.........This lets you adjust the pitch by specifying a scale from the keyboard on the
display.
NOTE
• Different tracks must be specified for the source and destination.
Specify the record destination track in the
9 5 TRACK field and the virtual track in the V.TR
Mixdown and bounce operations
filed, then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
This will select the PITCH FIX display.
HGC
1D 2 F E
I J
K
NOTE
The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is
engaged :
• No other display can be selected from the panel keys.
• Record track assignments are ignored.
• No internal effects other than Pitch fix can be accessed.
• The Tempo Map (scene numbers) is temporarily ignored.
• MIDI program and control change messages cannot be
received.
1 EXIT button
Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press
[ENTER] to exit from the PITCH FIX mode and
return to the BOUNCE page.
90
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
F TYPE
Sets this to an appropriate value to maximize the accuracy of the pitch change of the original signal. Generally, this should be set to Normal; however, for low
vocals, set this to Male, and for high vocals, set it to
Female.
G DETECT
This determines the time resolution for pitch change.
The shorter the setting, the more quickly the pitch
change is recognized. The longer the setting, the more
slowly pitch changes are made, resulting in more
abrupt, step-like pitch changes.
H RATE
This determines the speed resolution for pitch change.
The faster the setting, the more quickly the pitch is
changed, increasing the apparent effectiveness of the
pitch change function. When this is set to “000,” there
is no pitch change.
I FORMANT
This determines the vocal quality (character) of the
pitch-adjusted signal. Positive (+) values result in a
higher voice quality and negative (–) values result in a
lower voice quality.
J PITCH
This determines the octave setting of the pitchadjusted signal. The range is from –2 to 2 octaves in
semitone steps. The integer and fraction segments of
the value are set separately.
K Keyboard
The graphic keyboard can be used to specify notes
when the CTRL parameter is set to PANEL. To turn a
note on or off, move the cursor to the desired note and
press [ENTER].
Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)
6 Raise the [STEREO] fader and the fader of
the destination track channel to about 0dB
on the scale.
7 Press the RTZ [
] key to rewind the song
to the beginning, then press the PLAY [ ]
key while holding the REC [●] key.
Song playback will begin and the processed data will
be recorded to the destination track.
If the CTRL mode is set to SCALE or NOTE and you
have an external MIDI keyboard connected, use the
keyboard to play the required harmony notes for the
chorus parts while listening to the vocal track.
11 When the end of the song is reached, stop
the song and press the RTZ [
rewind.
] key to
HINT
• If you’re not satisfied with what has been recorded, press the
[UNDO/REDO] button to undo the recording and go back to
step 7.
12 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press [ENTER].
A popup window will appear asking you to confirm
that it’s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode.
8 Set the channel fader for the source track to
an appropriate level while listening to playback of the song.
NOTE
• The fader of the destination track – the track to which the processed vocal track will be recorded – has no effect on the
recorded signal. The source track fader determines the final
balance, so set it with care.
13 To return to the BOUNCE page move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the
BOUNCE display will appear.
HINT
• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the
source track channels during playback even when not recording.
9 Move the cursor to RATE and use the
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
[DATA/JOG] dial to increase the pitch correction level while listening to song playback.
The pitch of notes in the source vocal track will be
corrected to the pitch of the nearest note.
NOTE
• If you know the which notes should and should not be used
for correction, you can turn them on or off via the graphic keyboard, or change the CTRL mode as required and turn notes
on or off via the corresponding method.
10 Set the sound and pitch parameters as
required while listening to song playback.
If you want to change the key of a vocal track, set the
PITCH parameter. If you want to create a chorus part,
set the CTRL parameter to NOTE.
NOTE
• While making the required correction setting you can select
the BYPASS mode to monitor the pre-correction display settings and sound.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
91
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
Here are some convenient functions that you can use during mixdown or bounce operations.
Adding input signals or pad
performances during mixdown
During mixdown, you can add signals from the input
channels or pad channels. For example, you could add a
performance from a workstation-type synthesizer (with
built-in sequencer) that is synchronized to the AW1600
song, or add sound effects that have been assigned to the
pads. To do this, perform the following steps after you
have completed “Preparing for mixdown” (→ p. 83).
5 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
press the [VIEW] key or hold down the
[VIEW] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the FADER page of the VIEW
screen.
In the FADER page of the VIEW screen, you can use
on-screen faders to adjust the faders (input level) of
each channel.
1
1 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the MIXDOWN page of
the RECORD screen.
2 Press the [INPUT SEL] key or pad that cor-
responds to the input channel or pad channel you want to use, to add that channel as
a mixdown-source.
1 ON/OFF buttons
These buttons switch each channel on/off.
B Faders
These faders adjust the input level of each channel.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
6 While you play back the song, move the
3 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
press the [PAN/BAL] knob or hold down the
[PAN/BAL] knob and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the PAN page of the PAN
screen.
NOTE
• If the page you see is different than shown above, make sure
that input channels/pad channels are selected as the object
of your operations. (This is shown in the upper left of the
screen.) If track channels are selected, press one of the
[INPUT SEL] keys or pads.
4 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of the
channel you want to use, and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the pan setting.
92
2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
cursor to the on-screen faders and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the level of the
input channels/pad channels that you want
to use.
7 If necessary, adjust EQ, dynamics, and the
send level to the internal effects for each
input channel or pad channel.
Now you have completed the preparations for adding
input channel or pad channel signals to the mixdown.
Record the mixdown on the stereo channel as
described in “Recording on the stereo track” (→
p. 87).
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
Viewing all parameters for a
certain channel
During mixdown or bouncing, you can watch meters that
indicate the input levels in a single screen. To do so,
repeatedly press the Selected Channel section [VIEW] key
or hold down the [VIEW] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the METER page of the VIEW screen.
In the METER page, the display will change depending on
the channel that is currently selected (shown in the upper
left of the screen). Press an [INPUT SEL] key to view the
meters for the input channels/pad channels, or press a
[TRACK SEL] key to view the meters for the track channels.
Sometimes you will want to see all mix parameters for a
certain channel in a single screen. To do this, repeatedly
press the Selected Channel section [VIEW] key or hold
down the [VIEW] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the CH VIEW page of the VIEW screen.
(Some items can also be edited from this page.)
The display in the CH VIEW page will change depending
on the currently selected channel (shown in the upper left
of the screen). Use the [INPUT SEL] keys, pads 1–4,
[TRACK SEL] keys, and [STEREO SEL] key to select the
channel that you want to view.
● If a track channel is selected
● If an input channel, pad channel, or track
channel is selected
2 1
3
1
● If an input channel/pad channel is selected
2 1
J 89
23 4 5 6 7 M KL
3
● If the stereo output channel is selected
1 PEAK button
This button switches the level meter peak hold function
on/off. When this button is on, a
indicator will show
the peaks of the level meters, and this indicator will be
held. To reset the indicator, temporarily turn off the PEAK
button. This setting is shared with the BUS page of the
VIEW screen.
B PRE/POST buttons
These buttons select whether the level meters in the
METER page will indicate the pre-fader levels (PRE) or
the post-fader levels (POST). This setting is independent
from the BUS page of the VIEW screen.
C Level meters
These indicate the input level of each channel.
2
4 5 67 N L
1 Pairing
Indicates the pairing status of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered channels. Paired channels are indicated by
a heart-shaped symbol, and unpaired channels are indicated by a broken heart.
Move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key to
switch pairing on/off.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
Using meters to check
the level of each channel
NOTE
• Pairing cannot be switched off for track channels 9/10–15/16, pad
channels 1–4, and the stereo channel.
B ATT knob
Move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the attenuation of the signal over a range of 0
to –96 dB before it enters the EQ. This is the same function as the ATT. knob in the EDIT page of the EQ screen.
C Phase (except for the stereo output channel)
Move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key to
switch the phase of the signal between N (Normal) and R
(Reverse).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
93
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
D Effect insert
This lets you insert an internal effect into the channel.
When you move the cursor here and press the [ENTER]
key, a popup window will appear, allowing you to select
internal effect 1 or 2.
E EQ
Move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key to
switch EQ on/off.
F DYN
Move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key to
switch dynamics on/off.
Initializing a channel
The mix parameters (EQ, dynamics, pan, etc.) of a channel can be reset to their default settings in a single operation. This function lets you start mixdown or bounce
operations with the track channels “zeroed,” and provides
an easy way to reset the levels back to the nominal setting
if you can no longer hear any sound.
1 In the Quick Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [MONITOR] key or hold down the
[MONITOR] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the INIT page.
G ON/OFF
Move the cursor here and press the [ENTER] key to
switch the channel on/off.
H
I
J
K
EFF1 (except for the stereo output channel)
EFF2 (except for the stereo output channel)
AUX1 (except for the stereo output channel)
AUX2 (except for the stereo output channel)
Move the cursor to these knobs and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the send levels to effect buses 1/2 and AUX
buses 1/2.
By moving the cursor to the left of the knob and pressing
the [ENTER] key, you can switch between pre-fader (send
the pre-fader signal to the bus) and post-fader (send the
post-fader signal to the bus).
9
2 Press the [INPUT SEL] key, pad, or [TRACK
SEL] key for the channel that you want to
initialize.
Mixdown and bounce operations
L PAN/BALANCE knob
Move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the pan (or balance, in the case of the stereo
output channel) of the signal that is sent from the channel
to the stereo bus or L/R bus.
When you press a key or pad, the upper line of the
screen will indicate “CH.PARAMETER INITIALIZED,” and the corresponding channel will be initialized. (Channel library 00 will be recalled.)
An initialized channel will have the following mix
parameter settings.
M FADER knob
(except for the stereo output channel)
Move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the level of the signal that is sent from the
channel to the stereo bus or L/R bus. The range is – ∞ to
+6 dB.
NOTE
• The FADER knob of a track channel will follow the operation of the
corresponding panel fader 1–8 or 9/10–15/16. However, please
note that if you adjust an on-screen knob and then operate the
panel fader, the value will not change until the fader passes the
current value.
N OUTPUT LEVEL
(only for the stereo output channel)
Move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to adjust the output level of the signal that is sent from
the stereo output channel to the STEREO/AUX OUT
jacks and MONITOR OUT jacks. The range is – ∞ to 0
dB.
NOTE
• The OUTPUT LEVEL knob will follow the operation of the panel
[STEREO FADER]. However, please note that if you adjust the onscreen knob and then operate the panel fader, the value will not
change until the fader passes the current value.
94
In this page you can separately initialize the mix
parameters of input channels 1–8, pad channels 1–4,
or track channels 1–16.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Input channel
Pad channel
Track channel
no change
no change
no change
Attenuation
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
EQ
ON
ON
ON
default (flat)
default (flat)
default (flat)
Dynamics
on/off
OFF
OFF
OFF
Dynamics
type
COMP
COMP
COMP
no effect
no effect
no effect
Phase
EQ
parameters
Dynamics
parameters
Pan
Fader
If paired:
L channel = L16, L channel = L16
R channel = R16 R channel = R16
If unpaired: center
0 dB*
0 dB
If paired:
L channel = L16,
R channel = R16
If unpaired: center
no change*
* If FADER FLIP is set to TRACK in the UTILITY screen PREFER page.
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
4 Move the cursor to the parameter that you
The chapters entitled “Track recording” and “Overdubbing” explained how to load an EQ library and use the
Selected Channel section [EQ] knob to make adjustments.
Here’s how you can make more detailed adjustments to
the EQ parameters.
1
Press an [INPUT SEL] key, a pad 1–4, a
[TRACK SEL] key, or the [STEREO SEL] key
to select the channel whose EQ you want to
adjust.
2 If desired, load library data from the EQ
library.
3 Repeatedly press the Selected Channel
section [EQ] knob or hold down the [EQ]
knob and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the EDIT page of the EQ screen.
The EDIT page of the EQ screen lets you edit all of
the EQ parameters.
6
2
3
4
5
1 78
1 ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on/off.
B Response curve
Graphically indicates the approximate response of the
EQ.
C FLAT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to reset the boost/cut amount of all bands to 0 dB.
D ATT. (Attenuation) knob
Attenuates the signal immediately before it is input to
the EQ, over a range of –96 to 0 dB. This is used
mainly to prevent the signal from clipping when you
use the EQ to boost a specific frequency region.
want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
adjust the value.
5 To switch the LOW band type, move the cursor to the LOW band Q knob and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial toward the left.
With the default EQ settings, the LOW band is a shelving type. (The value field for the Q knob will indicate
“L.SHL”.)
If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob
value field will change to a numerical value, and will
switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and
LO-MID bands.
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the
Q knob value field will indicate “HPF,” and the LOW
band will function as a high-pass filter. If “HPF” is
selected, you can use the LOW band G knob to switch
the high-pass filter on/off.
6 To switch the HIGH band type, turn the
HIGH band Q knob all the way to the left.
With the default EQ settings, the HIGH band is a
shelving type. (The value field for the Q knob will
indicate “H.SHL”.)
If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob
value field will change to a numerical value, and will
switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and
LO-MID bands.
If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the
Q knob value field will indicate “LPF,” and the HIGH
band will function as a low-pass filter. If “LPF” is
selected, you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch
the low-pass filter on/off.
7 To switch the EQ on/off, press the [ENTER]
key.
In the EDIT page, you can press the [ENTER] key to
switch the EQ on/off (except when the cursor is
located at the FLAT button).
HINT
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
Editing the EQ parameters
• If the meter display clips because you boosted a certain band,
lower the ATT. knob to attenuate the signal.
• The [EQ] knob of the Selected Channel section will still operate even while the EDIT page of the EQ screen is displayed.
E Output meter
Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed
through the EQ.
F Q knobs
Specify the Q (steepness) at which each band (HIGH,
HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW) will be boosted or cut. The
range is 10–0.10, and higher settings will produce a
steeper curve.
G F (Frequency) knobs
Specify the center frequency of the boost/cut, over a
range of 21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz.
H G (Gain) knobs
Specify the amount of boost/cut, over a range of –18.0
dB to +18.0 dB.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
95
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
Editing the dynamics parameters
You can perform detailed editing of the dynamics parameters in the same way as for the EQ parameters.
1 Press an [INPUT SEL] key, a pad 1–4, a
[TRACK SEL] key, or the [STEREO SEL] key
to select the channel whose dynamics
parameters you want to edit.
2 From the dynamics library, recall the set-
tings that are closest to what you have in
mind.
3 Repeatedly press the Selected Channel
section [DYN] knob or hold down the [DYN]
knob and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the EDIT page of the DYN screen.
4
2
C Response curve
This graph indicates the approximate response of
dynamics settings. The horizontal axis of the graph is
the input level, and the vertical axis is the output level.
D KEYIN SOURCE
Selects one of the following as the trigger signal (keyin signal) that will control dynamics processing.
• SELF .............. The post-EQ signal of the currently
selected channel
• LEFT .............. The post-EQ signal of the adjacent
channel to the left
• AUX1 .............. The signal immediately before the
master send level of the AUX 1 bus
• AUX2 .............. The signal immediately before the
master send level of the AUX 2 bus
NOTE
• You will not be able to select LEFT if you have selected input
channel 1, pad channel 1, track channel 1, or the stereo output channel.
HINT
• Dynamics settings and operation are linked for paired channels and for the stereo output channel. In this case, dynamics
processing will operate simultaneously for both channels if
either channel exceeds the threshold level.
9
1
3
7
56
1 ON/OFF button
Mixdown and bounce operations
Switches dynamics on/off.
B TYPE
Indicates the currently selected dynamics type. The
displayed indication has the following meaning.
• COMP .........................Compressor
• EXPAND .....................Expander
• GATE ..........................Gate
• COMPAND-H ..............Compander (hard)
• COMPAND-S ..............Compander (soft)
• DUCKING ...................Ducking
NOTE
• You cannot change the dynamics type in this page. If you
want to use a different type, you must recall library settings
that use the desired type.
E GR (Gain Reduction)
Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by
the dynamics processor, in a range of –18 dB to 0 dB.
F Output meter
Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed
through the dynamics processor.
G Parameters
Here you can edit the parameters of the dynamics processor. The type of parameters and their ranges will
differ depending on the dynamics processor type. For
details on the types of parameter and their function,
refer to the appendix.
4 Move the cursor to the parameter that you
want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
edit the value.
5 To switch dynamics on/off, press the
[ENTER] key.
In the EDIT page, you can press the [ENTER] key to
switch dynamics on/off regardless of the cursor location.
Please be aware that if you edit even one parameter in
the EDIT page of the DYN screen, the operation of the
Selected Channel section [DYN] knob will change as
follows for that channel.
96
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
1 Immediately after recalling a read-only library that
contains dynamics settings, turning the [DYN]
knob will simultaneously adjust multiple parameters to affect the dynamics processing. (The
amount of change will depend on the last-recalled
library.)
Editing the parameters of an
internal effect
By using the EDIT page of the EFF1 screen or EFF2
screen, you can make detailed edits to the effect parameters of the internal effects 1 and 2.
If an effect is internally connected via send/return in the
mixer section, the parameters (EQ, pan, AUX send, etc.)
of the return channel that processes the return signal can
also be edited in this page.
As an example, here’s how you can edit the settings of
internal effect 1, internally connected via send/return.
1 For internal effect 1, recall an effect library
that uses the desired effect type.
You cannot change the effect type (e.g., reverb, delay)
in the EDIT page. You must first recall library settings
that use the desired type.
2 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
press the [EFFECT 1] knob or hold down
the [EFFECT 1] knob and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the EDIT page of the
EFF1 screen.
The EDIT page lets you edit all of the effect parameters.
2
parameter in the EDIT page of the DYN screen,
turning the [DYN] knob will adjust only the lastedited parameter. (The last-edited parameter is
remembered for each channel.)
1
3
4
5
1 BYPASS ON/OFF button
Switches effect bypass on/off. For effects connected to
the send/return loop, however, this function mutes or
un-mutes the effect rather than turning bypass on or
off.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
B For a channel for which you edited even one
B TYPE
Indicates the type of the currently selected effect.
NOTE
• You cannot change the effect type in this page. If you want to
use a different type, you must recall library settings that use
the desired effect type.
C If you once again recall a read-only library that
contains dynamics settings, turning the [DYN]
knob will again simultaneously adjust multiple
parameters.
C STEREO/MONO
Indicates whether the effect is stereo or monaural. A
stereo-input effect is indicated by , and a monauralinput effect is indicated by .
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
97
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
D USED AS
Indicates how this effect is being used. If the effect is
internally connected to the mixer section via send/
return, this will indicate “EFF1” or “EFF2.” If the
effect is inserted into a specific channel, this will indicate the name of the channel into which the effect is
inserted (e.g., “INPUT 1”).
E Parameter page/Return channel page
In this area you can edit the various effect parameters.
The content and range of the parameters will depend
on the currently-used effect type.
If the effect is internally connected to the mixer section via send/return, this area will show the mix
parameters of the return channel, allowing you to edit
them.
1
4
2
5
3
6
1 EFF2SEND
Adjusts the level at which the signal is sent from the
return channel to the other internal effect.
NOTE
3 Move the cursor to the effect parameter that
• You cannot send the signal from return channel 1 to insert
effect 1 (since this would mean sending the signal back to the
same effect itself). For this reason, the EDIT page of the
EFF1 screen has no send level to effect 1. For the same reason, the EDIT page of the EFF2 screen has no send level to
effect 2.
you want to edit, and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to edit the value.
Depending on the effect type, this area may be used to
show multiple parameter pages. In this case, repeatedly press the CURSOR [ ] key to access the parameter page that contains the parameter you want to edit.
For example, the illustration below shows the parameter pages for the STEREO DELAY effect type.
B AUX1SEND
C AUX2SEND
These adjust the send level of the signal that is sent
from the return channel to AUX buses 1/2.
D EFF2 PRE/POST
Switches the signal that is sent from the return channel
to the other effect bus between pre-fader and postfader.
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
E AUX1 PRE/POST
F AUX2 PRE/POST
These switch the signals that are sent from the return
channel to AUX buses 1/2 between pre-fader and postfader.
MIX BAL. parameter
1
3
HINT
• The parameter pages show the parameters that are specific
to that effect type. However for all effect types, the lower right
of the last parameter page will have a MIX BAL. parameter
which sets the mix balance between the effect sound and the
original sound.
4 To edit the mix parameters of the return
channel, access the last parameter page,
and then press the CURSOR [ ] key once
again.
If the effect is internally connected to the mixer section via send/return, you can repeatedly press the
CURSOR [ ] key to access the mix parameters of the
return channel. The following pages are the same for
all effect types.
98
2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
4
1
B
C
D
E
F
5
6
EQ HIGH GAIN
EQ HIGH FREQ
EQ HIGH Q
EQ H-MID GAIN
EQ H-MID FREQ
EQ H-MID Q
These specify the gain, frequency, and Q for the HIGH
and HI-MID bands of the return channel EQ. The
range of each parameter is the same as in the EDIT
page of the EQ screen.
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
2
1
3
Inserting an effect into a track
channel
The chapter “Track recording” explained how to insert an
internal effect into an input channel. In the same way, you
can also insert an effect into a track channel or pad channel. As an example, here’s how to insert internal effect 1
into a track channel for use during mixdown or bouncing.
4
1
B
C
D
E
F
5
6
EQ L-MID GAIN
EQ L-MID FREQ
EQ L-MID Q
EQ LOW GAIN
EQ LOW FREQ
EQ LOW Q
These specify the gain, frequency, and Q for the LOMID and LOW bands of the return channel EQ. The
range of each parameter is the same as in the EDIT
page of the EQ screen.
1 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
press the [EFFECT 1] knob or hold down
the [EFFECT 1] knob and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the SEND page of
the EFF1 screen.
NOTE
• If the displayed page is different than shown above, make
sure that a track channel is selected as the object of operations. (This is indicated in the upper left of the screen.) If an
input channel/pad channel is selected, press any one of the
[TRACK SEL] keys.
2
3
1 PAN L
B PAN R
Independently specify the return channel panning for
the L and R channels.
2 Move the cursor to the EFF INSERT field of
the track channel into which you want to
insert an effect, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking whether it is ok
to release internal effect 1 from the send/return connection.
C RETURN
Adjusts the input level for return channel 1.
5 Access the desired return channel page,
move the cursor to a parameter, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial.
6 To switch effect BYPASS on/off, press the
[ENTER] key.
In the EDIT page, you can press the [ENTER] key to
switch BYPASS on/off regardless of the current location.
3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
1
the [ENTER] key.
Internal effect 1 will be inserted into the selected track
channel.
4 Press the [EFFECT 1] knob twice to access
the LIBRARY page of the EFF1 screen.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
99
Convenient functions during mixdown/bounce operations
5 Select the library that you want to use for
that channel.
NOTE
• If you insert an internal effect into a channel, the SEND page
of the EFF1 screen will no longer show return channel pages
1–4. To adjust the balance between the original sound and
the effect sound, use the MIX BAL. parameter that is shown in
the last parameter page.
HINT
• You can also insert an effect by using the effect insert field in
the CH VIEW page of the VIEW screen (→ p. 94).
9
Mixdown and bounce operations
100
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 10
Creating an audio CD
This chapter explains how you can use the CD-RW drive to create an audio
CD, and how to play back an audio CD.
Creating an audio CD
On the AW1600, you can select one or more songs on the hard disk, and write the audio data
from the stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-DA format. The CD-R/RW media to
which you write this data can be played by the CD-RW drive or a conventional CD player in the
same way as any audio CD.
NOTE
• Some CD players that do not support CD-R/RW media may not be able to play
back a CD you create.
In order to create a CD, you must first register one or more
songs in a “track list,” and then write the virtual track currently selected for the stereo track of each song (the “current track”) to the CD in the order specified by the track
list.
A maximum of 99 tracks (areas on CD media to which
audio data can be written individually) can be written to
one volume of CD-R/RW media, and each track must be
at least four seconds long. The maximum length of time
that can be written is approximately 74 minutes for
650 MB media, or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB
media.
HINT
Types of media that you can use with the CD-RW drive
10
Creating an audio CD
• The total size of audio data that can be written is 746 MB (approximately 74 minutes) for 650 MB media, or 807 MB (approximately
80 minutes) for 700 MB media.
The CD-RW drive of the AW1600 can use two types of media: “CD-R” which lets you record and
add data, and “CD-RW” which lets you erase previously-recorded data and rewrite it. Each type
of media has the following characteristics.
● CD-R
● CD-RW
You can write data to this media, and add additional data
later. You cannot erase and rewrite data that has already
been written. Once you perform a process known as
“finalizing the disc,” the audio data written to the CD-R
can be played by the CD-RW drive or by most CD players.
In addition to writing and adding data, this media lets you
erase all recorded data and rewrite it. Audio data written to
a CD-RW can be played back by the CD-RW or by CD
players that support CD-RW media.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
101
Methods of writing an audio CD
Methods of writing an audio CD
There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD-R/RW media.
● Track At Once
● Disc At Once
This method writes the data in units of CD tracks. The
advantage of this method is that you can add new data to
media that already contains existing data.
With the Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the end of the stereo track of a song is written to
the CD as one track. (Even if there is a portion during the
song that contains no data, it will be written as silent audio
data.)
Since each track is written individually when you use this
method, an interval of approximately two seconds will be
created between each track.
This method writes all tracks at once. Similarly to when
using the Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the end of the stereo track of each song is written
to the CD as one track.
However since writing does not stop until all data has been
written, there will be no gap between the tracks.
Start
Start
End
Song A
Marker = off
Start
End
Song B
Marker = off
End
Song A
Start
End
Audio CD
Track 1
Song B
Track 2
no gap
Audio CD
Track 1
Track 2
interval (2 seconds)
10
Creating an audio CD
In order for a disc written using Track At Once to be playable by the CD-RW drive or a CD player, you must perform a process known as “finalizing” to write track
information to the disc. Once you have finalized a disc,
you cannot write any more data to it.
When using Disc At Once to write a CD, you can use the
start point, end point and markers that were assigned
within the AW1600 song to divide a single continuous
song into multiple tracks for writing.
For example, this is convenient when you have recorded a
live performance as a single song, and want to assign track
numbers while leaving the playback in continuous form.
Start
1
2
End
Song A
Marker = on
Start
1
2
End
Song B
Marker = off
Audio CD
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
NOTE
• A track shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio
CD. If you use start point/end point/markers to divide a song into
multiple tracks, make sure that each track is at least four seconds
long.
• If the length of the stereo track exceeds the writable length of the
media, you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point/
end point so that the region is within the allowable length. (→
p. 106)
Media that you write using Disc At Once will be finalized
automatically, and can be played back by a CD-RW drive
or CD player that supports that type of media. However,
no further data can be written to a disc that was written
using Disc At Once.
102
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Basic settings for the CD-RW drive
Basic settings for the CD-RW drive
Before you actually write data to a CD, you will need to make basic settings for the CD-RW drive.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [CD] key or hold down the [CD]
key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the SETTING page of the CD screen.
1
2
6
2 Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE
SPEED field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial
to select the writing speed.
You can select either x8 (eight times as fast as audio
playback) or x4 (four times as fast as audio playback).
Normally you should use x8, and drop down to x4 if
errors occur during writing.
3 Use the TEST button and WRITE button to
select the writing operation(s).
7
1 CD-RW MEDIA ERASE
Erases the data that was written to CD-RW media. For
details, refer to “Erasing CD-RW media” (→ p. 109).
B AUDIO WRITE SPEED
Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to
CD-R/RW media.
C TEST button
Specifies whether a writing test will be performed
when you execute writing.
D WRITE button
Specifies whether the actual writing operation will be
performed.
E UNDERRUN PROTECT button
Enables/disables the function that prevents buffer
underrun (an error that can occur when data transfer
cannot keep up with writing speed).
F DATA WRITE SPEED
This indicates the speed at which data other than CD
audio (e.g., backup data or WAV files) is written to
CD-R/RW media. Normally this will indicate x8. This
will indicate x4 if the media supports a maximum
writing speed of x4. This field is for display only, and
cannot be edited.
G COMPARE button
If this button is on, the original data will be compared
with the backed-up data or the exported WAV file after
a backup or export operation is performed, to check
whether any errors occurred while writing the data.
• Only the TEST button on
........... Only a writing test will be performed.
• Only the WRITE button on
........... Writing will occur immediately.
• Both the WRITE button and TEST button on
........... First a writing test will be performed,
and then the actual writing will be
performed.
Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk,
it is possible that an error may occur while the data is
being written. (If you are using a CD-R, this will make
the media unusable.) Thus, you can turn on the TEST
button to check whether an error will occur before you
actually write the disc. If an error occurs during the
test, halt the procedure, and either lower the writing
speed or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to
ENABLE.
4 If desired, set the UNDERRUN PROTECT
button to ENABLE.
The CD-RW drive of the AW1600 has a function to
prevent “buffer underrun” errors which can occur if
data transfer cannot keep up with the writing speed.
If you switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to
the “ENABLE” setting, this function will be enabled,
and buffer underruns will be prevented.
10
Creating an audio CD
5 43
The TEST button and WRITE button specify whether
a writing test and/or the actual writing operation will
be performed. The combination of buttons that are on
will determine the operation(s) that will occur, as follows.
NOTE
• If this button is set to ENABLE, the TEST button will automatically be turned off. Also, if the TEST button is turned on, this
button will automatically be set to DISABLE.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
103
Writing audio data (Track At Once)
Writing audio data (Track At Once)
Here’s how to use the Track At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard
disk to CD-R/RW media. Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks to the disc later, or if
you want a two-second gap between tracks.
1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track
is selected for the stereo track of the
song(s) you want to write.
Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo
track (i.e., the “current track”) will be written to disc.
If the correct virtual track is not selected, load that
song, use the ST.TRACK page of the MONITOR
screen to switch to the correct virtual track, and then
save the song.
3 Insert CD-R/RW media in the drive, move
the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A display like the following will appear.
3
1
2 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the CD WRITE page of the
CD screen.
2 6
Immediately after you access this page, the following
two buttons will appear in the display.
54
1 Song list
12
10
1 TRACK AT ONCE button
Creates an audio CD using the Track At Once method.
Creating an audio CD
B DISC AT ONCE button
Creates an audio CD using the Disc At Once method.
This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that
will be written to the CD-R/RW media. The line
enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for
operations. If no songs have been registered, this will
indicate “-NO TRACK-”.
If audio data has already been written to the inserted
CD-R/RW media but the media has not yet been finalized, a title of “--EXIST--” will be displayed for the
already-written data.
B FINALIZE button
Finalizes the inserted media by writing track information to it.
C INS button
Inserts a new song in front of the song currently
selected in the list.
D NEW button
Adds a song at the end of the song list.
E DEL button
Deletes the selected song from the list.
F EXECUTE button
Executes writing to the CD media.
HINT
• If you have inserted CD-RW media that contains data written
using other than the Track At Once method, a popup window
will appear immediately after step 3, asking whether you want
to erase the data. If you want to erase the entire media, move
the cursor to the OK button. If you want to cancel creation of
an audio CD, move the cursor to the CANCEL button. Then
press the [ENTER] key.
104
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Writing audio data (Track At Once)
4 Move the cursor to the NEW button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The song list will show information (track number/
song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that
will be written to track 1 of the CD.
5 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the
8 To begin writing, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key.
While data is being written to the media, a popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” When writing is
completed, a popup window will ask you whether you
want to finalize.
song list, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song that will be written to track
1.
NOTE
• If an error message of “BUFFER UNDERRUN!” appears while
writing, a buffer underrun has occurred. In this case, either
decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN
PROTECT button to the ENABLE position (→ p. 103).
• If you enabled the writing test in “Basic settings for the CDRW drive” (→ p. 103), a writing test will be performed before
the data is actually written. If a problem occurs during the
writing test, an error message will appear.
• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD
that is created.
9 To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial, you will see only songs
for which the current stereo track contains data.
If you do not want to finalize the disc, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
This completes the writing process.
• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not
be displayed.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs
10
that will be written to track 2 and following.
Creating an audio CD
HINT
• When you move the cursor to the NEW button and press the
[ENTER] key, a new song will be added at the end of the
existing songs.
• By using the INS button instead of the NEW button, you can
insert a new song immediately before the song that is
selected in the list.
• You can use the DEL button to delete the currently selected
song from the song list.
NOTE
• When you add a song to the song list, the same song will
always be initially selected. Change this as desired.
7 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
105
Writing audio data (Disc At Once)
Writing audio data (Disc At Once)
Here’s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard
disk to CD-R/RW media. Use this method if you do not want to create silence between each track
of the CD, or if you want to write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD.
1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track
is selected for the stereo track of the
song(s) you want to write.
4 Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and
press the [ENTER] key.
The following screen will appear.
2 If you want to divide the song into CD
3
1
tracks at the marker locations specified
within the song, check that markers have
been set at the appropriate locations.
3 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the CD WRITE page of the
CD screen.
2 6
54
1 Song list
This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that
will be written to the CD-R/RW media. The line
enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for
operations. If no songs have been registered, this will
indicate “-NO TRACK-”.
B MARKER button
For each stereo track, this enables or disables the
markers that have been set within that song.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the start pint, end point and markers
within the currently selected stereo track will be
enabled. (A “flag” icon will appear at the left of the
list.) If markers are enabled for a stereo track, a track
number will be written to the CD at the location of
each marker. Regardless of any areas of silence, the
entire region from the Start point to the End point will
be written.
10
Creating an audio CD
C INS button
Inserts a new song in front of the song currently
selected in the list.
D NEW button
Adds a song at the end of the song list.
E DEL button
Deletes the selected song from the list.
F EXECUTE button
Executes writing to the CD media.
HINT
• If data has already been written on the CD-RW media that
you insert, a popup window will appear immediately after step
3, asking whether you want to erase the data. Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to erase the entire media, or
to the CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution. Then
press the [ENTER] key.
106
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Writing audio data (Disc At Once)
5 Move the cursor to the NEW button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The song list will show information (track number/
song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that
will be written to track 1 of the CD.
6 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the
song list, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the song that will be written to track
1.
8 Repeat steps 5–7 to select the songs that
will be written to track 2 and following.
HINT
• When you move the cursor to the NEW button and press the
[ENTER] key, a new song will be added at the end of the
existing songs.
• By using the INS button instead of the NEW button, you can
insert a new song immediately before the song that is
selected in the list.
• You can use the DEL button to delete the currently selected
song from the song list.
NOTE
• When you add a song to the song list, the same song will
always be initially selected. Change this as desired.
9 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm.
NOTE
• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not
be displayed.
7 If you want the stereo track of the selected
10 To begin writing, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key.
While data is being written to the media, a popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” When writing is
completed, the CD-R/RW media will be ejected, and
the following popup window will appear.
song to be divided into CD tracks at the
location of each marker, move the cursor to
the MARKER button and press the [ENTER]
key.
Markers will be enabled for that song, and a “flag”
icon will appear at the right of the list.
NOTE
• Markers can be enabled/disabled independently for each
song.
• If you enabled the writing test in “Basic settings for the CDRW drive” (→ p. 103), a writing test will be performed before
the data is actually written. If a problem occurs during the
writing test, an error message will appear.
• When you use markers to divide a stereo track, the location of
the divisions will be specified in units of 1/75 second.
• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD
that is created.
HINT
NOTE
• Note that if markers are enabled, the track numbers shown in
the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD.
• A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD. If, for
example, markers are enabled for the song you write to CD
track 1, and this song contains 98 markers, it will not be possible to write any more songs to that CD-R/RW media.
10
Creating an audio CD
• When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial, you will see only songs
for which the current stereo track contains data.
11 If you want to create another CD with the
identical contents, insert a new volume of
media, and move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Writing will begin again.
Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key to exit the
writing process.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
107
Finalizing CD-R/RW media
Finalizing CD-R/RW media
Here’s how to finalize CD-R/RW media that you wrote using Track At Once, so that the disc can
be played by a CD-RW drive or a CD player.
HINT
• CD-R/RW media written by the AW1600 using Track At Once (and not yet finalized) cannot be
played by another CD-RW drive or a CD player, but it can be played by the AW1600’s CD Play
function. (→ p. 110)
1 Insert the CD-R/RW media that you want to
finalize into the CD-RW drive.
2 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the CD WRITE page of the
CD screen.
4 Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the finalize
operation.
3 Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The following screen will appear, and the track list
will show the content that has been written to that CDR/RW media. Already-recorded tracks will be displayed as “--EXIST--”.
5 To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you decide not to finalize the disc, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• The finalize operation cannot be halted once it has been
started. Perform this operation with care.
10
Creating an audio CD
108
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Erasing CD-RW media
Erasing CD-RW media
Here’s how to erase all data that has been written to CD-RW media, so that the CD-RW disc can
be used as a blank disc. You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used to
store computer data etc. if you want to use that disc on the AW1600.
HINT
• Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW1600 data to CD-RW media or when you
write audio data to CD-RW media, you do not need to perform the following procedure each time
you re-use the disc.
NOTE
• The erased data cannot be recovered. Perform this operation with care.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
● If you turn on the SIMPLY button
press the [CD] key or hold down the [CD]
key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the SETTING page of the CD screen.
● If you turn on the PERFECTLY button
2 Move the cursor to the CD-RW MEDIA
Each button selects the following erasure method.
• SIMPLY button ...........Only the TOC (Table Of Contents) data written to the CDRW media will be erased. If
you select this method, it will
take only a short time to
erase the CD-RW media.
3 To execute the erasure, move the cursor to
the OK button. If you decide not to erase
the disc, move the cursor to the CANCEL
button. Then press the [ENTER] key.
If you selected the OK button, erasure will begin.
(This operation cannot be halted.)
• PERFECTLY button ...All data written to the CDRW media will be erased
completely. Since this
method erases all data from
the media, it will take a
longer time than SIMPLY.
10
Creating an audio CD
ERASE field, and press the [ENTER] key to
select the desired erasure method.
Move the cursor to the desired button, and press the
[ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the erasure.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
109
Playing an audio CD
Playing an audio CD
You can use the CD-RW drive to play back a conventional audio CD or CD-R/RW media to which
audio data has been written. This is referred to as the CD Play function.
HINT
• The CD Play function can also play audio data from a mixed-mode CD-ROM (only track 2 and following) or CD Extra (only the first session).
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [CD] key or hold down the [CD]
key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the CD PLAY page of the CD screen.
In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in
the CD-RW drive.
4 To play the CD tracks, press the PLAY [
During playback, the audio output of the CD-RW
drive will be sent directly to the stereo output channel.
Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume.
When the CD Play function is on, the keys of the
transport section will have the following functions.
Key
PLAY [
Operation
] key
Play
STOP [■] key
REW [
2 1
Switches the CD Play function on/off.
B INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button
10
Use this button to specify whether the signals of input
channels 1–8 will be output together with the CD playback (MIX button), or whether only the CD signal will
be output (MUTE button).
Creating an audio CD
C List
Displays the tracks of the audio CD that is inserted in
the CD-RW drive.
2 Insert the audio CD that you want to play
into the CD-RW drive.
3 Move the cursor to the CD PLAY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The CD Play function will be turned on, and the CD
track data will be read.
110
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Stop
] key/FF [
] key
Rewind/Fast-forward
[DATA/JOG] dial
Select tracks
(Press the [ENTER] key
to confirm the selection)
[
Select tracks
3
1 CD PLAY button
]
key. To stop, press the STOP [■] key.
] key/[
] key
HINT
• When the cursor is located in the list, you can turn the [DATA/
JOG] dial and press the [ENTER] key to select tracks.
• While an audio CD is playing, the access indicator on the CDRW drive will blink.
5 To exit the CD Play function, move the cursor to the CD PLAY button and press the
[ENTER] key.
NOTE
• The CD PLAY button can be switched on/off only while the
CD is stopped.
• While the CD PLAY button is on, the CD-RW drive will be
locked, and it will not be possible to eject the disc.
Chapter 11
Quick loop sampler
This chapter explains how to use the Quick Loop Sampler section.
About the quick loop sampler
The AW1600 contains a quick loop sampler that lets you play stereo waveforms (samples) by
striking the four pads.
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
Sample banks
● Signal flow when using the Quick Loop
Sampler
1
2
3
When you strike a pad 1–4, the assigned sample will be
sent via pad channel 1–4 to the stereo bus. For each pad
channel, you can adjust the EQ, dynamics, and effects 1/2
send levels just as you can for the track channels or input
channels.
4
Pads
11
Pad
channels
Stereo
output
channel
Quick loop sampler
Each pad 1–4 has four sample banks (A–D) to which you
can assign samples. By switching the sample bank for
each pad, you can use up to sixteen different samples.
Stereo bus
Mixer section
You can load samples into the pads from the sample
library (a library for the Quick Loop Sampler), load a portion of an audio track or audio CD, or load a WAV file.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
111
About the quick loop sampler
In addition, you can choose either “Gate mode” which
plays the sample only while you continue holding down
the pad, or “Trigger mode” which plays the sample all the
way to the end when you press the pad once.
A sample can be played back in one of two ways. “One
shot mode” plays the sample once from start to end.
“Loop mode” plays the sample repeatedly from start to
end.
● Original sample
● ONE SHOT/GATE
Start playback
● ONE SHOT/TRIGGER
Stop
Start playback
Stop
Pad = dark
Pad = lit
● Original
sample
● LOOP/GATE
Pad = lit
● LOOP/TRIGGER
Start playback
Stop
Pad = lit
11
Pad = dark
Start playback
Pad = dark
Quick loop sampler
Your pad operations can be recorded in an area of memory
called the Pad Tracks. The pad tracks always operates in
synchronization with the recorder. By recording your pad
operations in the pad tracks while you listen to the song
play back, you can use the pad tracks as supplementary
audio track.
Pad events
Pad track 1
Pad track 2
Pad track 3
Pad track 4
Pad = lit
Stop
Pad = dark
NOTE
• Be aware that the pad tracks do not record the sample or audio
data itself, but merely the pad on/off data. (Each such piece of
data is called a “pad event.”) The playback produced by a pad track
will change if you switch to other samples after recording pad
events, or if you change the playback mode.
The AW1600 also provides a “Slice function” that divides
a sample into eight to sixteen segments, and adjusts the
playback timing of each segment according to the tempo
of the song.
By using the Slice function you can change only the
tempo of a phrase without affecting its pitch.
For example, a sampled drum pattern can be played back
at the tempo specified by the song’s tempo map. (For
details on using the Slice function → p. 124)
HINT
Attack (pad = on)
112
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Release (pad = off)
• The settings of the Quick Loop Sampler and the sample data
assigned to each pad are saved as part of the song.
Using sample libraries
Using sample libraries
Sample libraries contain sets of up to sixteen different samples that can be used by the Quick
Loop Sampler.
When the AW1600 is shipped from the factory, sets of samples such as drum loops and sounds
effects are stored on the hard disk as sample libraries. When you load one of these libraries,
samples will be assigned to each pad/sample bank, and you can use the pads to play the samples immediately. Here’s how to load a sample library and try it out.
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, either
repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or
hold down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use
the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the
LIBRARY page of the SAMPLE screen.
3
2
4
1
2 Move the cursor into the list, and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the library that
you want to load.
By turning on the LISTEN button and pressing a pad
1–4, you can audition the samples that are assigned to
sample bank A for each pad in that library. For details
on the library contents, refer to “Appendix.”
NOTE
• All sample libraries initially supplied with the unit use 16-bit
samples and cannot be read into 24-bit songs.
3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
7
86
1 List
This area displays a list of the sample libraries saved
on the hard disk.
B SORT field
These buttons sort the sample libraries shown in the
list, either alphabetically (NAME), by when they were
saved (OLD), or by their size (SIZE).
C LISTEN button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the button will be highlighted. If you
now press a pad 1–4, the sample assigned to sample
bank A of the currently selected sample library will
play repeatedly. Playback will stop when you press the
pad once again.
D RECALL button
This button recalls the library that is selected in the
list, and assigns the samples to each pad/sample bank.
E DELETE button
This button deletes the library selected in the list from
the hard disk.
When the library has been loaded, the popup window
will automatically close.
HINT
• When the popup window is open, you can move the cursor to
the 1SAMPLE button and press the [ENTER] key to select
and load just a single sample from the library.
4 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position.
5 Strike pads 1–4.
You can play the samples that are assigned to sample
bank A of each pad.
HINT
• Of the sample libraries saved on the hard disk when the
AW1600 is shipped, most drum pattern libraries that are set
to Loop mode have the Slice function turned on. If you load
this type of library, you only need to press the pad, and the
tempo of the drum pattern will match the tempo of the song.
This lets you use the Quick Loop Sampler similarly to a drum
machine.
11
Quick loop sampler
5
press the [ENTER] key. A popup window
will open. Move the cursor to the ALL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
F STORE button
This button stores a library that you edited.
G PROTECT button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to switch the Protect setting on/off for the library
selected in the list. A lock icon will be displayed to
indicate a library that is protected, and it will not be
possible to edit or delete this library.
H NEW button
This button creates a new library on the hard disk.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
113
Using sample libraries • Recording/playing a pad performance
NOTE
• If a sample is assigned to a pad, that pad will light while the
sample plays when you press it. However if no sample is
assigned, nothing will play and the pad will not light. You can
either assign a sample to the pad, or switch the sample bank.
C Bank
This selects the sample bank (A–D) used by each pad.
The name of the sample assigned to that bank is displayed at the right.
HINT
• If the pad lights when you strike a pad but you hear no sound,
access the METER page of the VIEW screen, and check
whether the meter of the corresponding pad channel (P1–P4)
is moving (→ p. 93).
• If the meter moves when you strike a pad, make sure that the
[STEREO] fader has not been lowered, and that your monitor
system is connected correctly and that its volume is set
appropriately.
• If you hear no sound even after raising the [STEREO] fader,
access the INIT page of the MONITOR screen and press that
pad. This will initialize the pad channel so that it will produce
sound. (→ p. 94)
• If no sample is assigned to the selected bank, the sample
name area will indicate [-NO REC-].
NOTE
• Sample banks recorded in and played back with a song are
specified via the Tempo Map. Check the Tempo Map setup (→
p. 149) when recording phrases played on the pads to a song.
7 Move the cursor to the bank area for the
desired pad, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.
6
To switch the sample bank for each pad,
repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key to
access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE
screen.
1 23
The sample bank will change, and the sample name
will change accordingly.
8 As desired, use the knobs and keys of the
Selected Channel section to process the
sound of pads 1–4.
EQ, dynamics, and effect send 1/2 levels can be
adjusted for the pad channels in the same way as for
the track channels or input channels. Press a pad 1–4
to select the pad channel that you want to control, and
use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section.
HINT
1 One shot/loop mode
An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the
pad is set to One Shot mode ( ) or Loop mode ( ).
11
B Pad number
This indicates the pad number 1–4.
• When you press a pad 1–4, the assigned sample will always
sound. If you want to select a pad for operations without making it sound, hold down the [SELECT] key and press a pad 1–
4.
• The playback sounds of pads 1–4 are sent via pad channels
1–4 to the stereo bus. By using the MIXDOWN page of the
RECORD screen, you can record your pad performance on
the stereo track (→ p. 92). A recording on the stereo track can
also be moved to an audio track (→ p. 132).
Quick loop sampler
Recording/playing a pad performance
Here’s how you can record your pad performance (pad events) onto the pad tracks.
1 In the Quick Navigation section, repeatedly
press the [RECORD] key or hold down the
[RECORD] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the PAD page of the
RECORD screen.
1 2
3
In the PAD page you can record pad events on the pad
tracks.
E
114
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
4
Recording/playing a pad performance
1 One Shot/Loop mode
An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the
pad is set to One Shot mode ( ) or Loop mode ( ).
B Pad track number
This shows the pad track number 1–4. At the right is
shown the name of the sample for the sample bank
selected for that pad.
6 Play the pads while you listen to the audio
tracks play back.
Pad events will be recorded on the pad tracks. The pad
events that are recorded will appear in the pad track
view in realtime.
HINT
• Pad tracks record only the pad on/off status.
NOTE
C Track status button
This indicates the operating state of the track. If you
move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key, the following two displays will alternate.
•
.............The pad track can be recorded.
•
.............The pad track can be played.
NOTE
• Depending on the settings in the PAD page of the TRACK
screen, this may also indicate
(muted).
D Pad track view
In this area, the pad events recorded in the pad track
are shown as a bar graph. Locator positions are shown
as icons in the lower part of the screen.
E GRID button
Grid-records (step-records) pad performances in onemeasure increments (→ p. 116).
2 Move the cursor to the track status button,
and press the [ENTER] key several times to
switch the button display to
(ready to
record). (You may select more than one pad
track.)
HINT
• The track status button can be switched only when the
recorder is stopped.
3 Use the track channel faders and the [STEREO] fader to set the audio tracks to an
appropriate level for monitoring.
7 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.
The recorder will stop.
8 To play back the events that were recorded
on the pad tracks, move the cursor to the
track status button and press the [ENTER]
key several times to switch the display to
.
9 Locate to the point from which you want to
start playing back, and press the PLAY [
key.
]
The pad track(s) will play back in synchronization
with the recorder. If you want to re-do the recording,
repeat steps 6–9.
It is also possible to re-record just a specific region of
a pad track. In this case, the newly recorded pad events
will overwrite the previously-recorded events. However, you need to be careful, since this will also affect
any overlapping pad events before or after the rerecorded region.
HINT
• The contents of a recorded pad track can be edited in a variety of ways using editing commands. For details, refer to
“What you can do using editing commands” (→ p. 127).
10 If you want to mute a specific pad track,
press the Work Navigate section [TRACK]
key repeatedly or hold down the [TRACK]
key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the PAD page of the TRACK screen.
In the PAD page of the TRACK screen you can switch
muting on/off for each pad track.
1 2
11
Quick loop sampler
• Sample banks recorded in and played back with a song are
specified via the Tempo Map. Check the Tempo Map setup (→
p. 149) when recording phrases played on the pads to a song.
3
4 Locate the song to the point at which you
want to begin recording.
5 To begin recording on the pad track, press
the PLAY [
] key.
The recording will begin running, and pad event
recording will begin.
1 One Shot/Loop mode
An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the
pad is set to One Shot mode ( ) or Loop mode ( ).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
115
Recording/playing a pad performance • Grid Recording (Step Recording) the Pads
B Pad track number
This indicates the pad track number 1–4. At the right is
displayed the name of the sample assigned to the sample bank selected for that pad.
C Track mute button
This button switches muting on/off for each track.
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to switch between the following two settings.
•
.............The pad track can be played.
•
.............The pad track is muted.
11 Move the cursor to the track mute button for
the track that you want to mute, and press
the [ENTER] key to switch the button to
(muted).
To cancel muting, move the cursor to the track mute
button and press the [ENTER] key once again.
HINT
• If a pad track is muted and the pad is set to LOOP/TRIGGER,
the pad will play if you simply press the [PLAY] key to play
back the recorder. This means that you can use this feature
as a rhythm machine even without recording on a pad track.
Grid Recording (Step Recording) the Pads
Here we’ll describe how pad performances (pad events) can be recorded to the pad track via
offline (non-realtime) operation. Since pad events can be recorded at the beginning of each measure, this method is useful when you want to align pad timing with the top of each measure.
1 Either press the Quick Navigate section
[RECORD] key repeatedly, or use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys while holding the
[RECORD] key to select the RECORD
screen PAD page.
11
3 To enter a pad event, move the cursor to the
measure on the grid for which you want to
enter the event, then press the appropriate
pad.
“●” will appear on the grid at the corresponding measure and pad track.
2 Move the cursor to the GRID button and
Quick loop sampler
press [ENTER].
The GRID REC popup window will appear. The pad
tracks will be displayed on a measure grid.
4 Press the pad a second time to turn the
event off.
The grid symbols have the following meanings:
•
.................. Measure in which a pad event is
already recorded.
• ● .................. Measure in which a pad event has
been recorded via grid recording.
• Blank ........... Measure in which no pad event is
recorded.
NOTE
• A maximum of 999 measures can be displayed/edited in the
GRID REC popup window.
The symbol at the corresponding grid point will disappear (blank). If a previously-recorded pad event exists
at that point, however, pressing the pad will sequentially select → ● → Blank.
5 When you have finished editing, move the
cursor to EXEC and press [ENTER].
The grid recording will be executed, and the popup
window will close.
NOTE
• Grid recording will not be executed until you move the cursor
to the EXEC button and press the [ENTER] key.
• If you edit a measure in which a pad event has already been
recorded, the results may not always be shown correctly on
the display.
116
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Importing from an audio CD/WAV file to a pad
Importing from an audio CD/WAV file to a pad
Here’s how you can import CD audio data (CD-DA) or a WAV file from a CD-ROM/CD-R into a
sample bank for pads 1–4.
1 Switch the internal settings of the AW1600
● When importing from an audio CD/CD-Extra
to enable digital recording.
1
For details on digital recording settings, refer to page
168.
2
3
2 Insert a CD into the CD-RW drive.
You can load audio data (CD-DA) or WAV files from
the following types of media.
● Audio data (CD-DA)
• Audio CD
• CD-Extra (only the first session of CD-DA)
• Mixed Mode CD (only CD-DA data of the second
and later tracks)
● WAV files
• ISO9660 Level 1 format CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW*
• Mixed Mode CD
* The directory name and file name cannot use characters
other than uppercase alphanumeric characters and the “_”
(underscore) character.
3 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the CD
IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen.
5
6
7
4
1 From CD TRACK
Specifies the number (01–99) of the audio track that
will be imported from the source CD.
B From Start
Specifies the starting location of the data that will be
imported, in units of minutes/seconds/frames (1/75th
of a second).
C From End
Specifies the ending location of the data that will be
imported, in units of minutes/seconds/frames (1/75th
of a second).
HINT
• The “frames” here are the smallest unit of time used by a CD
track. Do not confuse them with the frames used in MTC or
SMPTE.
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The display will indicate “READ CD INFO...”, and
the AW1600 will begin reading the CD that is inserted
in the CD-RW drive.
Depending on the source from which data is read, the
screen will change as follows.
E To PAD
Selects the pad number (1–4) to which the audio material will be imported.
F To BANK
Selects the sample bank (A–D) to which the audio
material will be imported.
11
Quick loop sampler
4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the
D LISTEN button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the specified region of the currently
selected CD track will be played back repeatedly.
G To NAME
Indicates the name of the sample that is currently
assigned to the import-destination sample bank. If
nothing is assigned, this will indicate [-NO REC-].
This field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
117
Importing from an audio CD/WAV file to a pad
● When importing from a WAV file
2
1
• If you import a monaural WAV file, the same sample will be
assigned to the L and R channels.
3
• When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press
the [ENTER] key, there will be a slight interval of time before
you hear the sound, since the data is being read from CD.
5 If you are importing a WAV file, move the
5
6
7
4
1 From WAV File
Specifies the WAV file that will be imported. If the
media contains folders (directories), move to the
folder that contains the WAV file you want to import,
and then specify the desired WAV file.
The following icons will be displayed.
•
.............Indicates that a WAV file is selected.
•
.............Indicates that a folder in the same level
is selected.
•
.............Indicates that the folder for the next
higher level is selected.
B Mono/Stereo
Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing
is monaural (M) or stereo (S). This field is only for
display, and cannot be edited.
C Size
Indicates the size (length in msec units) of the WAV
file selected for importing. This field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
11
D LISTEN/ENTER/UP buttons
The name and function of the button displayed here
will depend on the item that you select for the From
WAV File parameter.
Quick loop sampler
● If WAV file ( ) is selected
The LISTEN button will be displayed, allowing you to
hear the WAV file repeatedly.
cursor to the From WAVE file field, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the WAV file
that you want to import.
To move to a lower-level folder, display the ( ) icon
in this area, move the cursor to the ENTER button in
the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
To move to the folder above, display the ( ) in this
area, move the cursor to the UP button in the screen,
and press the [ENTER] key.
6 If you are importing from an audio CD or
CD-Extra, use the From Start/From End
fields to specify the region that you want to
import.
7 Use the To PAD and To BANK fields to specify the pad/sample bank into which the data
will be imported.
NOTE
• If the import destination already contains data, the existing
sample will be overwritten by the newly imported sample. Be
careful that you do not accidentally erase a sample that you
want to keep.
8 When you have finished specifying the data
to be imported, move the cursor to the
EXEC button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the operation.
● If a folder in the same level is selected
The ENTER button will be displayed, allowing you to
move into that folder.
● If the next higher folder ( ) is selected
The UP button will be displayed, allowing you to move
to the folder above.
E To PAD
F To BANK
G To NAME
These have the same function as when importing from
an audio CD/CD-Extra.
HINT
• If a mixed mode format CD-ROM is inserted in the CD-RW
drive, a popup window will appear, allowing you to select
AUDIO (CD-DA) or WAVE (WAV files) for importing. Move the
cursor to the button for the type of data that you want to
import, and press the [ENTER] key.
• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz, mono or stereo WAV files can
be imported. Also, WAV files having a different bit depth from
the song cannot be imported.
9 To execute the import, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. If you decide to cancel the
import, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• When you import from CD-DA, a name of “PAD_x_y” (x= pad
number, y= sample bank) will automatically be assigned to
the sample. You are free to change this name later (→ p. 121).
• When you import a WAV file, the first eight characters (not
including the extension) of that filename will be assigned as
the name of the sample.
• The imported sample will be saved together with the current
song.
NOTE
• It is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is running.
118
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Importing from an audio track/stereo track to a pad
Importing from an audio track/stereo track to a pad
Here’s how a region of an already-recorded track of the current song can be imported into a sample bank for pads 1–4.
1 Play back the song, and find the track and
region that you want to import.
2
In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the TR
IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen.
1
2
3
4
HINT
• If you import monaural audio from a track 1–16, the same
sample will be assigned to the left and right channels.
4 Move the cursor to the V.TR field, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a virtual track
1–8 as the import destination.
5 Move the cursor to the From Start and From
End fields, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
specify the start and end of the region that
will be imported.
The units by which you specify the location will
depend on the current counter display method. For
details on the counter display, refer to page 146.
6
7
This page contains the following items.
1 From TR
Specifies the track from which the data will be
imported.
6 Move the cursor to the To PAD and To BANK
fields, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
specify the pad number and sample bank
into which the data will be imported.
7 When you have finished making the set-
B From V.TR
tings, move the cursor to the EXEC button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Specifies the virtual track from which the data will be
imported.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
C From Start
Specifies the beginning of the region that will be
imported.
D From End
Specifies the end of the region that will be imported.
E To PAD
Selects the pad (1–4) to which the data will be
imported.
F To BANK
Selects the sample bank (A–D) to which the data will
be imported.
G NAME
Indicates the name of the sample that is currently
assigned to the sample bank you specified as the
import destination. If no sample is currently assigned,
this will indicate [-NO REC-]. This item is for display
only, and cannot be edited.
3 Move the cursor to the From TR field, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select one of
the following as the import source track.
• 1–16 ................Import monaural audio from a track
1–16.
8 To execute the import, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The data will begin being read from the track. If you
decide to cancel the import operation, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• The imported sample will be assigned the same name as the
track from which the data was imported. You are free to edit
this name later (→ p. 121).
• The imported sample is saved together with the current song.
11
Quick loop sampler
5
NOTE
• A total of up to approximately 47 seconds (approximately 29
seconds in 24-bit songs) of samples can be imported into the
Quick Loop Sampler. If you specify a region that exceeds this
amount, an error message will be displayed, and the import
operation cannot be executed.
• If you import once again into the same pad and sample bank,
that sample will be overwritten by the newly imported data. If
you want to keep the previously-imported sample, you must
import the new data into a different pad or sample bank.
• It is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is running.
• 1/2–15/16 ........Import stereo audio from tracks 1/2–
15/16.
• ST ...................Import stereo audio from the stereo
track.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
119
Importing From a Computer To the Pads
Importing From a Computer To the Pads
WAV files imported into the AW1600 from a computer via the USB interface can be assigned to
the pads.
■ Importing WAV files from a computer
With the AW1600 connected to a computer via a USB
cable, copy the required file(s) from the computer’s hard
disk to the “Transport” folder in the AW1600. For details
see “Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer” on
page 137.
■ Assigning WAV files to the pads
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the WAV
IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen.
1
2
2 Move the cursor to the From WAVE File
field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
the WAV file that you want to import.
WAV files to be imported must first be copied from the
computer’s hard disk to the “Transport” folder on the
AW1600 internal hard disk. WAV files stored in subfolders within the Transport folder can also be used.
For details see “Transferring WAV Files To and From
a Computer” on page 137.
3 Use the To PAD and To BANK fields to specify the pad/sample bank into which the data
will be imported.
4 When you have finished specifying the data
to be imported, move the cursor to the
EXEC button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm
the operation.
3
4
E
This page contains the following items.
11
1 From WAVE File
Specifies the WAV file that will be imported.
Quick loop sampler
B LISTEN button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the currently selected WAV file will be
played back repeatedly.
C To PAD
Selects the pad number (1–4) to which the WAV file
will be imported.
D To BANK
Selects the sample bank (A–D) to which the WAV file
will be imported.
E NAME
Indicates the name of the sample that is currently
assigned to the import-destination sample bank. If
nothing is assigned, this will indicate [-NO REC-].
This field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz, mono or stereo WAV files can
be imported. Also, WAV files having a different bit depth from
the song cannot be imported.
120
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
5 To execute the import, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. If you decide to cancel the
import, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• The imported sample will be assigned the same name as the
WAV file from which the data was imported. You are free to
edit this name later (→ p. 121).
• The imported sample will be saved together with the current
song.
NOTE
• A total of up to approximately 47 seconds (approximately 29
seconds in 24-bit songs) of samples can be imported into the
Quick Loop Sampler. If you specify a WAV file that exceeds
this amount, an error message will be displayed, and the
import operation cannot be executed.
• If you import once again into the same pad and sample bank,
that sample will be overwritten by the newly imported data. If
you want to keep the previously-imported sample, you must
import the new data into a different pad or sample bank.
• It is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is running.
Editing the sample name
Editing the sample name
Here’s how you can edit the sample name that is assigned when you import from an audio CD or
WAV file.
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeat-
edly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the SETUP
page of the SAMPLE screen.
1
2
3
2 Move the cursor to the Bank field, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the sample
bank whose name you want to edit.
The sample name is displayed at the right.
3 Move the cursor to the NAME button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.
1 Bank
B Sample name
Indicates the name of the sample that is assigned to the
currently selected sample bank.
C NAME button
Opens the TITLE EDIT popup window, where you
can edit the name of the sample.
You may use only capital letters, numerals, and the
underscore “_” character.
4 When you have finished editing the name,
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The popup window will close, and the new name will
be applied.
11
Quick loop sampler
Selects the sample bank that will be used for each pad.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
121
Trimming the playback region
Trimming the playback region
Here’s how you can view the waveform of the sample assigned to a sample bank, and adjust the
playback start and end points.
1 In the Quick Sampler Section, repeatedly
press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold down
the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the SETUP
page of the SAMPLE screen.
1
2
Selects the sample bank used for each pad.
B TRIM button
G ← button
Displays the area near the Start point of the waveform.
Accesses a popup window that displays the waveform
of the sample.
H → button
Displays the area near the End point of the waveform.
2 Move the cursor to the bank field for the
pad whose playback region you want to
adjust, and select the sample bank.
3 Move the cursor to the TRIM button for the
pad whose playback region you want to
adjust, and press the [ENTER] key.
The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear. In
this popup window you can view the waveform of the
selected sample, and specify the start point (playback
start location) and end point (playback end location).
Quick loop sampler
1
2
3
5 6
I EXIT button
Applies the settings and closes the popup window.
4 Move the cursor to the Start point, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the playback
start point of the sample.
If you expand or shrink the time axis of the waveform
display, the movement that occurs when you turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial will change accordingly. It is a good
idea to start with a lower magnification, set the location approximately, and then zoom in to a higher magnification and make detailed adjustments.
5 In the same way, move the cursor to the end
point and adjust the playback end point of
the sample.
HINT
• The unused region before the Start point and after the End
point can be deleted later if you wish. For details, refer to
“Deleting an unwanted sample” (→ p. 126).
4
7 9 8
1 PAD
Indicates the currently selected pad and sample bank.
Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify whether the L or
the R channel will be displayed.
B Start point
Specifies the start point of the sample.
C End point
Specifies the end point of the sample.
HINT
• In the WAVE DISPLAY popup window, the start point and end
point are indicated by vertical dotted lines.
122
E TIME
Specifies the range of time that will be displayed for
the waveform. If you select 1SEC, the distance from
the left edge of the screen to the right edge will correspond to one second. If you select SAMPLE, the display will be at maximum magnification, and each
pixel in the horizontal direction will correspond to one
sample (1/44,100 second).
F AMP
Specifies the range of levels that will be displayed for
the waveform. If you select 0 dB, the top and bottom
edges of the screen will be the maximum level.
1 Bank
11
D Waveform display
Displays the waveform of the selected sample.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
6 When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The popup window will close.
Switching the playback mode for each pad
Switching the playback mode for each pad
Here’s how you can switch the playback mode for each pad between One Shot or Loop modes,
and between Trigger and Gate modes.
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the
SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen.
2 Repeatedly press the CURSOR [
] key to
access the second page of the SETUP
page.
1
3 Move the cursor to the item that you want to
set, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
the setting.
NOTE
• Playback mode settings are made for each pad. The playback
mode of a pad will not change when you switch the sample
bank of that pad.
2
Since the SETUP page contains numerous settings, it
is divided into two pages. (To return to the first page,
press the CURSOR [ ] key repeatedly.) The second
page contains the following items.
1 One Shot/Loop mode
Selects one of the following two modes to specify how
the sample assigned to the pad will play back.
• ONE SHOT ...........The playback region of the sample will be played only once.
• LOOP....................The playback region will be
played repeatedly.
11
NOTE
Quick loop sampler
• If you select LOOP, the playback will automatically follow the
time signature and tempo that are specified in the TEMPO
MAP page of the SONG screen. In this case, the way in which
the sample plays back will depend on the SLICE setting.
B Trigger/Gate
Selects one of the following two types of operation for
when the pad is pressed.
• GATE ....................The sample will play only while
you hold down the pad.
• TRIGGER..............The sample will play to the end
when you press the pad once.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
123
Using the Slice function
Using the Slice function
Slice is a function that divides a sample (whose playback mode is set to Loop) into eight to sixteen segments, and adjusts the timing of each segment so that it can be played at a different
tempo without affecting the pitch.
Here’s how you can use the Slice function to play a sampled phrase at the tempo of the current
song.
HINT
• The Slice function always handles the playback region of the sample as one measure. Before using the
Slice function, you must trim the playback region of the sample so that it is one measure long.
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeatedly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the
SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen.
1
2
3 Move the cursor to the SLICE field of the
pad for which you want to use the Slice
function, and select one of the following as
the slice setting.
• OFF ................ The Slice function will not be used.
• 8 ..................... The playback region of the sample
will be divided into eight equal segments.
• 12 ................... The playback region of the sample
will be divided into twelve equal segments.
• 16 ................... The playback region of the sample
will be divided into sixteen equal
segments.
3
1 SLICE
11
Turns the Slice function on/off. If this is on, you can
specify the number of segments into which the sample
will be divided. If the playback mode is not set to
Loop mode, this will be displayed as “–” and cannot
be changed.
Quick loop sampler
B BPM
Indicates the tempo calculated by considering the
playback region of the sample as one measure. This
field is for display only, and cannot be edited.
C MONITOR TEMPO
Selects the basic tempo that will be used for playing
the phrase sample when the recorder is stopped. This
item only affects a sample whose playback mode is set
to LOOP. While the recorder is running, the tempo of
the song will be used.
2 Move the cursor to the bank field of the pad
for which you want to use the Slice function, and select the sample bank.
HINT
• Normally when you use the Slice function, you will select the
number of segments based on the shortest note value in the
original phrase. For example you would use a setting of 16 if
the shortest note value in the original phrase is a sixteenth
note, a setting of 12 for eighth note triplets, or a setting of 8 for
eighth notes.
• If the Slice function is OFF, the waveform will play from the
beginning of the measure without being divided. If the waveform is longer than one measure, it may not play completely.
4 Move the cursor to the MONITOR TEMPO
field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
SONG.
The MONITOR TEMPO field selects one of the following as the basic tempo at which the phrase will be
played if you play the sample while the recorder is
stopped.
• ORIGINAL...... The original tempo of the sample,
shown in the BPM field
• SONG............. The tempo specified by the tempo
map
• 30–250 ........... The numerically specified tempo
If you select SONG, the playback timing of each segment will be adjusted according to the tempo that is
specified by the tempo map for the current location.
124
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Using the Slice function
The following diagram shows how, for a sample with
an original tempo of 100 BPM, the playback timing of
each segment will change at a song tempo of 120 BPM
or 80 BPM.
● When song tempo = 120
● Original sample (tempo = 100)
● When song tempo = 80
segment
5 Strike the pad to hear the result.
If the playback of the sample is broken in an unnatural
way, go back to step 3 and try changing the number of
segments into which the sample is divided. However,
this may not improve the result if there is too great a
difference between the tempo of the sample and the
tempo of the current song.
6 Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key or hold
down the [TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the VIEW page
of the TRACK screen.
Quick loop sampler
7
11
Play back the song, and press the pad for
which you turned the Slice function on.
The phrase of the sample assigned to the pad will play
in synchronization with the tempo of the current song.
If you have input data in the tempo map to change the
tempo during the song, the sample phrase will follow
the change. (For details on tempo map settings →
p. 149.)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
125
Deleting an unwanted sample
Deleting an unwanted sample
Here’s how you can delete unused data (before the start point and after the end point) from a
specific sample, or completely erase an individual sample.
1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section, repeat-
edly press the [SAMPLE EDIT] key or hold
down the [SAMPLE EDIT] key and use the
CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to access the MEMORY page of the SAMPLE screen.
In this page you can delete the unused portion of a
sample, or erase an unwanted sample.
12
3
4
56
The procedure after this point will depend on the function
that you want to execute.
■ To erase the entire sample
1 To erase the entire selected sample, move
the cursor to the ERASE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to erase the sample.
2 To execute the erasure, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you decide to cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
7
8
1 One Shot/Loop mode
■ To delete the unused
portions of the selected sample
This icon indicates whether One Shot mode ( ) or
Loop Mode ( ) is selected for the sample assigned to
the pad.
1 Move the cursor to the EXTRACT button
B Pad number
Indicates the pad number 1–4.
11
C Size
This area graphically indicates the memory size of
each sample. The horizontal line indicates the amount
of memory used by each pad.
D PAD
E BANK
Quick loop sampler
These select the pad (1–4) and sample bank (A–D) to
which the operation will apply.
F Sample name
Indicates the name of the sample for the pad and sample selected in 4 and 5.
G ERASE button
Erases the specified sample.
H EXTRACT button
Discards the unused portions (before the start point
and after the end point) of the specified sample.
HINT
• For details on how to adjust the start point and end point of a
sample, refer to page 122.
2 Move the cursor to the PAD/BANK fields,
and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
pad and sample bank.
126
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm that you
want to delete the data.
2 To execute the deletion, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you decide to cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
Chapter 12
Track editing
This chapter explains how you can edit the audio data recorded in an audio
track, and how to edit the pad events recorded in a pad track.
What you can do using editing commands
The AW1600 provides various editing commands for editing the recorded audio tracks and pad
tracks. Editing commands are functions that let you specify a track or region, and delete or move
the data of that track or region.
● ERASE
Erases the data of the specified region.
● DELETE
Deletes the data of the specified region. Any data that follows the deleted region will be moved forward by the corresponding distance.
● INSERT
Inserts blank space into the specified region.
● COPY
Copies the data from the specified region to the desired
location of the desired track.
● MOVE
Moves the data from the specified region to the desired
location of the desired track. The move-source data will be
erased.
● EXCHANGE
Exchanges data between the specified tracks.
● TIME COMP/EXP
(Time Compression/Expansion)
Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track
without affecting its pitch.
● PITCH CHANGE
Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track
without affecting its length.
● EXPORT
Writes the specified region of an audio track to a WAV
file.
HINT
• The EXCHANGE, TIME COMP/EXP, PITCH CHANGE, and
EXPORT commands can only be used on audio tracks. The
remaining commands can be used on either audio tracks or pad
tracks.
Here are some ways in which you can use these editing
commands.
1 Erase unwanted regions
You can use the ERASE command to erase just a specific
region of a specific track. For example, this provides a
convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a performance, or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instrument was not playing.
B Change the structure of the tracks
You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an
entire track with another track. By using this command
you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers
closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown.
You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy/
move the specified region of a track to a different track.
This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part
among two or more virtual tracks, and want to assemble
the best parts into a single track.
C Change the structure of the song
You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete/
copy entire tracks, changing the structure of the song
itself. Even after all parts of the song have been recorded,
you can use this method to adjust the length of the song,
for example by shortening the number of measures or
increasing the number of choruses.
D Create special effects
You can also use editing commands to create special
effects. For example, you can copy a guitar or vocal solo
part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE command to slightly detune one of these tracks, creating a
chorus effect without using the internal effect processor.
By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum
track to lower the pitch, you can create a unique lo-fi
effect.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
12
Track editing
The AW1600 provides the following editing commands.
127
What you can do using editing commands
Basic procedure for
track editing
Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing command. The procedure is essentially the same for all track
editing commands.
■ Select the editing command
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [EDIT] key.
■ Select the track(s) to edit
After you choose an editing command, the next step is to
specify the track(s) that will be edited.
3 To select the track for editing, move the cursor to the TR (Track) field in the lower left of
the EDIT screen, and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial.
For any command, the TR (Track) field will appear in
the lower left of the screen, allowing you to select the
track(s).
The EDIT screen will appear. This screen displays the
following information.
1
Track number
2
In the TR field you can select the following types of
data.
• CLIP .............Sound clip
• 1–16 .............An audio track
4
3
1 Editing command
Indicates the currently selected editing command.
• 1/2–15/16 .....A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
• ST.................The stereo track
• PAD ..............A pad track
• ALL ..............Audio tracks 1–16 and pad tracks 1–4
B Locator/marker
Indicates the approximate location of the currently set
locate points and markers.
If the current track is selected as the virtual track to be
edited, the approximate range(s) of recorded data will
also be displayed.
C Parameters
12
Sets various parameters (track/virtual track number,
editing region, etc.) required in order to execute the
command. The type of parameters and the ranges of
the settings will depend on the command that is
selected.
NOTE
• The data that can actually be selected will depend on the
command.
4 Select the virtual track or pad that you want
to edit.
If you selected an audio track (1–16,1/2–15/16, STEREO) in step 3, the V (V.TRACK) field will appear at
the right, allowing you to select the virtual track number. Move the cursor to this field and select a virtual
track number 1–8.
Track editing
D EXEC button
Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]
key to execute the editing command.
Virtual track number
2 Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key or hold
down the [EDIT] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to select the desired editing
command.
The EDIT screen is divided into pages for each editing
command. For example, a screen like the one shown
below will appear if you choose the ERASE command.
If you selected PAD in step 3, a field allowing you to
select pad number will appear at the right. Move the
cursor to this field and select a number 1–4.
Pad number
NOTE
• For some commands, you will need to specify both source
and destination tracks.
128
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
What you can do using editing commands
■ Specify the editing region
■ Execute the command
For most commands, you will need to set the Start (the
beginning of the edited region) and End (the end of the
edited region) parameters to specify the region that will be
affected by the command.
When you have finished setting parameters, execute the
command.
5
7 Move the cursor to the EXEC button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
To specify the beginning of the region to be
edited, move the cursor to the desired digit
of the Start field, and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
The Start/End parameters are displayed at the right of
the TR field.
Start parameter
(beginning of the region to be edited)
8 Move the cursor to the OK button to exe-
cute the command, or move the cursor to
the CANCEL button to cancel without executing. Then press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
End parameter
(end of the region to be edited)
You can set the Start/End parameters in terms of the
counter display format (the value at the left) or in units
of measures/beats (the value at the right). Move the
cursor to the digit that you want to change, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the value.
• Even after you press the [ENTER] key to execute the command, you can press the [UNDO/REDO] key to return to the
state prior to executing the command. You can use this function to compare the original data with the results produced by
executing the command.
NOTE
• If as a result of executing a command, a track no longer contains any recorded data, the name of that track will change to
“-NO REC-”.
6 To specify the end of the region to be
edited, move the cursor to the desired digit
of the End field, and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial.
HINT
• If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and
press the [ENTER] key, the current counter location will be
input. Alternatively, you can recall a locate point or marker to
move to that location in the song, and then press the [ENTER]
key to input that location as the value of the Start or End
parameter.
Track editing
12
NOTE
• For some commands, you will also need to specify a location
in the editing-destination track. In the same way as described
above, move the cursor to the counter display format field or
the measure/beat field, and specify the location.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
129
List of editing commands
List of editing commands
This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen, and explains their
parameters.
■ Parameter list
ERASE
Erases the data in the specified region (between Start and
End) of the specified track(s).
1 23
Parameter
4
1 TR
5
● For an audio track
Start
1
2
End
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
ERASE
1
2
● For a pad track (loop)
Start
End
ERASE
12
● For a pad track (one shot)
Track editing
Start
End
ERASE
NOTE
• If you select the pad track of a pad that is set to one-shot mode, all
pad events whose attack falls within the Start/End region will be
erased.
130
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Range
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
7/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
PAD
A single pad track
ALL
Tracks 1–16 + Pad tracks 1–4
2 V.TR *1
1–8
Virtual track number
3 PAD *2
1–4
Pad number
4 Start
Specify a point
Beginning of the edited region
5 End
Specify a point
End of the edited region
*1. 2 V.TR can be selected only if TR=1–16, 1/2–15/16, or ST.
*2. 3 PAD can be selected only if TR=PAD.
List of editing commands
DELETE
INSERT
Deletes the data from the specified region of the specified
track(s).
This command is similar to ERASE, but differs in that the
data that follows the specified region will move forward to
fill the gap.
1 23
Inserts blank space into the specified region. Data following the location of the Start parameter will be moved
backward to make room.
1 23
4
4
5
5
● For an audio track
● For an audio track
Start
Start
1
2
3
4
1
End
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
4
5
INSERT
8
1
2
3
6
4
5
DELETE
Size
1
2
3
7
8
● For a pad track (loop)
● For a pad track (loop)
Start
Start
End
INSERT
DELETE
Size
● For a pad track (one shot)
End
DELETE
Start
12
Track editing
Start
● For a pad track (one shot)
INSERT
Size
NOTE
• If you select the pad track of a pad that is set to one-shot
mode, all pad events whose attack falls within the Start/End
region will be erased.
■ Parameter list
■ Parameter list
The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.
However instead of 5 End, use 5 Size to specify the
region that will be inserted.
The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
131
List of editing commands
● For a pad track (one shot)
COPY
From Start
Copies the specified region of data to the specified location of the specified track.
1 23
4
6
From End
From
PAD
To
PAD
To Start
COPY
From
PAD
To
PAD
8 9J
K
5
LM7
■ Parameter list
● For an audio track
Start
End
Parameter
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
To Start
From
Track
1
To
Track
A
2
B
3
4
COPY
4
5
5
6
6
F
1 From TR
7
G
8
H
● For a pad track (loop)
From Start
From End
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
PAD
A single pad track
ALL (OVER)
Tracks 1–16 + Pad tracks 1–4
(overwrite onto the copy-destination)
ALL (INS)
Tracks 1–16 + Pad tracks 1–4
(insert into the copy-destination)
2 From V.TR*1
1–8
Copy-source virtual track number
3 From PAD*2
1–4
Copy-source pad number
4 From Start
Specify a point Copy-source starting location
5 From End
Specify a point Copy-source ending location
To
PAD
COPY
Track editing
To
PAD
• If you set A From TR to other than ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will be overwritten, and the data that follows the copied
region will not be moved backward.
If you set A From TR to ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will
be moved backward by the size of the copied region. Note that this
may cause the bar lines specified by the tempo map to change
their location relative to the audio data.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Switch the measure lock function
for From Start/From End
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
8 To TR*4
From
PAD
NOTE
132
1–16
On/off (indisure Lock*3
cated by “lock”
7 End Measure icon)
Lock*3
To Start
Explanation
Content recorded in a sound clip
(the region specified by CLIP)
6 Start Mea-
From
PAD
12
Range
CLIP
PAD
A single pad track
9 To V.TR*1
1–8
Copy-destination virtual track
number
J To PAD*2
1–4
Copy-destination pad number
K To Start
Specify a point Copy-destination starting location
L To Times
1–99
Number of copies
Switch the grid function
M GRID*5
ON/OFF (indicated by highlighted GRID
text when on)
*1. 2 From V.TR and 9 To V.TR can be selected only if From TR=1–
16, 1/2–15/16, or ST.
*2. 3 From PAD and J To PAD can be selected only if TR=PAD.
List of editing commands
*3. Measure lock function (6 Start Measure Lock, 7 End Measure
Lock)
Measure Lock allows a measure/beat to be specified within a region
to be copied so that it aligns with the specified measure/beat in the
copy destination. For example, in a situation in which you have an
abstract or rubato segment before the in-tempo performance begins,
you can “Measure Lock” the beginning of the in-tempo segment so
that it is copied to the appropriate location in the destination.
To use the measure lock function,
move the cursor to the measure display field of From Start or From End,
specify the measure/beat location that
will be the reference point for the
matching, and press the [ENTER] key.
A “lock” icon will appear beside the value that you specified, and the
measure lock function will be turned on for From Start or From End.
(This can be turned on for either Start or End, not both.)
While the measure lock function is on, the value of that measure display format setting will be fixed, and cannot be modified. In this state
if you use the counter display format field to specify the From Start
and From End locations, and execute the copy, the location you
specified in the measure display format field will be aligned with the
copy-destination To Start setting.
● For an audio track
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
To Start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
B
4
5
6
F
G
H
● For a pad track (loop)
From Start
2
3
4
5
6
7
To
PAD
8
To Start
A
B
C
D
E
To Start
F
G
H
MOVE
From
PAD
COPY
From
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To
Track
A
4
5
6
E
F
G
H
To
PAD
● For a pad track (one shot)
To Start
From Start
*4. The possible choices for 8 To TR (copy-destination track) will
depend on your selection for 1 From TR (copy-source track).
If 1 From TR is a single audio track 1–16, you will be able to select
only a single audio track 1–16.
If 1 From TR is CLIP, ST, 1/2–15/16 (a pair of adjacent audio
tracks), you will be able to select only ST or 1/2–15/16 (a pair of
adjacent audio tracks).
If 1 From TR is PAD, you will be able to select only PAD.
If 1 From TR is ALL (OVER) or ALL (INS), you cannot select TO
TR.
*5. Grid function (M GRID)
When this function is on, the To Start location cannot be specified in
counter-display format; it can be specified only in measure/beat
units.
By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock
function, you can easily copy measure/beat-length segments of data
whose divisions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat.
From End
From
PAD
To
PAD
To Start
MOVE
From
PAD
12
Track editing
To
Track
From End
From
PAD
Measure Lock
Start
End
1
MOVE
From
Track
● When measure lock = on
From
Track
End
Start
To
PAD
■ Parameter list
MOVE
Moves the specified region of data to the specified location of the specified track. This is similar to COPY, but
differs in that the move-source data will be deleted.
1 23
8 9J
4
K
5
The parameters are the same as for the COPY command.
However, you cannot select CLIP for 1 From TR. Also,
there is no L To Times setting.
6
M
7
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
133
List of editing commands
EXCHANGE
TIME COMP/EXP
(Time Compression/Expansion)
Exchanges data between the specified tracks.
1 2
3
Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio
track, without changing the pitch.
1 2
4 5
6
● For an audio track
From
Track
To
Track
5
1
A
B
C
2
D
3
E
4
5
6
A
B
C
To
Track
D
1
E
2
F
From Start
1
2
From End
3
4
A
B
C
D
TIME
COMP/EXP
F
3
6
● If you set Ratio = 50%
EXCHANGE
From
Track
3 4
4
5
1
6
A
2 3 4
B
C
D
B
C
D
C
D
To END
■ Parameter list
Parameter
1 From TR
2 From V.TR
3 Name
12
*1
4 To TR
Track editing
5 To V.TR
6 Name
● If you set Ratio = 200%
Range
From Start
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
1–8
Exchange-source virtual track
number
Up to eight
alphanumeric
characters
Exchange-source virtual track
name (display only)
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
1–8
Exchange-destination virtual
track number
Up to eight
alphanumeric
characters
Exchange-destination virtual
track name (display only)
*1. The items that you can select in 4 To TR (copy-destination track)
will depend on the 1 From TR (copy-source track) setting.
If 1 From TR is a single audio track 1–16, you can select only a single audio track 1–16.
If 1 From TR is ST or 1/2–15/16 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks),
you can select only 1/2–15/16 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks).
NOTE
1
2
From End
3
4
A
TIME
COMP/EXP
1
2
3
4
To END
■ Parameter list
Parameter
1 From TR
Range
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
2 From V.TR
1–8
Virtual track number
3 From Start
Specify a point Beginning of the edited region
4 From End
Specify a point End of the edited region
5 To End
Specify a point Specify the length to which the
selected region will be compressed or expanded
50–200%
6 To Ratio
• The track names will not be exchanged.
Specify the percentage by which
the selected region will be compressed or expanded
NOTE
• To End and To Ratio are linked, so that editing one field will cause
the other field to change.
• You cannot set To End or To Ratio to a value that would cause the
ratio to exceed 50–200 percent.
• From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec
apart. These cannot be set to a shorter interval.
134
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
List of editing commands
PITCH CHANGE
EXPORT
Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track,
without changing the length.
1 2
3 4
5
From Start
6
Writes the specified region of an audio track to a WAV
file.
Use this when you want to transfer audio data to your
computer so that you can edit the data using a waveform
editing program.
For details on the parameters and procedure for the Export
command, refer to “Exporting WAV files” (→ p. 136).
From End
MERGE
PITCH
CHANGE
From Start
From End
PITCH
CHANGE
Audio playback performance can be improved by using
this command to merge a number of separate regions (sections of audio data created in separate recording passes) in
a specified track into one continuous region.
The merge command creates a continuous region from the
beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the
track, and sections of the track that contained no regions
are replaced with audio silence.
1 2
■ Parameter list
1 From TR
Range
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
2 From V.TR
1–8
Virtual track number
3 From Start
Specify a point Beginning of the edited region
4 From End
Specify a point End of the edited region
5 Pitch
–12 to +12
semitones
Specify the amount of pitch
change in semitone units
–50 to +50
cents
Specify the amount of pitch
change in one-cent units (1/100th
of a semitone)
6 Fine
12
Track editing
Parameter
MERGE
■ Parameter list
Parameter
Range
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
1 From TR
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
2 From V.TR
1–8
Virtual track number
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
135
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
In this section we’ll discuss transferring (exporting) audio data from the AW1600 tracks to a computer in WAV file format, and transferring (importing) audio data in WAV file format from a computer or CD into the AW1600 audio tracks or pads. It is also possible to directly access the internal
hard disk from a computer and edit the audio data using appropriate audio editor software.
Importing and Exporting Audio
Data From and To a Computer
Computer WAV file operations can be carried out either
via an import/export folder, or by directly accessing the
audio track or pad data.
When transferring via an import/export folder, the files
must first be written to the folder named “Transport” provided specifically for import and export. The AW1600 can
then be connected to the computer via a USB cable, and
the Transport folder can be opened from the computer.
The required WAV files can then be copied from the
Transport folder to the computer, or WAV files to be used
in the AW1600 audio tracks or pads can be copied from
the computer to the folder from which they can be
imported to the appropriate locations.
To directly access audio track or pad data the AW1600
must be connected to the computer via a USB cable, after
which the WAV files can be directly accessed inside the
appropriate folders in the AW1600. You can use a waveform editor application running on your computer to
directly edit the AW1600 audio data. For operational
details see “Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer” on page 137, and refer to “Song Folder Organization” on page 144 for information on how the folders are
organized.
NOTE
• Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher operating
system is required for computer WAV file management with the
AW1600 (→ p. 137).
Exporting WAV files
The WAV files corresponding to the audio tracks you want
to transfer to a computer must first be exported to the
“Transport” folder on the internal hard disk drive. Once
these files have been transferred to the computer they can
be edited using appropriate waveform editing software, or
imported into a DAW application for further processing or
integration with other projects.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[EDIT] key.
The EDIT screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key or hold
down the [EDIT] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the EXPORT page.
This page shows the following information.
1 2
3 4
12
Track editing
WAV files via
USB cable
AW1600
5
Parameter
“Transport” folder
for WAV files
Quick Loop
Sampler
(sample data)
Audio tracks
Internal
hard disk
WAV files/
Audio CD
CD-RW drive
136
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Range
Explanation
1–16
A single audio track
1/2–15/16
A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered audio tracks
ST
The stereo track
1 From TR
1–16
The current track of tracks 1–16
2 From V.TR
1–8
Virtual track number
3 From Start
Specify a point Beginning of the audio track
region that will be written
4 From End
Specify a point End of the audio track region that
will be written
5 File Name*1
Up to eight
alphanumeric
characters
Displays the name of the file to
which the data will be written
*1. The name of the individual source track (or odd-numbered track in
the case of a pair) will be assigned by default.
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
3 Move the cursor to the From TR field, and
select the audio track that you want to
write.
If you select “1–16,” the current tracks of tracks 1–16
will be written as separate monaural WAV files.
If you select “1”–“16,” the single specified track will
be written as a monaural WAV file.
If you select “1/2”–“15/16” or ST, the specified pair of
tracks (or the STEREO track) will be written as a stereo WAV file.
4 If you selected 1–16, 1/2–15/16, or ST as the
source for exporting, move the cursor to
the From V.TR, From Start, and From End
fields, and specify the virtual track number
and region that will be exported.
NOTE
• Since the AW1600 does not have a concept of the real-world
date and time, dummy values will be written as the file creation date and time of the WAV files.
• Tracks that do not contain data in the specified region will not
be exported.
8 Connect to a computer using a USB cable,
and copy the WAV files that have been
exported to the Transport folder to the computer.
Transferring WAV Files To and
From a Computer
NOTE
• If you selected “1–16” as the export-source, the current tracks
for all sixteen tracks will be exported automatically. It is not
possible to specify the virtual track number for each.
5 When you have finished setting the parameters, move the cursor to the EXEC button
and press the [ENTER] key.
If select a source other than “1–16” the TITLE EDIT
popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a file
name.
Connect the AW1600 to the computer using a USB cable,
and copy the WAV files that have been exported to the
Transport folder to the computer, or copy files from the
computer to the Transport folder. It is also possible to
directly access and edit audio data using waveform editing
software, and backup complete songs to the computer.
1 Make sure that your computer meets the
following requirements.
• OS ........................ Windows XP Professional/Home
Edition SP1 or higher, or Mac
OSX 10.3 or higher.
• USB Interface...... USB 2.0
NOTE
• A USB 1.1 interface can also be used, but in that case file
transfer will occur at USB 1.1 speed.
6 Enter an appropriate file or folder name via
the TITLE EDIT popup window, as required.
For details on how to enter a name, refer to page 25.
NOTE
• Characters that can be used in folder names are: the letters of
the alphabet, numbers, “.”, “-“, and “_”. Characters that can e
used in file names are: the capital letters of the alphabet,
numbers, and “_”.
2 Make sure the POWER switch on the AW1600
is set to STANDBY, then connect the AW1600
to the computer via a USB cable.
3 Turn on the AW1600.
No driver installation is necessary for WAV file transfer. If it is the first time you have connected a USB
cable on a Windows machine, however, you may see a
message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver.
Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages
via the USB cable, install the USB MIDI driver as
described on page 209.
4 Repeatedly press the Work Navigate sec-
12
Track editing
If you select “1–16” as the source the TITLE EDIT
popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a
folder name. The WAV files (“TRACK_01.WAV” –
“TRACK_16.WAV”) will be stored in the new folder,
which will be created inside the “Transport” folder.
tion [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys
to access the USB page of the UTILITY
screen.
7 To execute the export, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Exporting will begin. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press
the [ENTER] key, the export operation will be cancelled. (However, it is not possible to abort the export
process once it has been started.)
NOTE
• Before turning the Storage mode on, make sure that no MIDI
data is being transferred via the USB connection from and to
your computer.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
137
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
5 Move the cursor to the CONNECT button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The USB file transfer mode (USB Storage mode) will
be engaged and the display shown below will appear.
Most of the AW1600 functions are temporarily off
while this mode is engaged.
6 Display the AW1600 internal hard disk on
the computer screen.
● In the case of Windows XP:
7 Open the appropriate drive/folder and copy
the required WAV files or directly edit the
WAV files using a waveform editor application.
To access the Transport folder open the “AW1600-2”
drive.
To directly access WAV files on the AW1600 open the
“Song1” folder on the “AW1600-1” drive and the
“Song2” folder on the “AW1600-2” drive. These folders contain folders bearing the names of the recorded
songs (extension .AWS), and those folders further contain folders labeled “Audio” that contain the actual
audio data. To backup a complete song to the computer simply copy the folder bearing the name of the
song you want to backup to the computer.
Refer to “Song Folder Organization” on page 144 for
information on how the folders are organized.
The two windows will appear.
HINT
• Verification and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried
out from the computer. From a Windows computer enter the
“chkdsk” command at the command prompt, or from a Macintosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid
function.
NOTE
• For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor
application cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV
file(s) to the “Transport” folder. WAV files imported or exported
via the “Transport” folder are automatically converted to 24-bit
format that can be edited using most waveform editor software.
• Do not change the names of any folders/files other than those
in the Transport folder. Any folder/file names that have been
added or changed outside the Transport folder from the computer will be automatically deleted. Be especially careful not
to change a song folder or song file name.
• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.
12
NOTE
• If the windows shown above do not appear, choose to display
the “AW1600-1” and “AW1600-2” drives from the Windows →
Start → My Computer menu.
Track editing
● In the case of Mac OS X:
The “AW1600-1” and “AW1600-2” drive icons will
appear on the desktop.
NOTE
• If the icons are not displayed properly, use the Disk Utility to
temporarily un-mount the appropriate volume, and then
mount it again.
8 Once the required WAV file transfer and/or
editing operations have been finished, be
sure the “unmount” the AW1600 hard disk
from your computer after closing all
AW1600 windows.
● In the case of Windows XP:
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware ” icon in the taskbar and remove the corresponding two “USB mass
storage devices”.
NOTE
• If an error message appears, execute “Safely Remove Hardware” one or two more times. You should then be able to
remove the device without seeing an error message.
● In the case of Mac OSX:
Drag the “AW1600-1” and “AW1600-2” icons from
the desktop to the trash.
138
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
9 In the AW1600 screen, move the cursor to
•
...........Indicates that a WAV file is selected.
the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]
key.
•
...........Indicates that a folder in the same level is
selected.
A popup window confirming whether the AW1600 has
been safely removed from the computer will appear.
•
...........Indicates that the folder in the next higher
level is selected.
B Mono/stereo
Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing
is monaural (M) or stereo (S). This field is for display
only, and cannot be changed.
10 To return to the normal mode move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
D LISTEN button
You can move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected
WAV file.
Importing WAV Files
This procedure allows you to import WAV files transferred
from a computer to the “Transport” folder to be imported
into specified audio tracks. This is useful when importing
WAV files you have edited on your computer into the
AW1600.
NOTE
• For information on importing WAV file data into the AW1600 pads,
refer to “Importing From a Computer To the Pads” on page 120.
1 Begin by transferring the required WAV files
from your computer to the AW1600 “Transport” folder (→ p. 137).
3
G To Start
Specifies the starting location (in counter-display format) of the import-destination to which the WAV file
will be imported.
NOTE
]
This page shows the following information.
1
F To V.TR
Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the
WAV file will be imported.
4
3 Move the cursor to the From WAVE file field,
and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
WAV file that you want to import.
The WAV files stored in the “Transport” folder will be
displayed (→ p. 144).
NOTE
• The maximum number of WAV files that can be displayed is
100.
4 Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start fields to
56
7
1 From WAVE File
Selects the WAV file that will be imported.
If the media contains folders (directories), move to the
folder that contains the WAV file you want to import,
and then specify the desired WAV file.
The icons shown here have the following meaning.
12
Track editing
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[
keys to access the TRACK screen WAV
IMPORT page.
E To TR
Selects the track number into which the WAV file will
be imported.
• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz, mono or stereo WAV files can
be imported. Also, WAV files having a different bit depth from
the song cannot be imported.
2 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
2
C Size
Indicates the playback length (in msec) of the WAV
file selected for importing. This field is for display
only, and cannot be changed.
specify the track number, virtual track number, and starting location into which the
WAV file will be imported.
NOTE
• If the import-destination already contains data, it will be overwritten. Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important
data.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
139
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
5 When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the EXEC button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
3 Carefully read “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 6),
and if you accept these terms, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The button display will change from OFF to ON, and
digital recording and importing from a CD will be
enabled.
NOTE
6 To execute the import operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, importing will be cancelled.
HINT
• Even after you press the [ENTER] key, you can press the
[UNDO/REDO] key to return to the state prior to importing, as
long as you have not executed any editing or recording operation since the import.
NOTE
• You cannot execute the Import operation while the AW1600 is
running.
• The DIGITAL REC button will return to the OFF setting each
time you turn on the power.
4 Insert a CD into the CD-RW drive.
You can import data from the following types of
media.
● Audio data (CD-DA)
• Audio CD
• CD-Extra (only the first session of CD-DA)
• Mixed Mode CD (only CD-DA data of the second
and later tracks)
● WAV files
• ISO9660 Level 1 format CD-ROM, CD-R,
CD-RW*
• Mixed Mode CD
* The directory name and file name cannot use characters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters
and the “_” (underscore) character.
Importing from the CD-RW drive
12
5 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
CD audio data (CD-DA) or a WAV file from a CD-ROM
or CD-R can be imported (loaded) into an AW1600 audio
track. After being imported, this data can be handled in the
same way as any recorded audio track.
press the [TRACK] key or hold down the
[TRACK] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the CD IMPORT page of the
TRACK screen.
1
The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center
of the display.
If you want to import from an audio CD,
repeatedly press the Work Navigate section
[UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY]
key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to
access the D.IN • HDD page of the UTILITY
screen.
Track editing
Immediately after the AW1600 is powered-on, it will
be set to prohibit digital recording from an external
source or importing from a CD. Before you can
import, you will need to disable this prohibition in the
D.IN • HDD page of the UTILITY screen.
6 Press the [ENTER] key.
The display will indicate “Read CD Info...,” and information will be read from the CD inserted in the CDRW drive.
Depending on the import-source data, the screen will
change as follows.
● When importing from audio CD/CD-Extra
2 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC button,
1
2
and press the [ENTER] key.
A message will ask you to confirm that you will
observe the applicable copyright laws.
5 6
140
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
7
3
4
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
1 From CD TRACK
Specifies the audio track number (01–99) of the
import-source CD.
B From Start
Specifies the beginning of the data that will be
imported, in minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).
C From End
Specifies the end of the data that will be imported, in
minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).
HINT
• The “frames” referred to here are the minimum time-axis units
used in CD-DA. Do not confuse them with the frames used in
MTC or SMPTE.
B Mono/stereo
Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing
is monaural (M) or stereo (S). This field is for display
only, and cannot be changed.
C Size
Indicates the playback length (in msec) of the WAV
file selected for importing. This field is for display
only, and cannot be changed.
D LISTEN/ENTER/UP button
The name and function of the button displayed here
will change depending on the item that is selected by
the From WAVE file parameter.
● If a WAV file (
) is selected
The LISTEN button will be displayed, allowing you
to hear the WAV file repeatedly.
D LISTEN button
You can move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected
region of the CD-DA.
● If a folder in the same level (
E To TR
Selects the track number into which the data will be
imported. If the import-source is an audio CD or a stereo WAV file, you will only be able to select a pair of
tracks 1/2–15/16.
● If the next higher folder (
F To V.TR
Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the
data will be imported.
G To Start
Specifies the starting location (in counter-display format) of the import-destination to which the data will
be imported.
● When importing a WAV file
1
) is selected
The UP button will be displayed, allowing you to
move to the next higher folder.
E To TR
F To V.TR
G To Start
These fields are the same as when you are importing
from audio CD or CD-Extra.
NOTE
• If a Mixed Mode CD is inserted in the CD-RW drive, a popup
window will appear, allowing you to select AUDIO (CD-DA) or
WAVE (WAV files) to import. Move the cursor to the button for
the data that you want to import, and press the [ENTER] key.
• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz, mono or stereo WAV files can
be imported.
3
4
• When the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra disc and
the song is 24-bit, the audio data will be automatically converted to 24-bit format during the import operation.
• When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press
the [ENTER] key, there will be a slight time lag while the data
is read from the CD before you hear it.
7 If you are importing a WAV file, move the
5
6
7
1 From WAVE file
Selects the WAV file that will be imported.
If the media contains folders (directories), move to the
folder that contains the WAV file you want to import,
and then specify the desired WAV file.
The icons shown here have the following meaning.
•
.......... Indicates that a WAV file is selected.
•
.......... Indicates that a folder in the same level is
selected.
•
.......... Indicates that the folder in the next higher
level is selected.
cursor to the From WAVE file field, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the WAV file
that you want to import.
12
Track editing
2
) is selected
The ENTER button will be displayed, allowing you
to move into that folder.
To move to a lower level, display the
icon in this
field, then move the cursor to the ENTER button in the
screen and press the [ENTER] key.
To move to the next higher level, display the
icon
in this area, then move the cursor to the UP button and
press the [ENTER] key.
8 If you are importing from audio CD or CDExtra, use the From Start and From End
fields to specify the region that will be
imported.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
141
Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files
9 Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start fields to
specify the track number, virtual track number, and starting location into which the
data will be imported.
10 When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the EXEC button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
11 To execute the import operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, importing will be cancelled.
HINT
• Even after you press the [ENTER] key, you can press the
[UNDO/REDO] key to return to the state prior to importing, as
long as you have not executed any editing or recording operation since the import.
NOTE
• You cannot execute the Import operation while the AW1600 is
running.
12
Track editing
142
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 13
Song management
This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as
copying, deleting, backing up, and restoring songs.
About songs
■ Song Organization
■ Song Bit Depth
On the AW1600, your recorded compositions are managed
in units called “songs.” When you save a song on the hard
disk, the audio data, the sample data used by the quick
loop sampler, scene memories, and the data for each
library are all stored together. By loading a saved song,
you can return it to the original condition at any time.
You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as
its capacity allows. Songs stored on hard disk are divided
into a song file containing all the basic setup information
for the song, and WAV files containing the audio data.
The AW1600 allows the bit depth of individual songs to be
set to either 16 or 24 bits. 24-bit songs are capable of providing higher audio quality than 16-bit songs, but the following limitations on the number of simultaneous record/
playback tracks apply.
Song Bit Depth
16 bits
24 bits
Max. Simultaneous
Record Tracks
Max. Simultaneous
Play Tracks
8
8
:
:
1
15
0*
16*
8
0
:
:
1
7
0*
8*
* For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the
number of simultaneous playback tracks is 16 for 16-bit songs, or 8 for
24-bit songs.
Only 24-bit audio data can be used in 24-bit songs. 16-bit
WAV files cannot be imported from a computer or CDRW drive. Audio data imported from audio CDs, however,
will be automatically converted to 24-bit format. In the
same way, only 16-bit audio data can be used in 16-bit
songs.
HINT
13
Song management
• The bit depth of a song can be checked via the SONG screen
LIST page.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
143
About songs
■ Song Folder Organization
Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer
connected via USB in the same way as the hierarchical files and folders on the
computer’s hard disk. The folders are organized as follows:
“AW1600-1” Drive
Song1
“AW1600-2” Drive
001 Song Name.AWS
001 Song Name.AWS
Song2
002 Song Name.AWS
0.WAV
004 Song Name.AWS
Audio
1.WAV
001 Library Name.AWL 001 Library Name.AWL
Lib
2.WAV
0L.WAV
3.WAV
Audio
0R.WAV
Render
1L.WAV
002 Library Name.AWL
1R.WAV
003 Library Name.AWL
003 Song Name.AWS
2L.WAV
005 Song Name.AWS
Transport
2R.WAV
File Name1.WAV
AW1600_SYS.BIN
File Name2.WAV
■ “Song1” Folder
Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.
■ Individual Song Folders
Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song’s name
(extension .AWS).
● Song Files
The following song settings are stored in a file bearing
the name of the song (extension .AWS):
13
Song management
•
•
•
•
•
•
Recorder section settings (SONG screen, TRACK screen).
Mixer section settings (channels, effects).
Quick loop sampler settings.
Library settings (excluding the sample library).
REMOTE screen settings.
Pad track event data.
■ “Audio” Folder
The following song audio data is saved in WAV file format. File names are automatically created in the order of
recording, as in: “0.WAV”, “1.WAV”, “2.WAV”, etc. 24-bit
song data is saved as 32-bit WAV files.
•
•
•
•
16 + 2 (stereo track) audio x 8 virtual tracks.
Quick loop sampler sample data.
Sound clip audio data.
Audio data for undo and redo operations.
● System File (AW1600_SYS.BIN)
Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data management.
144
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
■ “Song2” Folder
Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.
■ “Lib” Folder
Sample library data is stored in the “Lib” folder.
■ Individual Sample Library Folders
Sample library data is stored in a folder bearing the name
of the sample library (extension .AWL).
● Sample Library Files
Sample library settings are stored in a file bearing the
name of the sample library (extension .AWL).
■ “Audio” Folder
Sample library samples are stored as WAV files. The
pads use stereo samples which are stored as separate
left- and right-channel mono files: “*L.WAV”, “*R.WAV”.
For 24-bit songs the samples are saved as 32-bit WAV
files.
■ “Transport” Folder
This folder is used to store WAV files for import and export.
Data is stored as 16-bit or 24-bit WAV files.
About songs • Editing the song name
The following operations are possible by directly accessing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer. For
detailed operating procedures refer to “Exporting WAV
files and importing audio CD or WAV files” on page 136.
• Specified audio data on the internal hard disk can be
directly edited from a computer using an appropriate
waveform editor application. The song will become
unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or
quantization of the audio data, but you can change the
length of the waveforms without problems.
• WAV files transferred from a computer to the “Transport”
folder can be imported to the AW1600 audio tracks or
pads as required, and specified regions of audio data
can be exported to the computer as WAV files which can
then be imported into computer-based DAW applications.
• The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual
songs can be backed up to the computer.
NOTE
• For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is
stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor application
cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV file(s) to the “Transport” folder. WAV files imported or exported via the “Transport”
folder are automatically converted to 24-bit format that can be
edited using most waveform editor software.
• Song data is created in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder. You
may have to check both of these folders to locate a specific song.
• To restore the sample library data to it’s initial factory state, restore
the sample library data from the supplied CD-ROM.
• If you initialize the AW1600 hard disk from your computer it will
become unreadable by the AW1600. Always use the UTILITY
screen D.IN • HDD page to initialize the AW1600 hard disk.
• The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo operations that is not normally used. The undo/redo data can be deleted
by performing an Optimize operation (→ p. 148).
Editing the song name
Here’s how to edit the song name that is assigned when you create a new song.
NOTE
• This setting applies only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song
whose name you want to edit.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[SONG] key.
The SONG screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [SONG] key or hold
3 To edit the song name, move the cursor to
the NAME button and press the [ENTER]
key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing
you to edit the song name.
down the [SONG] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the SETUP page.
4 Input the new name. Then move the cursor
to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
The new name will be applied, and the popup window
will close. (For details on inputting a name → p. 25)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Song management
13
145
Editing various settings for the song
Editing various settings for the song
Here’s how to make various settings for a song, such as switching protect on/off and selecting
the counter display format and time code format.
NOTE
• These settings apply only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song whose settings you want to edit.
• The counter display mode (with the exception of REMAIN) and timecode frame
rate changes will be saved with the song data when the song is saved.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[SONG] key.
The SONG screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [SONG] key or hold
down the [SONG] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the SETUP page.
1
3
2
This page contains the following items.
In the COUNTER DISPLAY area, use the following
buttons to select the display format for the counter that
is shown in the center of the top line in the display.
• ABS (absolute time)
............ Display the current location in hours/
minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the
absolute time zero location as 0.
• REL (relative time)
............ Display the current location in hours/
minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the
relative time zero location as 0.
• SEC .......... Display the current location in hours/
minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the
Start point as 0.
• T.C ............ Display the current location in time code
(hours/minutes/seconds/frames), with
the Start point as 0.
• REMAIN ... When this button is on, the remaining
recordable time with the selected number of recording tracks will be displayed
instead of the current location.
1 PROTECT button
Switches protect on/off.
B COUNTER DISPLAY
Selects the display format for the counter that appears
in the center of the top line in the display.
C TIME CODE BASE
Selects the format (the number of frames per second)
for the time code used by the AW1600.
13
3 To switch the protect setting on/off, move
the cursor to the PROTECT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Song management
Protect is a setting that prohibits any change to the
song data. If protect is turned on, the PROTECT button will be highlighted, and it will not be possible to
perform additional recording or editing, or to erase the
song.
HINT
• We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs.
• Even if protect is on, you can still copy the song (→ p. 147)
and adjust the mixer settings.
4 To change the counter display format, move
the cursor to one of the buttons in the
COUNTER DISPLAY area and press the
[ENTER] key.
146
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
• The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the
current location in measure/beat units, relative to the Start
point.
• The measure/beat display will depend on the settings in the
TEMPO page of the SONG screen. For details, refer to “Creating a tempo map” (→ p. 149).
5 To change the time code frame rate, move
the cursor to one of the buttons in the TIME
CODE BASE area, and press the [ENTER]
key.
In the TIME CODE BASE area you can choose one of
the following frame rates to specify the minimum unit
of time code.
• 24 ............ 24 frames/second
• 25 ............ 25 frames/second
• 30 ............ 30 frames/second (30 non-drop frame)
• 30D........... 29.97 frames/second (30 drop-frame)
HINT
• This setting affects both the counter time code display and the
MTC that the AW1600 transmits and receives. If the AW1600
is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device, you
must set both devices to the same frame rate.
NOTE
• With the exception of COUNTER DISPLAY, the settings in the
SETUP page of the SONG screen cannot be changed while
the AW1600 is running.
Copying or deleting a song
Copying or deleting a song
Here’s how to copy or delete a song in the hard disk.
NOTE
• You cannot copy or delete a song while the AW1600 is running.
• A deleted song will be lost forever. Use great caution when deleting a song.
• You cannot delete a song for which protect is on, or delete the current song (the highlighted song). If you
want to delete such a song, you must first turn off the protect setting or switch the current song.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[SONG] key.
The SONG screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [SONG] key or hold
5 To execute the copy, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will prompt you to enter new song
name.
down the [SONG] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the LIST page.
6 Enter a new song title, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
1 2
This page contains the following items.
The song you selected in step 3 will be copied, and
you will return to step 2. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the copy
operation will be cancelled.
1 DELETE button
Displays a popup window that allows you to delete a
song.
B COPY button
Displays a popup window that allows you to copy a
song.
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
■ To delete a song
4 Following step 3, move the cursor to the
DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the delete
operation.
that you want to copy or delete.
The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame indicates
the selected song.
4 Move the cursor to the COPY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the copy
operation.
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The song you selected in step 3 will be deleted, and
you will return to step 2. If you move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the
delete operation will be cancelled.
NOTE
• If you have selected the current song as the song to be
deleted, a popup window will warn you that it is not possible to
delete the current song.
13
Song management
■ To copy a song
5 To delete the song, move the cursor to the
HINT
• If you have selected the current song as the song to be copied, a popup window will ask you whether you want to save
the current song. Move the cursor to either the YES button (if
you want to save) or the NO button (if you don’t want to save),
and then press the [ENTER] key.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
147
Optimizing a song
Optimizing a song
“Optimize” is an operation that deletes the undo/redo audio data and the unused sample data
maintained within the song. When you have finished recording and editing a song, you can execute the Optimize operation on that song to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk.
NOTE
• The deleted undo/redo audio data will be lost forever. Use this operation with caution.
1 In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [SONG] key or hold down the
[SONG] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]
keys to access the LIST page of the SONG
screen.
2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
that you want to optimize.
The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the
selected song.
3 Move the cursor to the OPTIMZ button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the optimize
operation.
HINT
13
• You may select the current song to be optimized. In this case,
a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the
current song. Move the cursor to the OK button (if you want to
save) or the CANCEL button (if you don’t want to save), and
press the [ENTER] key.
Song management
148
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
4 To execute the optimize operation, move
the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The undo/redo audio data and unused sample data of
the song you selected in step 2 will be deleted, and you
will return to step 1. If you decide not to execute the
optimize operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL
button and press the [ENTER] key.
Creating a tempo map
Creating a tempo map
The “tempo map” contains data to change the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the
song or at any measure or beat within the song. The measure/beat display counter, the Quick
Loop Sampler, the internal metronome, and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW1600
are all based on this tempo map.
The AW1600’s tempo map can also record data to switch scenes (→ p. 73) or Pad sample banks
(→ p. 111). You can use this to switch scenes as the song progresses, or to switch the sounds
that are played by the Quick Loop Sampler.
HINT
• The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map.
• The data (“tempo map events”) recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the
location at which the next event of the same type has been input.
NOTE
• If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track, the measure/beat counter
display values will be affected. For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchronize with an external MIDI device, or if you want to control the song in measure units, you
should create the tempo map before you record. If you modify the tempo map after a
track has already been recorded, a popup window will ask you for confirmation.
■ Editing a tempo map event
This page contains the following items.
When you create a new song, the following tempo map
event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map (the
first beat of the first measure).
1 List
• Time signature: 4/4
• Tempo: 120.0
• Pad sample bank: Pad 1=A, Pad 2=A,
Pad 3=A, Pad 4=A
• Scene number: not assigned
B LOCATE button
By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the
[ENTER] key, you can move the song to the location
of the tempo map event currently selected in the list.
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
[SONG] key.
The SONG screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [SONG] key or hold
down the [SONG] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the TEMPO page.
In this page you can input or edit tempo map events
for the current song.
8
9
J
K
C DELETE button
To delete the tempo map event currently selected in
the list, move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key.
D INSERT button
To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo
map event currently selected in the list, move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.
E NEW button
To create an event at the beginning of the measure following the last step, move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key.
F STEP
Indicates the step number of the tempo map event.
G MEAS
Indicates the location (measure/beat) at which the
tempo map event is input.
34 5
1
13
Song management
Here’s how to edit the values of this tempo map event.
2 67
This area lists the tempo map events that have been
input for the current song. The line enclosed by a dotted frame is the currently selected tempo map event.
H
I
J
K
METER
TEMPO
PAD BANK 1–4
SCENE
These fields show the time signature, tempo, pad sample bank, and scene number of each tempo map event.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
149
Creating a tempo map
3 Move the cursor to the item that you want to
edit, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit
the value.
If the METER, TEMPO, PAD BANK 1–4, or SCENE
value is “–”, move the cursor to the item and press the
[ENTER] key before you edit the value.
NOTE
• The METER, TEMPO, and PAD BANK 1–4 at the beginning of
the song cannot be set to “–”.
• You cannot change the METER value to other than “–” for a
step that is not located at beat 1.
■ Adding a tempo map event
1 Access the TEMPO page, move the cursor
to the NEW button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
A blank tempo map event will be created after the last
step that is currently input.
HINT
• If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button, a
blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently
selected step. However, you cannot insert an event before the
tempo map event at the beginning of the song (i.e., the tempo
map event that is input when you create the song).
The range for each item is as follows.
Event
METER
TEMPO
Range
1/4 to 8/4, –
30.0 to 250.0, – Specifies the tempo of the song.
You can set the tempo in units of
0.1 over a range of 30.0–250.0
BPM.
PAD
A to D, –
BANK 1–4
SCENE
Content
Specifies the time signature of the
song.
00 to 96, –
Selects the sample bank that will
be used for each pad 1–4.
Switches the scene number used
by the song.
HINT
2 Make sure that the cursor is outside the list,
and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a
tempo map event that you created.
When the cursor is located outside the list, you can
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the contents of the
list.
3 Move the cursor to the MEAS field of the
event that is selected in the list, and turn
the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the location
of the event.
• You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the beginning of the song, or change its location. If you want to change
the tempo or time signature during the song, you can insert a
new event.
You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in
units of measures or beats. However, you cannot move
an event past the preceding or following event.
• If you set METER, TEMPO, PAD BANK 1–4, or SCENE to a
value of “–”, that event will be disabled. For example if you
want to specify only the time signature and tempo, you should
set the pad bank and scene to “–”.
4 Move the cursor to the item that you want to
edit, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust
the value.
If necessary, you can play back the song to check that
the tempo map event works as you expect.
5 In the same way, use the NEW or INSERT
button to add new events, and set their
parameters.
13
■ Deleting a tempo map event
Song management
Here’s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo
map. (However, you cannot delete the event that is located
at the beginning of the song.)
1 Access the TEMPO page, and scroll the list
to select the tempo map event that you
want to delete.
2 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The selected event will be deleted.
150
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Importing data from an existing song
Importing data from an existing song
Here’s how selected items of data such as scenes, libraries, or individual tracks of audio data
from a song saved on the hard disk can be imported into the current song.
NOTE
• When you execute this import operation, the previous data (for that item) in the current
song will be lost. Use this procedure with caution.
■ Selecting the song from
which you will import data
■ Importing library/
scene/tempo map data
1 In the Work Navigate section, press the
4 Move the cursor to either the LIBRARY,
[SONG] key.
The SONG screen will appear.
2 Repeatedly press the [SONG] key or hold
SCENE, or TEMPO MAP button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the import
operation.
down the [SONG] key and use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to access the IMPORT page.
1
2
5 To execute the import, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Importing will begin. When the data has been
imported, you will return to the screen of step 2.
4
This page contains the following items.
■ Importing a specific track
1 LIBRARY button
4 Move the cursor to the TRACK button and
Imports all libraries into the current song.
B SCENE button
Imports all scenes into the current song.
press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to select the track to be
imported.
C TRACK button
Imports the audio data of a single track into the current
song.
1
13
D TEMPO MAP button
Imports the tempo map into the current song.
2
3
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
from which you want to import data.
The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you
have selected as the import-source.
1 TRACK
Specify the import-source track number.
NOTE
• The songs whose bit depth differs from the current song cannot be imported.
B V.TR
Specify the import-source virtual track number.
Song management
3
C NAME
Displays the name of the currently selected virtual
track.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
151
Importing data from an existing song • Backing up songs and sample libraries
5 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and
1 TRACK
V.TR field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
specify the track number and virtual track
number.
The name of the selected import-source track will be
displayed in the NAME field.
NOTE
• You can import only one track at a time.
Specify the import-destination track number.
B V.TR
Specify the import-destination virtual track number.
C NAME
Displays the name of the virtual track that you selected
as the import-destination.
NOTE
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to select the import-destination track.
1
• When ST (stereo track) is selected as the import source, the
destination track will also be ST (stereo track).
7 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and
V.TR field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
specify the track number and virtual track
number for the import-destination.
8 To execute the import, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
2
3
Importing will begin. When the track has been
imported, you will return to the state of step 2.
Backing up songs and sample libraries
Here’s how you can back up songs or sample libraries from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW
media.
NOTE
• To backup AW1600 data to a computer, connect the AW1600 to the computer via a USB cable
and copy the song folders directly from the internal AW1600 hard disk to the computer. For
detailed operation refer to “Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer” on page 137.
1 Insert CD-R/RW media into the CD-RW
This page contains the following items.
drive.
13
1 List
2 In the Work Navigate section, press the [CD]
key.
The CD screen will appear.
Song management
3 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [
keys to access the BACKUP page.
]/[
]
In this page you can back up songs or sample libraries
from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW media.
3
2
1
This area lists the songs or sample libraries that are
saved on the hard disk. The symbols at the right of the
list indicate whether an item of data has been selected
(●) or disabled ( ) for backup.
B PAD button
When this button is off, the list will show the songs
that are saved on the hard disk. When this button is on,
the list will show the sample libraries that are saved on
the hard disk.
C ALL button
If you turn this button on and then turn the ENABLE/
DISABLE button on, all data displayed in the list will
be selected for backup.
D ENABLE/DISABLE button
Selects whether an item of data will be selected for
backup (ENABLE) or not selected (DISABLE).
5 6
152
4
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Backing up songs and sample libraries
E AS AW2816 button
Backs up the audio tracks within a song in the format
of an AW2816 backup file.
Select this format when restoring data on a Yamaha
AW-series Audio Workstation other than the AW1600
(AW4416, AW2816, AW2400, AW16G). This format
can only be used with 16-bit songs.
If you turn this button on, you will be able to back up
only one song at a time.
F EXECUTE button
Executes the backup operation for the selected song(s)
or sample library(ies).
4 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song
or sample library data that you want to back
up. Then move the cursor to the ENABLE/
DISABLE button and press the [ENTER]
key.
The symbol for the selected data will change to the ●
symbol, indicating that this data has been selected for
backup. You can repeat this step to select multiple
items of data for backup.
If you turn on the ALL button and then move the cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE button and press the
[ENTER] key, you can select all data in the list in one
step.
HINT
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
Writing to the CD-R/RW media will begin. If you
decide to cancel the backup operation, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
While the backup operation is being executed, a popup
window will indicate the progress. When the backup
has been completed, you will return to step 3.
If the backup data does not fit on a single volume of
media, a message of “Number Ejected Media, Insert
Blank Media.” will appear, and the media will be
ejected. Insert a new volume of media. Then move the
cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting
data.
• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 button turned off, system data (the settings you make in the
UTILITY screen) will be backed up on the media together with
the selected data.
• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 button turned on, data other than audio tracks will not be backed
up. All virtual tracks for tracks 1–16 will be backed up. For the
stereo track, only the current track will be backed up. 24-bit
songs are not compatible.
• When you restore data that was backed up to more than one
volume of media, you must insert the media in the order in
which it was backed up. Be sure to make a note of the backup
sequence on the label surface of each CD-R/RW media.
• If you turn on the NAME or OLD button, the data in the list will
be sorted alphabetically or by the order in which it was saved.
5 To execute the backup, move the cursor to
the EXECUTE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
13
NOTE
Song management
• If previously-recorded CD-RW media is inserted in the CDRW drive, a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the
media first. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key, and the media will be erased.
• If a CD-ROM or previously-recorded CD-R media is inserted
in the CD-RW drive, a popup window with a message of
“Change Media, Please” will appear, and the media will be
ejected. Remove the media, and replace it with writable
media.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
153
Restoring songs or sample libraries
Restoring songs or sample libraries
Here’s how data that you backed up to CD-R/RW media can be restored to the hard disk of the
AW1600.
1 Insert the CD-R/RW media containing the
backup data into the CD-RW drive.
If the backup data occupies more than one volume of
media, insert the first volume.
2 In the Work Navigate section, press the [CD]
key.
The CD screen will appear.
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [
keys to access the RESTORE page.
]/[
]
In this page, data that you backed up to CD-R/RW
media can be restored to the internal hard disk.
4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW
media. When the information has been read, a display
like the following will appear.
2
F EXECUTE button
Executes the restore operation
NOTE
• You cannot operate the items in the RESTORE page until the
inserted CD-R/RW media has been read.
3 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
3
E SYSTEM button
Selects the system data (AW1600 settings you make in
the UTILITY screen) for restoring.
1
5 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the data
that you want to restore. Then move the
cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The symbol at the right will change to the ● symbol,
indicating that this data has been selected for restoring.
If you turn on the ALL button and then move the cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE button and press the
[ENTER] key, all data shown in the list will be
selected in one step.
NOTE
• The maximum number of songs or sample libraries that can
be displayed is 100.
6 If you want to restore the system data,
move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and
press the [ENTER] key.
6
54
1 List
13
This area lists the data that has been backed up on the
CD-R/RW media. The symbols at the right of the list
indicate whether an item of data has been selected (●)
or disabled ( ) for restore.
Song management
B PAD button
When this button is off, the list will show the songs
that were backed up on the CD-R/RW media. When
this button is on, the list will show the sample libraries
that were backed up on the CD-R/RW media.
C ALL button
You can use this button to select all the data that
appears in the list. If you turn this button on and then
turn the ENABLE/DISABLE button on, all data displayed in the list will be selected for restore.
D ENABLE/DISABLE button
Selects whether an item of data will be selected for
restore (ENABLE) or not selected (DISABLE).
154
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
The button will be turned on, and the system data will
be selected for restoring.
7 To execute the restore operation, move the
cursor to the EXECUTE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation.
Restoring songs or sample libraries • Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations
8 Move the cursor to the OK button if you
want to execute the restore operation (or to
the CANCEL button if you decide not to
restore), and press the [ENTER] key.
The current song will be saved automatically, and the
restore operation will begin.
A popup window will indicate the progress of the
restore operation. When the operation is finished, you
will return to step 3.
If the backup occupied more than one volume of CDR/RW media, a message of “Exchange Next Media
#XXX” (where XXX is a number) will be displayed
during the restore process. Exchange the CD-R/RW
media for the media of the corresponding number.
Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
NOTE
• When a song or sample library with the same name already
exists, the name of the restored song or sample library will
automatically be changed. For example, if “001_Song”
already exists, the song name will be altered as in:
“001_Song0”, “001_Song1” … etc.
Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations
You can back up an AW1600 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW-series
(AW4416/AW2816/AW2400/AW16G). Conversely, a song that was backed up by the other AWseries can be restored into the AW1600.
NOTE
• Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW-series. Mix
parameters, libraries, and system data cannot be backed-up/restored in this way.
If you turn on the AS AW2816 button in the BACKUP
page of the CD screen, the data will be saved in the
AW2816 backup file format.
An AW2816 backup file can be restored into the other
AW-series (version 2.0 or later for AW4416).
For the procedure, refer to “Backing up songs and sample
libraries,” earlier in this manual.
NOTE
• Backup in the AW2816 backup file format is limited to one song at
a time.
• When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup file format,
data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up. All virtual
tracks of tracks 1–16 will be backed up. For the stereo track, only
the current track will be backed up. 24-bit songs are not compatible.
• Depending on the data size, some songs can’t be saved as
AW2816 backup files. If this problem occurs use the Optimize
function to reduce the data size.
■ Restoring the other AW-series songs
1 Insert CD-R/RW media containing the other
AW-series song backup into the AW1600.
2 In the Work Navigate section, press the [CD]
key.
The CD screen will appear.
3 Repeatedly press the [CD] key or hold down
the [CD] key and use the CURSOR [
keys to access the RESTORE page.
]/[
]
4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Data will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW media.
When the data has been read, a screen like the following will appear.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
13
Song management
■ Backing up an AW1600 song in a format
compatible with the other AW-series
155
Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations
5 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a song
that you want to restore.
6 Move the cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE
button and press the [ENTER] key.
The symbol at the right of the data will change to ●,
and the data will be selected for restoring.
NOTE
• The list will show all the songs that were backed up to CD-R/
RW media, but you can execute the restore operation only for
44.1 kHz/16-bit songs.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to select all of the
other AW-series songs that you want to
restore.
8 To execute the restore operation, move the
cursor to the EXECUTE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The restore operation will begin. While the song data
is being loaded, a popup window will indicate the
progress.
NOTE
• When a song with the same name already exists, the name of
the restored song will automatically be changed. For example, if “001_Song” already exists, the song name will be
altered as in: “001_Song0”, “001_Song1” … etc.
13
Song management
156
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 14
MIDI and utility functions
This chapter explains basic MIDI-related settings, functions that use MIDI,
and various utility functions.
What you can do using MIDI
On the AW1600, you can use MIDI to do the following things.
● Synchronize operation with an external
device
● Automate scene changes and mix parameter operations
You can synchronize an AW1600 song with the playback
of an external device (such as a MIDI sequencer) by
exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC
(MIDI Time Code) or MIDI Clock with the external
device.
When you recall a scene on the AW1600 or operate its mix
parameters, the corresponding messages (program
changes or control changes) can be transmitted to an
external device.
If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is
synchronized to the AW1600 song, these scene recall
operations or realtime mix parameter operations can be
reproduced whenever you want.
● Remote control of the transport
You can transmit MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI
device to the AW1600 to remotely control the AW1600’s
transport. Conversely, you can also transmit MMC from
the AW1600 to an external device to control its transport.
• Example of recording/playing scene selections and
mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer
(computer)
• Example of using MTC/MMC to synchronize the
operation of the AW1600 and a MIDI sequencer
(computer)
MIDI OUT/
THRU connector
MIDI IN
connector
MTC
MMC
MIDI OUT/
THRU connector
Control changes
Program changes
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
connector
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Control changes
Program changes
MIDI OUT
or
AW1600
MTC/MMC
AW1600
USB cable
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
USB cable
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
● MIDI Remote
“MIDI Remote” is a function that lets you use the
AW1600 as a physical controller for an external device.
You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders
and [TRACK SEL] keys of the top panel, and use them to
remotely control a MIDI device or computer program.
• Example of using the AW1600 as a physical controller for a MIDI sound module
Control changes
System exclusive messages, etc.
MIDI OUT/THRU
connector
MIDI IN
or
Control changes
System exclusive
messages, etc.
AW1600
USB cable
14
MIDI and utility functions
or
External MIDI
device
(e.g., computer)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
157
Basic MIDI Settings • Setting MIDI messages
Basic MIDI Settings
The UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page lets you specify the connector/port to be used for MIDI message transmission and reception to and from external MIDI devices.
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigation
section [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
3 2 1
C THRU
Selects the THRU input/output connector/port separately
from the IN PORT and OUT PORT listed left. When this
setting is enabled, no internally generated AW1600 MIDI
data is transmitted.
• MIDI ↔ USB 1
.......... MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN
connector are retransmitted via USB output
port 1, and MIDI messages received via
USB connector input port 1 are retransmitted
via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
This page contains the following items.
1 IN PORT
Selects the input connector/port to be used for MIDI message reception.
• MIDI ......................MIDI IN connector.
• USB 1 ...................USB connector input port 1.
• USB 2 ...................USB connector input port 2.
• --- ..........................Disabled.
B OUT PORT
Selects the output connector/port to be used for MIDI
transmission. MIDI data internally generated by the
AW1600 is transmitted via this connector/port.
• MIDI ......................MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
• USB 1 ...................USB connector output port 1.
• MIDI ↔ USB 2
.......... MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN
connector are retransmitted via USB output
port 2, and MIDI messages received via
USB connector input port 2 are retransmitted
via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
• USB 1 ↔ USB 2
.......... MIDI messages received via the USB connector input port 1 are retransmitted via USB
output port 2, and MIDI messages received
via USB connector input port 2 are retransmitted via the USB connector output port 1.
• --- ↔ ---.... No THRU settings.
NOTE
• It may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in
order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on computers (→ p. 209).
• USB 2 ...................USB connector output port 2.
• --- ..........................Disabled.
Setting MIDI messages
14
In the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen, you can make various MIDI-related settings such as
selecting the MIDI messages that will be output from the MIDI OUT/THRU or USB connector,
and specifying MTC/MMC transmission and reception.
MIDI and utility functions
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigation
section [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
1
2
7
1 SYNC OUT
Selects the type of MIDI messages that will be output
from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector or USB connector.
• CLK button ........If this button is on, MIDI Clock (and
Start, Stop, Continue, and Song Position Pointer) messages will be transmitted while the recorder is running. If
you turn this button on, the MTC button will be defeated.
3
158
4
This page contains the following items.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
6
5
9 8
• MTC button........If this button is on, MTC (MIDI Time
Code) will be transmit while the
recorder is running. If you turn this
button on, the CLK button will be
defeated.
Setting MIDI messages
B MMC MODE
Specifies how MMC will be transmitted/received.
• MASTER button....If this button is on, the AW1600 will
be the MMC master. When you
operate the transport, the corresponding MMC command will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT/
THRU or USB connector. Use this
setting when you want to remotely
control an external MIDI device
from the AW1600.
• SLAVE button .......If this button is on, the AW1600 will
be the MTC slave, and will follow
MMC commands that it receives at
the MIDI IN or USB connector. Use
this setting when you want to
remotely control the transport of the
AW1600 from an external MIDI
device.
C DEV (device number)
Specifies the MMC device number (1–127) that the
AW1600 will receive.
E AVRG (Average)
Select one of the following to specify how closely the
AW1600 will follow the incoming MTC data when functioning as an MTC slave.
• 0 ............... The AW1600 will synchronize to the incoming MTC data at the highest precision. However if the incoming MTC has significant
instability, synchronization may be interrupted or become unreliable.
• 1 ............... This setting allows more tolerance of MTC
instability than the “0” setting.
• 2 ............... This setting allows the maximum tolerance.
Use this setting if the MTC master is an
external MIDI device that has significant
instability.
HINT
• When the AW1600 is functioning as an MTC slave and is operating in synchronization to an external MIDI device, and the accuracy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable, the AW1600 will
make slight adjustments in its playback pitch in an attempt to follow. The AVRG parameter specifies the range of MTC variance
that will be tolerated.
NOTE
• The MMC device number is displayed as a decimal number starting from one. Some devices display the MMC device number as a
hexadecimal number starting from zero. In this case, the numbers
will correspond as follows.
AW1600 display → hexadecimal display
1 → 00h
127 → 7Eh
• The AW1600 always transmits MMC commands using the “All”
device number (7Fh in hexadecimal).
D MTC MODE
Specifies how the AW1600 operate when synchronized
with an external MIDI device using MTC (MIDI Time
Code).
• MASTER button....If this button is on, the AW1600 will
be the MTC master. When you
operate the transport of the
AW1600, MTC will be transmitted
from the MIDI OUT/THRU or USB
connector. Use this setting if you
want to the external MIDI device to
follow the AW1600, or if you are
using the AW1600 by itself.
• SLAVE button .......If this button is on, the AW1600 will
be an MTC slave, and will follow
MTC data it receives at the MIDI IN
or USB connector. Use this setting
if you want to synchronize with a
second AW1600 unit, or if you want
to synchronize the AW1600 with an
external MIDI device that can function only as the MTC master.
F OFST (Offset)
When using the AW1600 as an MTC slave, this parameter
shifts the absolute time within the AW1600 forward or
backward relative to the incoming MTC. The range is
–24:00:00:00.00 to +24:00:00:00.00.
OFST = 00:00:00:00.00
Incoming time
code
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
Time code
display (ABS)
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
Song
OFST = +00:00:05:00.00
Incoming time
code
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
Time code
display (ABS)
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
00:00:25:00.00
Song
OFST = 00:00:05:00.00
Incoming time
code
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
00:00:20:00.00
Time code
display (ABS)
00:00:05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
00:00:15:00.00
Song
HINT
• The OFST setting has no effect on the MTC that is transmitted
from the AW1600’s MIDI OUT/THRU or USB connector.
14
MIDI and utility functions
• The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distinguish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands. When
using MMC, the AW1600 and the external MIDI device must be set
to the same MMC device number.
HINT
• When using the AW1600 as the MTC master, make sure that the
MTC button in the SYNC OUT area is turned on.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
159
Setting MIDI messages
G MIDI CH
Selects the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and
receive MIDI messages such as program changes and control changes. This area contains the following two items.
• TX .............Selects the transmit MIDI channel, in a
range of 1–16. While MIDI messages are
HINT
• For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control
change, refer to the tables that follow.
• When you operate a mix parameter of track channel 9/10–15/16
on the AW1600, two types of control changes will be transmitted.
being transmitted, the characters “TX” will
be highlighted.
• RX .............Selects the receive MIDI channel, in a
range of 1–16 or ALL. If you select ALL,
MIDI messages of all MIDI channels will be
received (Omni mode). While MIDI mes-
sages are being received, the characters
“RX” will be highlighted.
H PGM CHG MODE
Switches program change transmission and reception on/
off.
If program change reception is on, the AW1600 will recall
the corresponding scene when it receives a program
change at the MIDI IN or USB connector. If program
change transmission is on, the AW1600 will transmit the
corresponding program change from the MIDI OUT/
THRU or USB connector when a scene is recalled on the
AW1600.
You can select the following choices.
• OFF...........Program changes will not be transmitted or
received.
● When CTRL CHG MODE = 1
MIDI CH
1
2
3
4
5
• TX .............Program changes will only be transmitted.
• RX .............Program change will only be received.
6
• TX-RX .......Program changes will be transmitted and
received.
7
HINT
• In the SCENE screen PC TABLE page you can specify the scene
number that will correspond to each program change number (→
p. 173).
I CTRL CHG MODE
Specifies how control changes will be transmitted and
received.
If control change transmission and reception are enabled,
the corresponding control change will be transmitted
when you operate a mix parameter (fader, pan, effect send,
etc.) for track channel 1–16 on the AW1600.
When a control change is received, the corresponding mix
parameter will change.
You can select one of the following choices.
14
MIDI and utility functions
160
• OFF...........Control changes will not be transmitted or
received.
• 1 ................Control changes will be transmitted and
received on MIDI channels 1–16. (MIDI
channels 1–16 will correspond to AW1600
track channels 1–16.)
• 2 ................Control changes will be transmitted and
received only on the MIDI channel that is
selected in the MIDI CH field. (This mapping
is compatible with the other AW-series.)
• 3 ................This is the same as 2 in that control
changes of only one MIDI channel are
received and transmitted, but the parameter
mapping differs from 2. (A single MIDI channel will correspond to AW1600 track channels 1–16.)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CC#
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
7
10
91
93
PARAMETER
TRACK CHANNEL 1
TRACK CHANNEL 2
TRACK CHANNEL 3
TRACK CHANNEL 4
TRACK CHANNEL 5
TRACK CHANNEL 6
TRACK CHANNEL 7
TRACK CHANNEL 8
TRACK CHANNEL 9
TRACK CHANNEL 10
TRACK CHANNEL 11
TRACK CHANNEL 12
TRACK CHANNEL 13
TRACK CHANNEL 14
TRACK CHANNEL 15
TRACK CHANNEL 16
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
FADER
PAN
EFF1 SEND
EFF2 SEND
Setting MIDI messages
● When CTRL CHG MODE = 2
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PARAMETER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
AUX 1
AUX 2
EFF 1
EFF 2
BUS
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
STEREO OUT
CC#
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
PARAMETER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
PAD 1 L
PAD 1 R
PAD 2 L
PAD 2 R
PAD 3 L
PAD 3 R
PAD 4 L
PAD 4 R
STEREO OUT
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
14
MIDI and utility functions
CC#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
161
Setting MIDI messages
● When CTRL CHG MODE = 3
14
MIDI and utility functions
162
CC#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PARAMETER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
RETURN 1
RETURN 2
STEREO OUT
AUX 1
AUX 2
EFF 1
EFF 2
BUS
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
STEREO OUT
CC#
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
FADER
PARAMETER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
EFF1 SEND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
STEREO OUT
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
Using the MIDI Remote function
Using the MIDI Remote function
Control change
number 64 (value= 127)
About the MIDI Remote function
transmit
The AW1600 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets
you use the controls of the top panel to transmit the
desired MIDI messages.
By using the MIDI Remote function, you can use the
AW1600 as a physical controller for a computer program
or MIDI tone generator.
MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls.
● Mixer section
• Faders 1–8, 9/10–15/16
• [TRACK SEL] keys 1–8, 9/10–15/16
● Transport section
• RTZ [ ] key
• FF [
] key
• PLAY [ ] key
• REW [
] key
• STOP [■] key
• REC [●] key
Control change
number 64 (value= 0)
transmit
Alternatively, you can specify that a MIDI message with a
fixed value is transmitted only when you press the
[TRACK SEL] key to turn it on (lit). For example if you
assign program change #1, the program change of that
number will be transmitted each time you turn on the
[TRACK SEL] key.
Program change
number 1
Program change
number 1
transmit
transmit
Of these, the MIDI messages assigned to the faders and
[TRACK SEL] keys can be freely reassigned. You can
assign the following types of message.
■ Messages that can
be assigned to faders
Control change
number 7
transmit
Value = 127
Value =0
■ Messages that can be
assigned to the [TRACK SEL] keys
A MIDI message whose value changes between the two
states of 0 or 127 can be assigned to each [TRACK SEL]
key. For example if you assign control change #64 (hold)
to a [TRACK SEL] key and specify that the control
change value alternates between 0 and 127, pressing the
[TRACK SEL] key to turn it on (lit) will transmit control
change #64 with a value of 127 (Hold on), and turning it
off (dark) will transmit control change #64 with a value of
0 (Hold off).
Using the MIDI Remote function
presets
The PRESET page of the REMOTE screen provides ten
different MIDI Remote presets. These presets have been
created with specific devices and computer sequencer programs in mind, and assign the necessary messages to the
AW1600’s faders and [TRACK SEL] keys. You can use
the MIDI Remote function immediately, just by selecting
a preset in this page and connecting the appropriate external MIDI device.
Sequencer programs that are supported
● Windows
•
•
•
•
Cubase SX 3.0.1
Logic Platinum 5.5.1 (*1)
Nuendo 3.0.1
Sonar 4.0.1 Producer
Edition
● Macintosh
•
•
•
•
Cubase SX 3.0.1
Logic Pro 7.0.1 (*1)
Nuendo 3.0.1
Protools TDM 6.7 (*2)
*1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the
AW1600’s faders/[TRACK SEL] keys/transport keys to the Logic
key commands. Track assignments must be made within Logic as
appropriate for your system.
*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For details
on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
14
MIDI and utility functions
A MIDI message whose value
changes in a range of 0–127 can be
assigned to each fader. For example if you assign control change #7
(volume) to a fader, you can move
the fader to control the volume of a
MIDI tone generator.
163
Using the MIDI Remote function
To access the PRESET page of the REMOTE screen,
repeatedly press the Work Navigate section [REMOTE]
key or hold down the [REMOTE] key and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
● 05 Volume
Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone
generator.
• [TRACK SEL] key operations will transmit Volume
control change messages (CC#=07).
• When you turn a [TRACK SEL] key off (dark), volume
= 0 will be transmitted.
• When you turn a [TRACK SEL] key on (lit green), the
volume value corresponding to the fader position will
be transmitted.
• When a [TRACK SEL] key is on operating the fader
will transmit Volume control change messages
(CC#=07).
HINT
• The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while this page
is displayed. The track channel faders and [TRACK SEL] keys will
not perform their usual functions, but will work as specified by the
preset you have selected in the PRESET page.
2
3
1
●
●
●
●
This page contains the following items.
1 List
Select one of the ten presets shown in this list. The line
enclosed in the dotted frame is the currently selected preset. When you turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select another
preset, the MIDI message assignments will be switched
immediately.
The AW1600 provides the following presets.
●
●
●
●
00 Cubase
01 Logic
02 Sonar
03 ProTools
These presets let you use the AW1600 as a physical controller for various software sequencers.
• [TRACK SEL] key operations will control mute on/off
operations on the sequencer software.
• Fader operations will control the volume of the
sequencer software tracks.
You will need to install the appropriate setting file into
your sequencer software, and make the necessary settings.
For details, refer to the “Appendix” section “About the
CD-ROM included with the AW1600” (→ p. 209).
● 04 Volume/RecTr
14
MIDI and utility functions
164
Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone
generator or the recording tracks of an external recorder.
• [TRACK SEL] key operations will transmit MMC commands to select recording tracks.
• Fader operations will transmit Volume control changes
(CC#=07).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
06 XG 1-16
07 XG 17-32
08 XG 33-48
09 XG 49-64
These presets let you use the AW1600 as a volume controller for an XG tone generator. Each preset will control
the XG-compatible tone generator’s parts 1–16, 17–32,
33–48, and 49–64 respectively.
• [TRACK SEL] key operations will switch the part on/
off.
• Fader operations will control the volume of the part.
If you select preset 07–09, the button indications will
change as follows.
● Preset 07
1-16 button → 17-32 button
1-12 button → 17-28 button
9-16 button → 25-32 button
● Preset 08
1-16 button → 33-48 button
1-12 button → 33-44 button
9-16 button → 41-48 button
● Preset 09
1-16 button → 49-64 button
1-12 button → 49-60 button
9-16 button → 57-64 button
B CH
Choose one of these buttons to select the MIDI channels
that will be assigned to the faders and the [TRACK SEL]
keys, as shown in the following tables.
Using the MIDI Remote function
● When the 1-16 button is selected
Faders/[TRACK SEL] keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9/10
11/12
13/14
15/16
MIDI channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9/10
11/12
13/14
15/16
● When the 1-12 button is selected
Faders/[TRACK SEL] keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9/10
11/12
13/14
15/16
MIDI channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
● When the 9-16 button is selected
Faders/[TRACK SEL] keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9/10
11/12
13/14
15/16
MIDI channel
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
HINT
• When the 1-16 button is on, operating a fader 9/10–15/16 or a
[TRACK SEL] key 9/10–15/16 will transmit two channels of MIDI
messages.
C TRANSPORT
Select one of the following to specify what will happen
when you operate the keys of the transport section while
using the MIDI Remote function.
• NORMAL button ........The transport keys will perform
the same operations as normally; play, stop, or locate etc.
the current song. MTC/MMC/
MIDI Clock messages will be
transmitted and received as
specified in the MIDI page of the
UTILITY screen.
Using the user-defined Remote
function
The USER page of the REMOTE screen lets you assign
your own MIDI messages to each fader and [TRACK
SEL] key.
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigate
section [REMOTE] key or hold down the [REMOTE] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
HINT
• The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while this page
is displayed. The track channel faders and [TRACK SEL] keys will
not perform their usual functions, but will work as specified by the
settings you have made in the USER page.
1
• LOCAL button............The transport keys will play,
stop, or locate the current song.
However, MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock
messages will not be transmitted or received.
2 3
4
5
8
9 J
• REMOTE button.........The transport keys will not operate the recorder, but will only
transmit the MIDI messages that
have been preset for each key.
6
7
HINT
This page contains the following items.
1 TRANSPORT
Selects what will happen when you operate the keys of the
transport section while using the MIDI Remote function.
B Selected channel
Indicates the name of the channel that is currently selected
for operations.
HINT
• When you operate a fader 1–8 or 9/10–15/16 or a [TRACK SEL]
key 1–8 or 9/10–15/16, the displayed contents of the page will
change to the corresponding channel.
C Fader/[TRACK SEL] key function name
Displays the name that is assigned to the currently displayed fader or [TRACK SEL] key.
14
MIDI and utility functions
• These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate
the song transport.
D NAME button
Edits the name that is assigned to the fader/[TRACK SEL]
key. Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER]
key, and the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
165
Using the MIDI Remote function
E ALL INIT button
Resets all MIDI messages assigned to the faders/[TRACK
SEL] keys to the initial settings. To initialize, move the
cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.
F FADER button
If you turn this button on, the MIDI message assigned to
the fader of the currently selected channel will be displayed.
This button will automatically be turned on when you
operate the fader of a track channel.
G SEL SW button
If you turn this button on, the MIDI message assigned to
the [TRACK SEL] key of the currently selected channel
will be displayed.
This button will automatically be turned on when you
operate the [TRACK SEL] key of a track channel.
H LATCH/UNLATCH button
Selects how the [TRACK SEL] key of a track channel will
operate when pressed.
• LATCH ............The setting will alternate on/off each
time you press the [TRACK SEL] key.
MIDI data transmitted
(SW=7F)
off
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=00)
on
off
• UNLATCH .......The setting will be on while you hold
down the [TRACK SEL] key, and will
turn off when you release the key.
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=7F)
off
on
MIDI data
transmitted (SW=00)
off
J MIDI message
This area displays (in hexadecimal form) the MIDI message that is assigned to the currently selected fader or
[TRACK SEL] key.
You can move the cursor to each numeric box and turn the
[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value of each byte (two-digital hexadecimal number). You can select the following values.
• 00–FF (hexadecimal)
..............Corresponds to the actual value of the
MIDI message that is transmitted.
• END.............Indicates the end of the MIDI message.
When you operate a fader or [TRACK
SEL] key, the MIDI message starting with
the first byte and ending with the byte that
precedes END will be transmitted.
• SW ([TRACK SEL] key only)
..............Indicates the on/off status of the [TRACK
SEL] key. The byte you specify as SW will
be transmitted as 7F (hexadecimal) when
the key is turned on, or 00 (hexadecimal)
when the key is turned off.
• FAD .............Indicates the current position of the fader.
If the message is assigned to a fader, the
byte you specify as FAD will be transmitted as a value of 00–7F (hexadecimal)
corresponding to the fader position when
you operate the fader.
If the message is assigned to a [TRACK
SEL] key, this byte will be transmitted as a
value corresponding to the current position of the fader when the [TRACK SEL]
key is turned on, and will be transmitted as
a value of 00 (hexadecimal) when the
[TRACK SEL] key is turned off.
HINT
• The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be
longer than sixteen bytes.
• If a SW byte is not assigned to a [TRACK SEL] key, the MIDI message you input will be transmitted only when you turn the key on.
(In this case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting.)
• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change to a
fader, the END byte will automatically be input at the end of the
MIDI message.
14
MIDI and utility functions
166
I LEARN button
When this button is on, the MIDI message received from
the MIDI IN connector will be assigned to the currently
selected fader or [TRACK SEL] key. This is a convenient
way to assign MIDI messages quickly.
HINT
• If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN button is on, the last-received MIDI message will be input in the MIDI
message field.
• If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is
received, the first sixteen bytes will be displayed.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change to a
fader, the FAD byte will be automatically input as the variable
value.
NOTE
• If you assign a MIDI message manually, be sure to input END at
the end of the MIDI message.
• When you assign a MIDI message to a fader, FAD must be input
for one of the bytes. If FAD is not input, operating the fader will not
do anything.
• If you input the values manually, it is possible that an invalid MIDI
message will be input. For this reason, you should use the 9
LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible.
Using the test tone oscillator
Using the test tone oscillator
The OSC page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW1600’s built-in test oscillator (the test tone oscillator) to the desired bus.
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigate
section [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
1
2
34
B LEVEL knob
Adjusts the output level of the oscillator.
C AUX 1/2 buttons
Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1/2.
D EFF 1/2 buttons
Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1/2.
E BUS L R button
Sends the oscillator output to the L/R bus.
F ST L R button
Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus.
6 5
7
This page contains the following items.
1 WAVEFORM
Selects one of the following signals for output from the
oscillator.
G Level meter
Indicates the output level of AUX 1/2, effect bus 1/2, and
the L/R bus.
NOTE
• Sine waves and white noise have a higher sound pressure than
they perceptually appear. These signals may damage your speakers if played at a high volume, so please use caution.
• OFF button.......................Oscillator is off
• 100Hz button ...................100 Hz sine wave
• 440Hz button ...................440 Hz sine wave
• 1kHz button .....................1 kHz sine wave
• 10 kHz button ..................10 kHz sine wave
• NOISE button...................White noise
When you turn on a button, the oscillator output will
immediately be sent to the specified bus. Use the 3–6
buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent.
HINT
• If the LEVEL knob is raised when you output the oscillator signal,
a high volume level may be produced suddenly. Be sure to lower
the LEVEL knob before you switch on the oscillator.
MIDI and utility functions
14
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
167
Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk
Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk
In the D.IN HDD page of the UTILITY screen you can make settings for digital input, and initialize
the internal hard disk.
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigation
section [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
1
4
6
B ATT knob
Adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack to the stereo bus.
HINT
• The ATT knob is meaningful only if DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to
STEREO BUS.
2
3
5
G
C DIGITAL REC ON/OFF button
Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) digital recording from the
DIGITAL IN jack, and importing of digital audio data
from an audio CD or WAV file inserted in the CD-RW
drive.
When you switch this setting ON, the following message
will be displayed.
This page contains the following items.
OBSERVE Copyright Notice
Written in Owner’s Manual?
[Cancel] [OK]
1 DIGITAL IN PATCH
Selects one of the following as the destination to which
the signal from the DIGITAL IN jack will be sent.
• DISABLE ................ The DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will
be disabled.
• INPUT 1/2–7/8 ........ The signal will be sent to input
channels 1/2–7/8. If you select this
setting, the MIC/LINE input jacks
for the corresponding input channels will be disabled.
• STEREO BUS......... The signal will be sent to the stereo bus.
HINT
• If you select DISABLE, the AW1600 will operate using its own
internal clock. If you select any other setting, the AW1600 will synchronize to the clock contained in the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack. However when playing an audio CD, the
AW1600 always operates using its own clock.
NOTE
If you agree to the conditions described in “Copyright
Notice” (→ p. 6), select [OK]. When you select [OK],
recording and importing of digital audio data will be
enabled.
HINT
• The DIGITAL REC ON/OFF button is always set to OFF when you
turn on the power.
D VARI PITCH ON/OFF button
Selects whether the sampling frequency will be adjustable
(Vari-pitch function) when DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to
DISABLE. If you turn this button on, vari-pitch will be
enabled, and you can use the VARI PITCH knob to adjust
the sampling frequency.
E VARI PITCH knob
Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in a
range of –5.97 to +6.00%.
• You cannot switch this setting while the recorder is running.
14
MIDI and utility functions
168
• If you select a setting other than DISABLE, a message of
“((((WRONG WORD CLOCK!!))))” will be displayed if appropriate
clock data is not being sent to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack.
While this message is displayed, all channels will be muted and
the recorder section will not operate. To make the AW1600 operate, you must either input the correct clock signal or switch the
DIGITAL IN PATCH setting to DISABLE.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
• Vari-pitch is not available if DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to other than
DISABLE, or if you have selected MTC Slave in the MIDI 2 page of
the UTILITY screen.
Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk • Overall settings for the AW1600
F FORMAT button
Formats (initializes) the internal hard disk. When you
move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key,
the hard disk will be formatted. During execution, a popup
window will indicate the progress. When formatting has
been completed, the popup window will close automatically.
NOTE
• Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal
hard disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend you
to backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before
executing the Format operation.
G AUTO SAVE button
Enables or disables the Auto Save function. When the
Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will
be backed up to temporary memory when the following
operation occurs. If the power is accidentally turned off
before the unit is properly shut down, the song will be
restored from the backup data in temporary memory the
next time the power is turned on.
•
•
•
•
Recording is stopped.
Track editing is ended.
Import from the CD-RW drive is completed.
Import of a WAV file is completed.
• You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started.
• Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting, since this
may damage the hard disk and cause malfunctions.
Overall settings for the AW1600
In the PREFER page of the UTILITY screen, you can make settings that affect the overall operation of the AW1600, such as specifying whether or not popup windows will appear, and switching
copy protect on/off.
To access this page, repeatedly press the Work Navigate
section [UTILITY] key or hold down the [UTILITY] key
and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys.
● When copy protect is enabled
AW1600
D.OUT COPYRIGHT= ON
12
6 78
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
354
J9
Digital recording
possible
This page contains the following items.
1 STORE CONFIRM ON/OFF button
DAT or MD, etc.
Digital recording
not possible
B RECALL CONFIRM ON/OFF button
Specifies whether a popup window will ask you to confirm
the operation when you recall a scene or library.
C D.OUT COPYRIGHT ON/OFF button
Specifies whether SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) copy protect flags will be written into the digital signal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack.
Protect is enabled if the button is on, and disabled if the
button is off.
If copy protect is enabled, you will be able to copy the signal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on an MD or
DAT recorder, but it will not be possible to make a secondgeneration digital copy from that data.
D PARAM DISP TIME
Adjusts the duration for which the value will be displayed
in the upper right of the screen when you use the knobs of
the Selected Channel section to edit a parameter. This setting has a range of 0–9 (seconds).
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
14
MIDI and utility functions
Specifies whether the TITLE EDIT popup window (allowing you to assign a name) will appear when you store a
scene/library.
169
Overall settings for the AW1600
E FADER FLIP
Specifies whether faders 1–8 and 9/10–15/16 will adjust
the track channel levels (TRACK) or the input channel/
pad levels (INPUT). When the power is turned on, this setting will always return to TRACK.
NOTE
• Even if you select INPUT, the function of the [TRACK SEL] keys
will not be affected.
F NUDGE MODE
Selects the playback method that will be used by the
Nudge function (a function that lets you use the [JOG ON]
key and [DATA/JOG] dial to search for a location).
• AFTER ............Play back repeatedly, starting at the current location, for the duration specified
by the NUDGE TIME.
• BEFORE .........Play back repeatedly, ending at the current location, for the duration specified
by the NUDGE TIME.
NUDGE MODE: BEFORE
Current location
NUDGE MODE: AFTER
Current location
G NUDGE TIME
Specifies the duration (Nudge Time) that will be played
repeatedly by the Nudge function. The nudge time can be
set in a range of 25–800 ms in 1 ms (millisecond) steps.
H SOUND CLIP TIME
Selects the recording time for the Sound Clip function.
This can be set in a range of 30 sec–180 sec, in 30 sec
(second) steps.
NOTE
• The SOUND CLIP TIME setting is used when you create a new
song. You cannot change the recording time for the sound clip
function after the song has been created.
14
MIDI and utility functions
170
I PREROLL TIME
Specifies the duration (preroll time) that will be played
back before the punch-in point when you use Auto Punchin. This can be set in a range of 0–5 seconds.
J POSTROLL TIME
Specifies the duration (postroll time) that will be played
back after the punch-out point when you use Auto Punchin. This can be set in a range of 0–5 seconds.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 15
Using the AW1600 with external devices
This chapter describes various examples of how you can use the AW1600 in
conjunction with external devices.
Using the AW1600 with a “workstation synth”
There are numerous ways in which you can use the AW1600 together with a workstation synthesizer (a synthesizer that has a built-in sequencer).
5 In the Work Navigate section, use the
Synchronizing the AW1600 with
the workstation’s sequencer
[SONG] key to access the SETUP page of
the SONG screen, and select a frame rate in
the TIME CODE BASE area.
Here’s how you can use MTC to synchronize the AW1600
song with the sequencer built into your workstation synth.
In this example we will also use MMC to remotely control
the transport of the AW1600 from your workstation synth.
1 Refer to the following diagram, and connect
the AW1600 to your workstation synthesizer.
MTC
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
HINT
• The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchronization with the external device, but also the time code that is
displayed in the counter, etc.
SONG SCENE
REC
AW1600
MIDI OUT
MMC
Synthesizer with
built-in sequencer
2 In the Work Navigate section, use the [UTILITY] key to access the MIDI 1 page of the
UTILITY screen. Set the IN PORT and OUT
PORT to MIDI.
3 In the Work Navigate section, use the [UTILITY] key to access the MIDI 2 page of the
UTILITY screen. Turn on the SLAVE button
in the MMC MODE field, and turn on the
MASTER button in the MTC MODE field.
The AW1600 will be set to function as MMC slave and
MTC master.
● Example settings for synchronization using
MTC and MMC
6 Set your workstation synth to function as
MMC master and MTC slave, and set its
MMC device number and MTC frame rate to
the same settings as the AW1600.
For details on how to make these settings, refer to the
manual for your workstation synth.
7 Play back the sequencer (of your workstation synth).
When you play back the sequencer of your workstation synth, the corresponding MMC commands will be
sent to the AW1600, and the AW1600 will begin running.
At the same time, the AW1600 will transmit MTC to
your workstation synth, and the sequencer will run in
synchronization with it.
HINT
• You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Continue messages instead of using MTC and MMC. For details
on the settings in this case, refer to the section that follows,
“Recording/playing AW1600 mix operations on the workstation’s sequencer.”
Using the AW1600 with external devices
MIDI IN
15
4 Move the cursor to the DEV field, and set
the value to match the device number of
your workstation synthesizer.
When using MMC, you must set the AW1600 and the
external MIDI device to the same MMC device number. For details on the device numbers that your workstation synth can use, refer to its owner’s manual.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
171
Using the AW1600 with a “workstation synth”
4 Make settings on your workstation synth so
Recording/playing AW1600 mix
operations on the workstation’s
sequencer
that its built-in sequencer will follow external MIDI Clock messages. Also set the
sequencer to record-ready mode.
Here’s how you can synchronize the AW1600 and the
built-in sequencer of your workstation synth, and use the
sequencer to record/play the fader and pan operations you
perform on the AW1600.
Since operating the AW1600’s mix parameters will cause
a large number of control change messages to be transmitted, we will use MIDI Clock (which uses less data) as the
synchronization signal rather than MTC.
1 Connect the AW1600 and your workstation
as shown in the following diagram.
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
MIDI IN
AW1600
Control change
Synthesizer with
built-in sequencer
ITY] key to access the MIDI 2 page of the
UTILITY screen. Turn on the MASTER button in the MTC MODE area, and turn on the
CLK button in the SYNC OUT area.
Using the AW1600 with external devices
172
• If your workstation synth has a function by which MIDI messages received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted
from its MIDI OUT connector (a function called “MIDI Echo” or
“MIDI Thru”), you must turn it off. If this function is turned on
while you are recording, the control change messages transmitted when you operate the AW1600 will be immediately
returned to the AW1600, causing malfunctions.
5 Play back the AW1600 song from the beginWhen the AW1600 begins playing, it will transmit a
Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the
sequencer, and the sequencer will begin running in
synchronization with the AW1600.
MIDI OUT
2 In the Work Navigate section, use the [UTIL-
15
NOTE
ning.
MIDI Clock
Control change
MIDI OUT
For details on how to make these settings, refer to the
manual for your workstation synth.
With these settings, the AW1600 will transmit MIDI
Clock, Start/Stop/Continue, and Song Position Pointer
messages from its MIDI OUT/THRU connector when
it is running.
● Example settings for synchronization using
MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Continue
6 Operate the AW1600’s mix parameters such
as fader and pan.
The control changes assigned to each parameter will
be recorded on the sequencer.
The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will
depend on the setting of the CTRL CHG MODE field
(→ p. 160).
7 When you are finished recording, stop the
AW1600 song.
8 Switch the workstation’s sequencer to playback-ready mode, and play back the
AW1600 song from the beginning.
The recorded control changes will be transmitted to
the AW1600, and the corresponding mix parameters
will change.
If necessary, you can use the editing functionality of
your sequencer to edit the values and timing of the
control changes that were recorded.
NOTE
3 Move the cursor to the CTRL CHG MODE
area, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
1 out of the possible range of 1–3.
The CTRL CHG MODE lets you choose one of three
combinations (1–3) that specify how control changes
will correspond to the mix parameters of the AW1600.
(For details on the contents of each choice, refer to
page 160.)
If you want to divide your operations into a separate
MIDI channel for each of the AW1600’s track channels, choose 1. If you want all track channels to be
controlled on a single MIDI channel, choose 2 or 3.
If you chose 2 or 3, you will also need to set the MIDI
CH field to specify the MIDI channel that will be used
to transmit and receive the control changes.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• If you set CTRL CHG MODE to 1, operating track channels 1–
16 will transmit control changes on the corresponding MIDI
channel 1–16. For this reason, you should normally record
operations only for a single channel at a time, unless your
sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI channels simultaneously.
Using the AW1600 with a “workstation synth”
Switching AW1600 scenes from
the workstation’s sequencer
4 Repeat steps 3–4 to assign the desired
scenes to other program change numbers.
HINT
• If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial setting, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Here’s how you can transmit program changes from the
built-in sequencer of your workstation to switch scenes on
the AW1600.
■ Assign scenes to program changes
1 In the Control section, use the [SCENE] key
to access the PC TABLE page of the SCENE
screen.
This page lets you assign a scene number to each program change.
■ Transmit program
changes to switch scenes
1 Connect the AW1600 and your workstation
synth as shown in the diagram below.
1
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Program
change
AW1600
Synthesizer with
built-in sequencer
2 In the Work Navigate section, use the [UTIL4
2
3
ITY] key to access the MIDI 2 page of the
UTILITY screen.
1 List
B Program change number
This indicates the program change number 001–128.
Move the cursor to this number and turn the [DATA/
JOG] dial to scroll the list upward or downward.
C Scene
3 Set the PGM CHG MODE field to RX.
With this setting, the AW1600 will receive program
changes.
Move the cursor to this area and turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the
corresponding program number.
4 Move the cursor to RX in the MIDI CH area,
D INITIALIZE button
Returns the program change assignments to the initial
state.
5 Transmit a program change message from
HINT
• With the initial settings, program changes 1–96 correspond to
scenes 1–96, and program changes 97–128 are set to NO
ASSIGN (no assignment).
and select the MIDI channel on which MIDI
messages will be received.
your workstation synth to the AW1600 on
the MIDI channel that you selected.
The scene assigned to that program change number
will be recalled.
Using the AW1600 with external devices
This lists the scenes of the current song. The line
enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently
selected for operations.
HINT
2 Move the cursor to the program change
number, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select the program change number whose
assignment you want to change.
• If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations
of your sequencer track, scenes will be recalled automatically
as the AW1600 and your sequencer run in synchronization.
15
3 Move the cursor to the scene in the list, and
turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene
that you want to assign to the corresponding program change number.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
173
Remotely controlling a tone generator module
Remotely controlling a tone generator module
Here’s how you can use the AW1600’s MIDI Remote function to remotely control a tone generator module.
1 Connect the AW1600 to your tone generator
module as shown in the following diagram.
Control changes
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Tone generator
module
AW1600
2 Use the Work Navigate section [REMOTE]
key to access the PRESET page of the
REMOTE screen.
The Remote function will be enabled.
3 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the preset that you want to use.
For example if you select preset 06 (XG 1-16), the
AW1600’s faders will control the volume of parts 1–
16 of your XG tone generator, and [TRACK SEL]
keys 1–16 will control the on/off status of parts 1–16.
4 If necessary, use the buttons in the CH area
to select the MIDI channels to which the
faders and [TRACK SEL] keys will correspond.
The buttons in the CH area select the combination of
MIDI channels that are assigned to the faders and
[TRACK SEL] keys. For the combination of MIDI
channels used when each button is on, refer to “MIDI
and utility functions” (→ p. 157).
5 Operate the faders and [TRACK SEL] keys
of the AW1600.
HINT
• While the REMOTE screen is displayed, the functions of the
faders and [TRACK SEL] keys will be disabled; the faders and
keys will function as controllers that transmit MIDI messages.
• The MIDI Remote function is enabled whenever the REMOTE
screen is displayed.
Using the AW1600 with external devices
15
174
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
The messages assigned to the faders and [TRACK
SEL] keys will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT/
THRU connector, and the parameters of your tone
generator module will change accordingly.
HINT
• It is also possible to assign your own MIDI messages to the
AW1600’s faders and [TRACK SEL] keys. For details, refer to
“MIDI and utility functions” (→ p. 157).
Using external effects
Using external effects
As an alternative to using the internal effects, you can use an external effect processor connected to the STEREO/AUX OUT jacks. As an example, here’s how you can use AUX bus 1 to
apply a mono-in stereo-out reverb to the track channels during mixdown.
tion.
2 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
1 AUX 1 knobs
Adjust the send level of the signals that are sent from
each channel to AUX bus 1.
press the [PAN/BAL] knob or hold down the
[PAN/BAL] knob and use the CURSOR [ ]/
[ ] keys to access the AUX OUT page of
the PAN screen.
B PRE/POST (upper line)
Select the location from which the signal is sent from
each channel to AUX bus 1. Move the cursor to the
desired channel and press the [ENTER] key to switch
between the following two settings.
In this page you can select one of the following as the
signal that will be output from the STEREO/AUX
OUT jacks.
• PRE (pre-fader) ......... The signal immediately
before the fader will be sent.
• STEREO .....................Stereo bus (default)
• AUX 1/2.......................AUX bus 1/2
3 Move the cursor to the AUX 1/2 button and
press the [ENTER] key.
• POST (post-fader)..... The signal immediately after
the fader will be sent.
C AUX2 knobs
Adjust the send level of the signals that are sent from
each channel to AUX bus 2.
The AUX bus 1 signal will be output from the L channel of the STEREO/AUX OUT jacks, and the AUX
bus 2 signal will be output from the R channel of the
STEREO/AUX OUT jacks.
D PRE/POST (lower line)
Select the location from which the signal is sent from
each channel to AUX bus 2. Move the cursor and press
the [ENTER] key to switch between PRE and POST.
4 As shown in the following diagram, connect
6 Raise the AUX knob 1 of each channel to an
your external effect processor to the
AW1600.
With the settings so far, the signal from the track channel will be sent from AUX bus 1 via the STEREO/
AUX OUT jack to the external effect processor.
Effect processor
MIC/LINE
INPUT 3/4
appropriate level, and switch the PRE/POST
setting in the upper line as desired.
STEREO/
AUX OUT (L)
7 Use the Quick Navigate section [RECORD]
key to access the MIXDOWN page of the
RECORD screen, and make the settings
shown below.
MONITOR
OUT
AW1600
NOTE
• If you make the above connection with the [STEREO] fader
raised before performing steps 2 and 3, oscillation may occur.
Please use caution.
5 Press the [PAN/BAL] knob twice to access
the AUX page of the PAN screen.
With these settings, the unprocessed sound of track
channels 1–16 and the effect sound returned to input
channels 3/4 will be sent to the stereo bus and mixed.
You can monitor these signals via the MONITOR
OUT jacks.
Using the AW1600 with external devices
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-
15
21
34
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
175
Using external effects
● Signal flow when using an external effect processor
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Effect processor
Input
channels
Track
channels
AUX bus 1
master
Stereo
output
channel
AUX bus
Stereo bus
Using the AW1600 with external devices
Mixer section
8 In the Selected Channel section, repeatedly
press the [PAN/BAL] knob to access the
PAN page of the PAN screen, and spread
apart the pan settings of input channels 3/4.
The effect sound will be heard in stereo. If desired,
you can specify input channels 3/4 as a pair.
NOTE
• If you use these settings, leave the AUX 1 knob and AUX 2
knob of input channels 3/4 set all the way to the left
(–∞ dB). If you raise these levels, the signal will loop, creating
oscillation.
9 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-
tion, and while playing back the song,
adjust the input level of your external effect
processor and use the [GAIN] knobs to
adjust the input level of input channels 3/4.
If desired, return to step 5 and readjust the send level
to AUX bus 1 for each track channel. If you want to
adjust the AUX bus 1 master level, use the BUS page
of the VIEW screen (or the AUX OUT page of the
PAN screen).
15
10 In the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD
screen, switch the REC button on, and perform the mixdown.
NOTE
• When you are finished with the mixdown, turn the PAN screen
AUX OUT page setting back to its original setting of STEREO.
176
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT
Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT
By connecting a digital recorder to the AW1600’s DIGITAL STEREO IN or DIGITAL STEREO
OUT jack, you can mixdown to the digital recorder such as MD or DAT while keeping the signal in
the digital domain, or record an audio signal from the digital recorder into the AW1600.
Mixing down to a digital recorder
the Quick Navigation section [RECORD]
3 Use
key to access the MIXDOWN page of the
RECORD screen, and select the channels
that you want to send to the stereo bus.
Here’s how you can connect a digital recorder to the
AW1600’s DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack and mix down.
The DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack always outputs the
same signal as is recorded on the stereo track. This means
that the procedure is essentially the same as for normal
mixdown.
the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi1 Lower
tion.
shown in the diagram below, connect
2 As
the AW1600 to your digital recorder.
the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi4 Raise
tion, and while you play back the song,
adjust the level, pan, EQ, and dynamics for
each track channel.
If desired, you can also use the mastering library.
Digital recorder
(MD or DAT)
DIGITAL
STEREO IN
DIGITAL
STEREO IN
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT
you have finished adjusting the
5 When
sound and the levels, put your digital
recorder in record mode, then play the
AW1600 from the beginning and perform
the mixdown.
You do not need to turn on the REC button in the
MIXDOWN page at this time.
MONITOR
OUT
you have finished the mixdown, stop
6 When
the AW1600 and your digital recorder.
AW1600
● Signal flow when mixing down to a digital recorder
Digital recorder
(MD or DAT)
Recorder section
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Using the AW1600 with external devices
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT
15
Track
channels
Stereo output
channel
Stereo bus
Mixer section
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
177
Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT
To play back your digital recorder and listen to the
recorded result, connect the DIGITAL STEREO OUT
jack of your digital recorder to the AW1600’s DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, and perform the following
steps.
7
If you want to hear the result that was
recorded on the digital recorder, lower the
[STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position, and
use the [UTILITY] key to access the D.IN HDD page of the UTILITY screen.
2 As shown in the diagram below, connect
your digital recorder to the AW1600.
Digital recorder
(MD or DAT)
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT
DIGITAL
STEREO IN
MONITOR
OUT
AW1600
3 Use the [UTILITY] key to access the D.IN •
HDD page of the UTILITY screen.
8 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC ON/
OFF button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A message will ask you to confirm your observance of
copyright laws. If you accept the conditions described
in “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 6), move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The DIGITAL
REC ON/OFF button will be switched ON, and digital
audio data input will be enabled.
9 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL PATCH IN
field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
“STEREO BUS” as the destination for the
input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN
jack.
Using the AW1600 with external devices
15
With this setting, the input signal from the DIGITAL
STEREO IN jack will be connected directly to the stereo bus.
4 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC ON/
OFF button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A message will ask you to confirm your observance of
copyright laws. If you accept the conditions described
in “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 6), move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The DIGITAL
REC ON/OFF button will be switched ON, and digital
audio data input will be enabled.
5 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL PATCH IN
field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
“1/2” (input channels 1/2) as the destination
for the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack.
NOTE
• If necessary, use the INIT page of the MONITOR screen to
initialize the input channels.
NOTE
• Please note that the EQ and dynamics settings you made for
the stereo output channel during mixdown are still valid at this
point. If necessary, turn off EQ and dynamics.
6 Use the Quick Navigation section
[RECORD] key to access the DIRECT page
of the RECORD screen, and connect input
channels 1/2 directly to tracks 1/2.
10 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position, and play back your digital recorder.
Recording audio data from
a digital recorder
Here’s how the signal from a digital recorder connected to
the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack can be recorded on an
AW1600 track while still in the digital domain.
1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position.
7 Raise the [STEREO] fader, play back your
digital recorder, and check the recording
level and monitor level.
NOTE
• If you want to lower the recording level, access the FADER
page of the VIEW screen and lower the on-screen faders for
input channels 1/2. (The [GAIN] knobs have no effect on input
signals from the DIGITAL STEREO INPUT jack.)
8 When you are finished setting the levels,
put the AW1600 in record mode, and play
back your digital recorder.
178
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
Input library list
No.
00
Name
Effect Type
Initial Data
Description
Initialize to a default state in which EQ, DYN, and EFFECT are not applied.
EG: Electric guitar
01
Multi Drive
AmpSimulate
02
Light Crunch
AmpSimulate
Drive sound usable in a wide range of situations from backing to lead.
Light crunch sound suitable for chords (that are allowed to ring).
03
Studio Lead
Dist->Delay
Lead with delay sound, with an amp-like character.
04
Clean Lead
Rev->Sympho
Clean and transparent sound.
05
Hard Blues
AmpSimulate
Hard blues sound with rich distortion.
06
Melody Drive
Dist->Delay
Long sustaining sound suitable for melodies or ballades.
07
Pop Ryhthm
Mono Delay
Clean backing sound with doubling.
08
Heavy Rock
AmpSimulate
Heavy rock sound with all frequency ranges distorted.
09
Stack Lead
AmpSimulate
Sound that simulates an old amp stack.
10
Funk Cut
Dyna.Phaser
Phase sound that adds an effect to the picking attack.
11
Trad Blues
AmpSimulate
Simulation of a traditional blues guitar sound.
12
NeoRockabily
Dist->Delay
Rockabilly sound using a short delay, warped by adding distortion.
13
Air Clean
Delay+Rev
Clean sound with a sense of air.
14
City Lead
Mod.Delay
Combination sound with lightly applied modulation and delay.
15
Pop Chorus
Chorus
Chorus sound suitable for a wide range of uses, from chording to arpeggios.
16
Fuzzy Drive
AmpSimulate
A useful and original fuzz sound.
17
Jazzy Night
Reverb Room
Comp sound that lets you express nuances by your picking dynamics.
18
Retro Phase
Phaser
Simulation of a classic compact phaser.
19
Mistic Chord
Dual Pitch
SFX sound that produces a mystical effect from chords or harmonics.
20
Drive Amp
AmpSimulate
Natural-sounding overdrive that simulates overdriving a combo amp.
21
Smooth Lead
AmpSimulate
Smooth distortion lead with a smooth playing feel.
22
Crunch Box
AmpSimulate
Crunch sound with a nice amount of distortion, usable for anything from backing to lead.
23
Double Drive
Dist->Delay
Heavy distortion with doubling.
24
Comp Driver
AmpSimulate
Overdrive with compressor to bring out the nuances of your picking.
25
Rotary
Rotary
The familiar rotary speaker sound, optimized for guitar.
AG: Acoustic guitar
26
Arppegio
Rev+Sympho
Graceful arpeggio sound with good definition.
27
Chorus
Chorus
Deep chorus sound usable in any situation.
28
Lead
Mod.Delay
Light modulation sound, suitable for lead guitar.
29
Finger Cut
ReverbRoom
Suitable for finger strumming or walking-bass phrases.
30
Stroke
Symphonic
Symphonic sound effective on single-note melodic playing.
A sound ideal for root-note picking.
BA: Bass
31
Pick Drive
AmpSimulate
32
Finger Pick
AmpSimulate
Sound suitable for finger-picking, with emphasis on response.
33
Rock Boost
AmpSimulate
Heavy and solid distortion sound.
34
Best Slap
AmpSimulate
Slap bass sound for everyone (reminiscent of when slap became fashionable).
35
Melody
Rev->Chorus
Sweet-toned sound for lead melodies.
VO: Vocal
Pop Vocal
ReverbPlate
Clear and transparent effect for vocal, that cuts the low range.
37
Rock Vocal
MonoDelay
Effect for rock vocal that uses doubling to create depth.
38
Delay Vocal
MonoDelay
Vocal effect that uses a basic delay.
39
Ballad Vocal
Symphonic
Vocal effect with symphonic, effective on ballades etc.
40
ROBOT
RingMod
SFX sound for vocal and speech, also usable as a sound-effect.
Appendix
36
Speaker simulation
01
SMALL TYPE
—
Small cabinet simulation.
02
REAL FEEL
—
Creates realism (picking produces grit).
03
HIGH RANGE
—
Cabinet with boosted highs.
04
STACK TYPE
—
Large cabinet simulation.
05
MID RANGE
—
Simulation of a cabinet with distinctive mid-range.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
179
Mastering library list
Mastering library list
No.
Name
00
Initial Data
Initialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied.
01
VITAL MIX
Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness, creating a mix with extended low and high ranges.
Use on the two-track mix for any type of song.
02
SOFT COMP
Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics).
Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important.
03
HARD ATTACKY
Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall “flattened” feel. Ideal for songs that emphasize the
rhythm.
04
SOFT ATTACKY
Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics). Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important, and that emphasize the
rhythm.
05
LO-FI
Limiter that produces a “lo-fi” character.
06
DARK/SOFT
Soft limiter that produces the slightly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.
(Ideal for Beatles-type rock of the 60’s and 70’s, or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel.)
07
DARK/HARD
Hard limiter that produces a strongly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.
(Ideal when you want to make the song sound like 60’s or 70’s rock such as the Beatles.)
08
BRIGHT
Compressor that produces a boosted high range.
09
LO BOOST
Compressor that produces a boosted low range.
10
HARD LIMIT
Limiter that produces an extremely flattened feel. Ideal for hard-edged songs.
11
LIMITER
Limiter without EQ. Ideal when you need only limiting.
12
NARROW
Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio.
13
DIST
Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect.
Appendix
180
Description
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
EQ library list
EQ library list
These are the preset equalizer settings provided by the library.
No.
Name
Description
001
Bass Drum 1
Emphasizes the low range of the bass drum and the attack created by the beater.
002
Bass Drum 2
Creates a peak around 80Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.
003
Snare Drum 1
Emphasizes snapping and rimshot sounds.
004
Snare Drum 2
Emphasizes the ranges of that classic rock snare drum sound.
005
Tom-tom 1
Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.
006
Cymbal
Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.
007
High Hat
Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.
008
Percussion
Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the high-range of instruments, such as shakers, cabasas, and congas.
009
E.Bass 1
Makes a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.
010
E.Bass 2
Unlike program 009, this emphasizes the low range of the electric bass.
011
Syn.Bass 1
Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.
012
Syn.Bass 2
Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to a synth bass.
013
Piano 1
This is used to make a piano sound brighter.
014
Piano 2
Emphasize the attack and low range of the piano sound by using a compressor.
015
E.G.Clean
Use for line-recording an electric guitar or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly hard sound.
016
E.G.Crunch 1
Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.
017
E.G.Crunch 2
This is a variation on program 016.
018
E.G.Dist 1
Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.
019
E.G.Dist 2
This is a variation on program 018.
020
A.G.Stroke 1
Emphasizes the bright tones of an acoustic guitar.
021
A.G.Stroke 2
This is a variation on program 020. You can also use it for the electric gut guitar.
022
A.G.Arpeg. 1
Corrects arpeggio technique of an acoustic guitar.
023
A.G.Arpeg. 2
This is a variation on program 022.
024
BrassSection
Use with trumpets, trombones, or sax. With one instrument, adjust the HIGH or H-MID frequency.
025
Male Vocal 1
Use as a template for male vocal. Adjust the HIGH or H-MID setting according to the voice quality.
026
Male Vocal 2
This is a variation on program 025.
027
Female Vo. 1
Use as a template for female vocal. Adjust the HIGH or H-MID setting according to the voice quality.
028
Female Vo. 2
This is a variation on program 027.
029
Chorus&Harmo
Use as a template for a chorus. It makes the entire chorus much brighter.
030
Total EQ 1
Use on the STEREO bus during mixdown. For more effect, try it with a compressor.
031
Total EQ 2
This is a variation on program 030.
032
Total EQ 3
This is a variation on program 030. Also use these programs for stereo inputs or external effect returns.
033
Bass Drum 3
This is a variation on program 001. The low and mid range is removed.
034
Snare Drum 3
This is a variation on program 003. It creates rather thick sound.
035
Tom-tom 2
This is a variation on program 005. Emphasizes the mid and high range.
036
Piano 3
This is a variation on program 013.
037
Piano Low
Use for the low range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo. Use with program 038.
038
Piano High
Use for the high range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo. Use with program 037.
039
Fine-EQ Cass
Use for recording to or from cassette tape to make the sound clearer.
040
Narrator
Use for recording a voice reading a text.
[ No Data! ]
User area.
041–128
HINT
Appendix
• The EQ programs were programmed for recording acoustic musical instruments. If you are
using them for a sampler, synthesizer, or rhythm machine, adjust the parameters accordingly.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
181
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels. However, you can
also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound. The AW1600 features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels, tape returns, and the bus and stereo
outputs. These processors allow you to compress, expand, compress-expand (compand), gate,
or duck the signals passing through the mixer, giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility.
• Out Gain — sets the compressor’s output signal level.
Compression tends to reduce the average signal level. Out
Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an
appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path.
■ Compressor
dB
+20
+10
• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.
With a hard knee, the transition between uncompressed
and compressed signal is immediate. With the softest
knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches
the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.
Compression ratio = 2:1
Output Level
0
–10
Threshold = –20dB
–20
–30
Knee = hard
–40
–50
–60
–70
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
A compressor provides a form of automatic level control.
By attenuating high levels, thus effectively reducing the
dynamic range, the compressor makes it much easier to
control signals and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing
the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be
set higher, therefore improving the signal-to-noise performance.
Compressor (CMP) parameters:
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Ratio
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Attack (ms)
0 to 120 (121 points)
Outgain (dB)
0 to +18 (36 points)
Knee
hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)
Release (ms)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below
the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and
above the threshold level are compressed by the amount
specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is
determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
Appendix
182
• Ratio — controls the amount of compression-the change
in output signal level relative to change in input signal
level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in
input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change
in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input
level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change in output level.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is compressed
once the compressor has been triggered. With a fast attack
time, the signal is compressed almost immediately. With a
slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes
through unaffected.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• Release — determines how soon the compressor returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold. If the release time is too short, the gain will
recover too quickly causing level pumping-noticeable gain
fluctuations. If it is set too long, the compressor may not
have time to recover before the next high level signal
appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly.
Dynamics Parameters
■ Expander
■ Compander
dB
dB
+20
+10
+20
Expansion ratio = 2:1
+10
Width
Knee = knee5
0
–10
–20
Output Level
Threshold = –10dB
–30
–40
–50
–10
–20
Threshold
–30
–40
–50
–60
–60
–70
–70
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
dB
+10 +20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
Input Level
An expander is another form of automatic level control.
By attenuating the signal below the threshold, the
expander reduces low-level noise and effectively increases
the dynamic range of the recorded material.
A compander is a compressor-expander-a combination of
signal compression and expansion. The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the
level below the width. For very dynamic material, this
program allows you to retain the dynamic range without
having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels
and clipping.
Expander (EXP) parameters:
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Ratio
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Attack (ms)
0 to 120 (121 points)
Outgain (dB)
0 to +18 (36 points)
Knee
hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)
Release (ms)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the expander. Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the
threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified
using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
• Ratio — controls the amount of expansion-the change in
output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
With a 1:2 ratio, for example, a 5 dB change in input level
(below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output
level. For a 1:5 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below
the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is expanded once
the expander has been triggered. With a fast attack time,
the signal is expanded almost immediately. With a slow
attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through
unaffected.
• Out Gain — sets the expander’s output signal level.
• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.
With a hard knee, the transition between unexpanded and
expanded signal is immediate. With the softest knee,
knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the
threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.
• Release — determines how soon the expander returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold.
CompanderH (CPH) and
CompanderS (CPS) parameters:
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Ratio
1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10, 20 (15 points)
Attack (ms)
0 to 120 (121 points)
Outgain (dB)
–18 to 0 (36 points)
Width (dB)
1 to 90 (90 points)
Release (ms)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
• Threshold — determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the compander. Signals above the
threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below
the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified
using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.
• Ratio — controls the amount of companding-the change
in output signal level relative to change in input signal
level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in
input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change
in output level. The hard compander (CPH) has a fixed
ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the soft compander (CPS)
has a fixed ratio of 1.5:1 for expansion.
• Attack — controls how soon the signal is companded
once the compander has been triggered. With a fast attack
time, the signal is companded almost immediately. With a
slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes
through unaffected.
• Out Gain — sets the compander’s output signal level.
• Width — is used to determine the distance, in decibels,
between the expander and the compressor. With a width of
90 dB, the expander is effectively switched off and the
compander is simply a compressor-limiter. With a smaller
width (30dB) and a high threshold (0dB), the compander
is an expander-compressor-limiter.
Appendix
Output Level
0
• Release — determines how soon the compander returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
183
Dynamics Parameters
• Range — controls the level to which the gate closes. It
can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it
completely. At a setting of –70 dB, the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold. At
a setting of –30 dB, the gate only closes so far allowing an
attenuated signal through. At a setting of 0 dB, the gate
has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sudden
cutoff can sound odd.
For ducking, a setting of –70 dB causes the signal to be
virtually cutoff. At a setting of –30 dB the signal is ducked
by 30 dB. At a setting of 0 dB, the duck has no effect.
■ Gate and Ducking
dB
+20
+10
Output Level
0
Threshold = –10dB
–10
–20
–30
Range = –30dB
–40
–50
–60
Range = –70dB
–70
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
dB
+20
+10
Output Level
0
–10
Threshold = –20dB
–20
–30
–40
–50
Range = –30dB
–60
–70
dB
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10
0
+10 +20
Input Level
A gate, or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level. It can be used to suppress
background noise and hiss from valve (tube) amps, effects
pedals, and microphones.
Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one
signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold. It is used for voice-over applications
where, for example, level of background music is automatically reduced, allowing an announcer to be heard
clearly.
Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters:
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Range (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
Attack (ms)
0 to 120 (121 points)
Hold (ms)
0.02 ms to 2.14 sec (216 points)
Decay (ms)
6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)
• Threshold — sets the level at which the gate closes, cutting off the signal. Signals above the threshold level pass
through unaffected. Signals at or below the threshold
cause the gate to close.
For ducking, trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking, and the signal level is reduced
to a level set by the Range parameter.
The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN
SOURCE parameter.
Appendix
184
• Attack — determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level. Slow attack times can
be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive
sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some signals
sound backwards.
For ducking, this controls how soon the signal is ducked
once the duck has been triggered. With a fast attack time,
the signal is ducked almost immediately. With a slow
attack time, ducking fades the signal. Too fast an attack
time may sound abrupt.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
• Hold — sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking
remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the
threshold level.
• Decay — controls how fast the gate closes once the hold
time has expired. A longer decay time produces a more
natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay of an
instrument to pass through.
For ducking, this determines how soon the ducker returns
to its normal gain after the hold time has expired.
Dynamics library list
Dynamics library list
These are the preset dynamics settings provided by the AW1600. For details on the function of
each parameter, refer to page 182.
005 A.Dr.SN (CMP)
006 A.Dr.SN (EXP)
007 A.Dr.SN (GAT)
008 A.Dr.SN (CPS)
These presets modify preset programs 1 – 4 for use with a
snare drum.
009 A.Dr.Tom (EXP)
Expander for acoustic toms automatically reduces the volume
when the toms are not played, helping to differentiate the
bass and snare drums clearly.
010 A.Dr.OverTop (CPS)
Soft compander to emphasize the attack and ambience of
cymbals using overhead microphones. It automatically
reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played, helping
differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly.
011 E.B.finger (CMP)
Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.
012 E.B.slap (CMP)
Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a slap
electric bass guitar.
013 Syn.Bass (CMP)
Compressor to adjust and/or emphasize the level of a synth
bass.
014 Piano1 (CMP)
015 Piano2 (CMP)
Piano1 brightens the sound to make it stand out slightly.
Piano2 uses a deeper threshold setting, producing a more
consistent overall level and sense of attack.
016 E.Guitar (CMP)
Suitable for electric guitar chording or arpeggios. Try various
adjustments depending on your tone or playing style.
017 A.Guitar (CMP)
Compressor intended for acoustic guitar playing rhythm
chords or arpeggios.
018 Strings1 (CMP)
019 Strings2 (CMP)
020 Strings3 (CMP)
Compressor suitable for strings. Numbers 19 and 20 can also
be used on low-range instruments (cello, contrabass).
021 BrassSection (CMP)
Compressor intended for brass sounds with fast and strong
attack.
022 Syn.Pad (CMP)
This has a restraining effect on sounds that tend to become
diffuse. For example, this is ideal for some rich-sounding
synth pads that conversely lack definition.
023 SamplingPerc (CPS)
024 Sampling BD (CMP)
025 Sampling SN (CMP)
026 Hip Comp (CPS)
It is effective to apply these programs to sampled sounds
(such as from a CD-ROM) that are used among acoustic
instruments, so that they will not seem to lack power and clarity. Four variations are provided; for Perc, BD, SN, and for
looped materials (Hip Comp).
027 Solo Vocal1 (CMP)
028 Solo Vocal2 (CMP)
These are variations that are suitable for solo vocal sources.
029 Chorus (CMP)
This variation of Vocal is suitable for choruses.
030 Compander(H) (CPH)
031 Compander(S) (CPS)
A template for the compander program.
032 Click Erase (EXP)
Expander to remove click track sounds that may bleed out of
the monitor headphones the musicians are using.
033 Announcer (CPH)
Hard compander reduces the level during the interval
between the words, making the voice sound even.
034 Easy Gate (GAT)
A template for the gate program.
035 BGM Ducking (DUK)
Ducking background music for voiceovers, typically keyed
from the announcer’s channel.
036 Limiter 1 (CPS)
037 Limiter 2 (CMP)
A limiter template. 1 has a slow release, and 2 is a peak stopping type.
038 Total Comp1 (CMP)
039 Total Comp2 (CMP)
040 Total Comp3 (CMP)
Since these presets are effective in restraining the overall
level or improving the overall definition, it is useful to apply
them to the stereo output during mixdown. You can apply theses presets to a stereo source, and adjust them to create interesting effects.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
001 A.Dr.BD (CMP)
002 A.Dr.BD (EXP)
003 A.Dr.BD (GAT)
004 A.Dr.BD (CPH)
Use these presets to apply CMP, EXP, GAT, or CPH respectively to the bass drum of an acoustic drum kit.
185
Effects library list
Effects library list
The following table lists the preset effects programs. See “Effects Parameters” (→ p. 188) for
detailed parameter information. Effects programs that use the HQ. PITCH effect can be used
only with Effect 2.
■ Reverb-type Effects
No.
Title
Type
Description
01
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall.
02
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space (room) than REVERB HALL.
03
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed with vocals in mind.
04
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Simulation of a metal-plate reverb unit, producing a feeling of hard-edged reverberation.
05
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
An effect which isolates only the early reflection (ER) component from reverberation.
A flashier effect than reverb is produced.
06
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb.
07
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
A reverse-playback type ER.
■ Delays
No.
Title
Type
Description
08
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Mono delay with simple operation. Use when you don’t need to use complex parameter
settings.
09
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Stereo delay with independent left and right.
10
Mod.delay
MOD.DELAY
Mono delay with modulation.
11
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
Three-tap delay (L, C, R).
12
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control. The signal can be fed back
from left to right, and right to left.
■ Modulation-type Effects
No.
Title
Type
Description
13
Chorus
CHORUS
Three-phase stereo chorus.
14
Flange
FLANGE
The well-known flanging effect.
15
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than chorus.
16
Phaser
PHASER
Stereo phaser with 2–16 stages of phase shift.
17
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right.
18
Tremolo
TREMOLO
Tremolo.
19
HQ.Pitch
HQ.PITCH
(Effect 2 only)
Only one note is pitch-shifted, but a stable effect is produced.
20
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently.
21
Rotary
ROTARY
Simulation of a rotary speaker.
22
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input.
On the AW1600, even the modulation frequency can be controlled by modulation.
23
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the filter.
■ Distortion-type Effects
Appendix
186
No.
Title
Type
Description
24
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion.
25
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar Amp Simulator.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects library list
■ Dynamic Effects
No.
Title
Type
Description
26
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.
27
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.
28
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase shifter. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to
MIDI.
■ Combined Effects
No.
Title
Type
29
Rev+Chorus
30
Rev->Chorus
REV->CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series.
31
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel.
32
Rev->Flange
REV->FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series.
33
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel.
34
Rev->Sympho.
REV->SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series.
35
Rev->Pan
REV->PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in parallel.
36
Delay+ER.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel.
37
Delay->ER.
DELAY->ER.
Delay and early reflections in series.
38
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel.
39
Delay->Rev
DELAY->REV
Delay and reverb in series.
40
Dist->Delay
DIST->DELAY
Distortion and delay in series.
REV+CHORUS
Description
Reverb and chorus in parallel.
■ Other Effects
41
Title
Multi.Filter
Type
MULTI.FILTER
Description
Three-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave).
Appendix
No.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
187
Effects Parameters
Effects Parameters
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.0 s
Reverb time
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.RATIO
0.1 – 2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
E/R DLY
0.0 – 100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL.
0 – 100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = ER, 100% = reverb)
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0 – 120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
0.02 ms – 2.13 s
Gate open time
DECAY
6.0 ms – 46.0 s
Gate closing speed
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ EARLY REF.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1 – 20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0 – 10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1 – 19
Number of early reflections
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
ROOMSIZE
0.1 – 20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0 – 10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1 – 19
Number of early reflections
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
188
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ MONO DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0 – 2730.0 ms
Delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ STEREO DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
FB.G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
DELAY R
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ MOD.DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0 – 2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DELAY LCR
Parameter
Range
Description
0.0 – 2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0 – 2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0 – 2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB.DLY
0.0 – 2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
DELAY L
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
189
Effects Parameters
■ ECHO
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
FB.DLY L
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
DELAY R
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0 – 1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB.G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
L->R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
R->L FBG
–99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ CHORUS
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PM DEP.
0 – 100%
Pitch modulation depth
AM DEP.
0 – 100%
Amp modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ FLANGE
Parameter
Range
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
190
Description
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ SYMPHONIC
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ PHASER
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0 – 100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ AUTOPAN
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L,
Turn R
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
Parameter
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
191
Effects Parameters
■ TREMOLO
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ HQ.PITCH (Effect 2 only)
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1 – 10
Pitch shift precision
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DUAL PITCH
Parameter
PITCH 1
Range
–24 to +24 semitones
Description
Channel 1 pitch shift
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel 1 pitch shift fine
PAN 1
L16–1, C, R1–16
Channel 1 panpot
DELAY 1
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Channel 1 delay time
FB.G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel 1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
Channel 1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel 2 pitch shift
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel 2 pitch shift fine
PAN 2
L16–1, C, R1–16
Channel 2 panpot
DELAY 2
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Channel 2 delay time
FB.G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel 2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel 2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
MODE
1 – 10
Pitch shift precision
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ ROTARY
Parameter
ROTATE
Appendix
192
Range
STOP, START
Description
Rotation stop, start
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
DRIVE
0 – 100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0 – 10
Accelation at speed changes
LOW
0 – 100
Low-frequency filter
HIGH
0 – 100
High-frequency filter
SLOW
0.05 – 10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05 – 10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ RING MOD.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ
0.0 – 5000.0 Hz
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
FM DEPTH
0 – 100%
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ MOD.FILTER
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET
0 – 100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0 – 20
Filter resonance
PHASE
0.00 – 354.38°
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
LEVEL
0 – 100
Output level
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DISTORTION
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0 – 100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0 – 100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
N.GATE
0 – 20
Noise reduction
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ AMP SIMULATE
Range
Description
STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH,
MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,
CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI,
FLAT
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
N.GATE
0 – 20
Noise reduction
DRIVE
0 – 100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0 – 100
Master volume
CAB DEP
0 – 100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
BASS
0 – 100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
0 – 100
Middle tone control
TREBLE
0 – 100
High tone control
EQ F
99 – 8.0 kHz
Parametric equalizer frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10.0 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer bandwidth
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
Parameter
AMP TYPE
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
193
Effects Parameters
■ DYNA.FILTER
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE
0 – 100
Sensitivity
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
OFFSET
0 – 100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0 – 20
Filter resonance
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
6.0 ms – 46.0 s
Filter frequency change decay speed
LEVEL
0 – 100
Output Level
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DYNA.FLANGE
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE
0 – 100
Sensitivity
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0 – 100
Delay time offset
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
6.0 ms – 46.0 s
Decay speed
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Parametric equalizer center frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10 – 0.10
Parametric equalizer band width
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DYNA.PHASER
Parameter
Range
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity
SENSE
0 – 100
Sensitivity
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0 – 100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
6.0 ms – 46.0 s
Decay speed
LSH F
21.2 – 8.00 k [Hz]
Low-shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
Low-shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 – 16.0 k [Hz]
High-shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 [dB]
High-shelving filter gain
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
194
Description
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ REV+CHORUS
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PM DEP.
0 – 100%
Pitch modulation depth
AM DEP.
0 – 100%
Amp modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV/CHO
0 – 100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0% = chorus, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ REV->CHORUS
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PM DEP.
0 – 100%
Pitch modulation depth
AM DEP.
0 – 100%
Amp modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV.BAL
0 – 100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = chorused reverb, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ REV+FLANGE
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV/FLG
0 – 100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% = flange, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
MOD.DLY
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
195
Effects Parameters
■ REV->FLANGE
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV.BAL
0 – 100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = flanged reverb, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ REV+SYMPHO.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV/SYM
0 – 100%
Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = symphonic, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ REV->SYMPHO.
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
Reverb time
MOD.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
REV.BAL
0 – 100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = symphonic reverb, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
196
Description
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ REV->PAN
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L,
Turn R
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
REV BAL.
0 – 100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = panned reverb, 100% = reverb)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DELAY+ER.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
DELAY R
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1 – 20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0 – 10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1 – 19
Number of early reflections
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER
0 – 100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = early reflections, 100% = delay)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
HPF
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
197
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY->ER.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
DELAY R
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1 – 20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0 – 10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1 – 19
Number of early reflections
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0 – 100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = early reflected delay, 100% = delay)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DELAY+REV
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1 – 1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
Reverb time
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/REV
0 – 100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% = reverb, 100% = delay)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ DELAY->REV
Parameter
DELAY L
Appendix
198
Range
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Description
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY
0.0 – 1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1 – 1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
REV TIME
0.3 – 99.9 s
Reverb time
INI.DLY
0.0 – 500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0 – 10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)
DENSITY
0 – 100%
Reverb density
HPF
Thru, 21.2 Hz – 8.0 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0 – 100%
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = delayed reverb, 100% = delay)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ DIST->DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0 – 100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0 – 100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N.GATE
0 – 20
Noise reduction
DELAY
0.0 – 2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI.RATIO
0.1 – 1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05 – 40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0 – 100%
Modulation depth
DLY BAL
0 – 100%
Distortion and delay balance (0% = distortion, 100% = delayed distortion)
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
■ MULTI FILTER
Range
Description
TYPE 1
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
TYPE 2
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
TYPE 3
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: low pass, high pass, band pass
FREQ. 1
28 Hz – 16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
FREQ. 2
28 Hz – 16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
FREQ. 3
28 Hz – 16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 1
0 – 100
Filter 1 level
LEVEL 2
0 – 100
Filter 2 level
LEVEL 3
0 – 100
Filter 3 level
RESO. 1
0 – 20
Filter 1 resonance
RESO. 2
0 – 20
Filter 2 resonance
RESO. 3
0 – 20
Filter 3 resonance
MIX BAL.
0 – 100 [%]
Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds
Appendix
Parameter
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
199
Sample library list
Sample library list
This is a list of the sample libraries that are installed on the internal hard disk when the AW1600
is shipped from the factory.
L : LOOP
O : ONESHOT
– : No assigns
PAD1
PAD2
PAD3
PAD4
Name
A
Appendix
200
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
060Normal16
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
060Normal8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
060NormShffl
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
064RnBsmooth
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
065Triplet
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
080Latin16
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
089Syncopatn
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
090MedSlow8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
093Bounce8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
093Southern
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
094Gangsta
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
096Hip
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
102OldSkool2
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
106BreakRock
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
106HipFunk
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
106OldSkool
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
108Funk1
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
108Funk2
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
110Med8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
110NJS
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
114Simple16
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
118LoudFunk
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
120Normal16
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
120Normal8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
120NormShffl
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
125Simple8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
126BigBeat
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
126LatinRock
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
127Shffle16
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
128FlipHop
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
–
–
–
128GarageHs
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
129Detroit
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
–
–
–
130Latin8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
130Shuffle8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
134TecLectro
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
135_2Step
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
135Ibiza
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
135TrncHouse
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
137SambaEns
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Sample library list
PAD1
PAD2
PAD3
PAD4
Name
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
140MedFast8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
140Techno
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
147Drumn_Bs
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
154LatinSwng
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
170Fast8
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
Bang_Explosn
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Bell_Beep
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Birds
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Car_Action
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
City_Noise
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Dog_Cat
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Door_Action
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Female_Dry
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Female_Wet
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Fire
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
Guns
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Hit_Swish
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Human_Action
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Jungle_Amb
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
Laser_Buzz
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Male_Dry
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Night_Amb
O
O
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
Other_Rides
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Punch_Swish
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Rain1
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
Rain2
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
L
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
River
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
Robot_Voice
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Scratch1
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Scratch2
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
SE_Analog
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
SE_Beep
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
SE_SFX
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
L
L
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
Storm
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
–
–
Appendix
Sea
Stock_Farm
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
201
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on, operation not
possible
■ Power does not turn on
■ Input sound is not output
• Is the signal from the external device being input?
• The connection cable from the external device may be
broken.
• Is the AC adaptor connected to an AC outlet of the correct
voltage?
• Are cables connected to both the MIC/LINE INPUT 8
XLR/TRS connector and the HI-Z connector?
• Is the POWER switch turned ON?
• Is the [GAIN] knob set to an appropriate level?
• If the power still does not turn on, please contact your
Yamaha dealer.
• Is the input channel fader raised? Is it turned on?
■ LCD display is dim or dark
• Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the
screen to adjust the contrast.
■ Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control onscreen parameters
• The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN.
• When recording, is the recording-destination track fader
(which adjusts the monitor level) raised?
→ If you are recording, the sound of that input channel will not
be heard during playback.
■ Recorded sound is not output
• The [JOG ON] key may be on.
• Has audio data been recorded on the recorder?
• Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states,
such as while the recorder is running.
• Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded?
No sound
■ No sound, or sound is too faint
• Are speakers or headphones connected correctly?
• Is your amp and other external devices turned on?
• Are you using connection cables with built-in resistors?
• Does the stereo output channel meter move?
• Is the stereo output channel fader raised? Is it turned on?
• The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value.
• The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme threshold or ratio.
• If you are connecting an electric guitar, is it connected to
the Hi-Z jack?
• Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or VIEW screen raised?
→ Check the level (meter movement) in the METER page of
the VIEW screen.
→ If you press the [SEL] key in the MONITOR screen INIT
page, that channel will be initialized to default values that
allow sound to be output.
→ If DIGITAL IN is set to other than DISABLE in the UTILITY
screen D.IN HDD page, and no signal is being input to the
DIGITAL INPUT jack, a message of “WRONG WORD
CLOCK” will appear, and sound will not be output.
• A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played
back.
• Tracks 1–16 will not play back if the AW1600 is in Stereo
Track, Sound Clip, or Audio CD playback mode.
■ Can’t play back the STEREO track
• Is the stereo track turned on in the MONITOR screen
ST.TRACK page?
■ Metronome cannot be heard
• The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONITOR OUT and headphones.
• The metronome will not sound while the recorder is
stopped.
• In Sound Clip mode, the metronome will sound only during recording.
Can’t record, something is wrong with
the recorded sound
■ Can’t record
• Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk?
→ You can check the remaining recordable time by setting the
counter display to REMAIN in the SONG screen SETUP
page.
• The song may be protected.
• The stereo track may be in playback mode.
• Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder?
• Check the recording-source and recording-destination in
the QUICK NAVIGATE page RECORD screen?
• DIGITAL REC may have been turned OFF in the UTILITY screen D.IN•HDD page.
• Please read and understand the copyright warning (→ p. 6)
before using digital input signals.
Appendix
202
■ Can’t record on the STEREO track
• It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while
recording on other tracks.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
■ Noise is present in the recorded signal
• The oscillator may be functioning.
• Does the word clock setting match for the AW1600 and
the external device(s)?
• Go to the RECORD screen in the Quick Navigate section
and check the recording-source and recording-destination.
■ Can’t select a record track
• The number of 24-bit song tracks that can be recorded or
played simultaneously is limited.
Something wrong with the sound
■ Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud
• A conventional line-level signal may be connected to the
Hi-Z jack.
■ Sound is distorted
• The fader may be set to PRE FADE in AUX.
■ Pairing was specified, but the signal is monaural
• Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and the evennumbered channel panned far right?
■ Pairing was specified, but the signal phase
does not match
• Even when channels are paired, the phase setting is not
linked.
■ Signal is delayed
• An effect such as delay may be inserted.
■ Can’t use the internal effects
• Effect BYPASS may be turned ON.
• The effect may have been inserted into a different channel.
• Are the level of EFF.RTN 1, 2 faders raised?
• Is the [GAIN] knob set correctly?
• 019. HQ. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 2.
• The connection cable from the external device may be
broken.
• These do not affect the stereo track, sound clip, or audio
CD playback.
• The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be
raised excessively.
• The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively.
• The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised excessively.
• The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to produce an extreme gain boost.
• Did you record at an appropriate level?
→ Go to the VIEW screen METER page and check the level
(meter movement).
• Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW1600 and
the external device(s)?
• An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in
use.
■ The volume of a particular channel
increases or decreases
• Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate?
• A scene recall may be specified in the SONG screen
TEMPO page.
■ Can’t store a scene
• The store-destination scene may be protected.
■ Playback pitch is wrong
• VARI PITCH may be adjusted.
• Is the synchronized external device operating on the same
sampling frequency (44.1 kHz)?
• Is the master device operating in a stable way?
• You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH command.
• Is an effect such as HQ.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a
monitor channel?
■ A small amount of noise is produced when a
song is played back on a different AW1600
unit
• A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings
and ends of audio regions when a song created on an
AW1600 unit with Version 1.1 firmware is played back on
an AW1600 with Version 1.0 firmware. Please update all
AW1600 units you are using to the latest firmware version. Information on the latest firmware version as well as
update procedure can be found at the internet address
below.
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
• A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00.
• One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe.
■ Can’t save to a library
• It is not possible to save to the factory-preset libraries.
■ Meters move even though the faders are
lowered
• The meter display may be set to PRE FADER.
■ Moving a fader does not change the level
• In the VIEW screen FADER page, check whether the display moves in correspondence with fader operations.
→ You cannot control the level until the panel fader position
matches the position shown in the display.
• In the UTILITY screen PREFER page, is FADER FLIP
set appropriately?
Recorder operations
■ When you press the [PLAY] key it blinks,
and playback does not occur
• Is the AW1600 set to MTC SLAVE?
→ Access the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, and check the setting.
■ Something goes wrong with the sound
when you use the [FF] key or [REW] key
• Differences in the number of simultaneously played tracks
will affect the way in which the sound is heard when these
controls are operated.
■ Can’t edit a recorded track
Appendix
■ Can’t reproduce a scene
• The song may be protected.
• Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?
→ When the power is turned on, FADER FLIP will be set to
TRACK.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
203
Troubleshooting
■ Editing results are not heard in the sound
• Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?
• Are you using the appropriate editing command?
■ Counter display is not 0 when you return to
the beginning of the song
• The display mode may be set to REMAIN (remaining
recording time).
• If the display mode is set to REL (relative time), the start
point may be specified.
→ Go to the SONG screen SETUP, POINT page and check the
settings.
■ Display indicates DISK FULL, MEMORY
FULL, or REGION FULL, and you cannot
record or edit
• There is insufficient free space, or too many recording
regions. Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Optimize operation to obtain more free space.
• If the “DISK FULL” message appears, erase unneeded
songs, sample libraries, or WAV files located under the
“Transport” folder. The WAV files under the “Transport”
folder can be erased from your computer when the USB
Storage mode is engaged.
■ The display indicates DISK BUSY during
playback
• The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read
speed is significantly reduced. It might be necessary to
backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re-initialize the hard disk.
Sampler operations
■ When you press a pad there is no sound, or
the wrong bank is heard
• Have you selected a bank to which the waveform is
assigned?
• A bank change may have been specified in the SONG
screen TEMPO page.
■ The sound is not what you loaded, or the
sound is different depending on whether
you are stopped or playing
• If the playback mode is set to LOOP, the sound will play
according to the monitor tempo specified in the SAMPLE
screen SETUP page while the recorder is stopped, and
will play according to the song tempo while the recorder is
playing.
■ The sound you loaded only plays part of the
way
• Have you made trim settings to shorten the Start–End
region?
• If the playback mode is set to GATE, the sample will play
only while you continue pressing the pad.
Appendix
204
• If the playback mode is set to LOOP and Slice is turned
off, the sample will play only for the length of a measure.
■ The display indicates MEMORY FULL, and
you can’t import
• Access the SAMPLE screen MEMORY page, and check
the amount of used memory. Execute ERASE or
EXTRACT to increase the amount of free memory.
■ WAV files to be imported are not displayed
• Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from
the song? 16-bit WAV files will not be displayed for a 24bit song, and 24-bit WAV files will not be displayed for a
16-bit song. WAV files with sampling frequency other than
44.1 kHz will also not be displayed.
MIDI operations
■ Can’t exchange MIDI data
• Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly?
• A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken.
• Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving
devices?
• Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and
receiving devices?
• Have the appropriate settings been made in the UTILITY
screen MIDI 1/2 pages?
→ Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1/2) in the MIDI 1 page.
• Is a scene assigned to the program change number being
transmitted?
• If a USB connection is being used, is the required USBMIDI driver properly installed on your computer?
■ MTC messages are not transmitted
• In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, has the MTC button
been turned on?
• Is MTC SYNC set to MASTER?
■ The AW1600 does not synchronize to
incoming MTC messages
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?
• In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, has MTC MODE
been set to SLAVE?
• Is the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1/2) selected in the UTILITY screen
MIDI 1 page?
■ MTC synchronization drifts
• Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.) being received
together with the MTC messages?
• Does the frame rate match between the AW1600 and the
external device?
• In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, the OFST (offset)
may have been set.
• If jumps occur in the synchronized time, change the
AVRG setting in the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, and
try again.
■ MMC messages is not transmitted
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector?
• In the UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page, has MMC MODE
been set to MASTER? Does the DEVICE NO. match?
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
■ Can’t receive MMC messages
• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?
• In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page, has MMC MODE
been set to SLAVE? Does the DEVICE NO. match?
■ Can’t use the preset remote settings
• Depending on the sequencer that you want to control, you
may need to make settings on the sequencer. For details,
refer to page 209.
• Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,
USB connector port 1/2) in the UTILITY screen MIDI 1
page.
Song operations
■ Can’t save a file
• Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk to create
a new song?
• Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure when
you last turned off the power?
→ Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown
operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CDRW drive, may damage the hard disk and CD-RW drive and
disc, and may result in loss of data.
• Is the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical
shock?
■ AW2816 backup files cannot be saved
• Songs with a large data size cannot be saved. Try executing the Optimize function from the SONG screen LIST
page.
■ Song file size is unnaturally large
• Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a
track or other data, that sound file will remain on the disk.
Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST
page.
CD operations
■ Can’t create an audio CD
• Is CD-R/RW media inserted?
• The inserted CD-R may have already been finalized.
WAV File Transfer To and From a
Computer
■ The computer doesn’t recognize the
AW1600 hard disk
• Is the USB cable properly connected?
• Is your computer running the appropriate operating system?
→ Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or higher, or
Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Operation is not guaranteed with
other operating systems.
• Is the USB storage mode turned ON?
■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the computer to the Transport folder
• Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from
the song? Have you copied WAV files with sampling frequency other than 44.1 kHz?
■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the computer to the Audio folder
• Did you change the bit depth of the WAV file when editing
it with waveform editing software?
→ For 24-bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in
32-bit WAV file format.
• Have you changed the file name?
• Did you copy the file(s) to a different folder?
■ Can’t copy files from the computer
• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.
■ An error message appears when disconnecting the AW1600 from a Windows computer
• Before turning the USB storage mode OFF, remove the
device via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the
taskbar.
• Close all AW1600 windows before removing the device
via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon.
Pitch Fix operations
■ Can’t hear any pitch change?
• Is a signal recorded on the stereo track?
• Make sure that RATE is NOT set to “000.”
• The stereo track must be at least four seconds long.
• Make sure that BYPASS is off.
■ An audio CD you created does not play back
on a conventional player
• An audio CD you created you not play back on a conventional player unless the disc has been finalized.
■ Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not
play back on some players
• In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media to be
played back, the player must support CD-RW. Contact the
manufacturer of the player regarding CD-RW support.
■ The voice is not recognized
• When the voice is high, set TYPE to FEMALE; when it is
low, set TYPE to MALE.
■ Pitch correction doesn’t sound right
• In some cases, pitch correction may sound unnatural —
especially for parts sung with vibrato. To make the pitchcorrected vocal sound more natural and subtle, set
DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a relatively slow value.
Appendix
• Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been
recorded?
■ The sound skips while playing an audio CD
that you created
• Depending on the CD-R media you use, there may be differences in the quality of the completed CD.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
205
Display message list
Display message list
■ Messages
Appendix
A/B POINTS NOT FOUND
Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A/B points are not specified.
CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE
Mute cannot be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be
exceedced.
CANNOT REDO!
Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible.
CANNOT SET MARK
It is not possible to specify a mark at an already-specified position.
CANNOT UNDO!
Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible.
CD PLAY MODE NOW
Since the AW1600 is in CD Play mode, this operation cannot be executed.
CH. PARAMETER INITIALIZED
The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized.
DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE
MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received.
DISK BUSY!!
The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough, or the reading
speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented.
DISK FULL!!
There is insufficient space on the internal hard disk.
IN/OUT POINTS NOT FOUND
Auto-punch recording cannot be performed because in/out points are not specified.
IN/OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER
In/out points are set in wrong order.
IN/OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE
The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. It cannot be set less than approximately
100 msec.
LIBRARY: FOR EFFECT2 ONLY.
The selected parameter is for Effect 2 only.
LIBRARY: PROTECTED.
The selected parameter is protected.
LIBRARY: READ ONLY.
The selected parameter is read-only.
LOCATE POINT ERASED
The locate point has been erased.
LOCATE POINT SET
The locate point has been set.
MARK POINT ERASED
The mark has been erased.
MARK POINT SET
The mark has been set.
MEMORY FULL!!
There is no more free space in sampling pad memory.
MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR!
Invalid MIDI data may have been received.
MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN!
Invalid MIDI data may have been received.
MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL!
Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle.
MIDI: TX BUFFER FULL!
Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle.
MTC SLAVE MODE NOW
Since the AW1600 is in MTC Slave mode, this operation cannot be executed.
NO MARK LEFT
The allowable number of marks has been exceeded.
RECORD TRACK NOT SELECTED
Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track.
RECORDER BUSY!
The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating.
RECORDER RUNNING NOW
Since the recorder is recording or playing, this operation cannot be executed.
REDO COMPLETED
Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed.
REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE
The repeat interval is too short. It cannot be set to less than one second.
SELECTED PAD NOT ASSIGNED.
No sample is assigned to the selected pad.
SOUND CLIP MODE NOW
Since the AW1600 is in Sound Clip mode, this operation cannot be executed.
STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE
Since the AW1600 is in Stereo Track Playback mode, this operation cannot be executed.
THIS SONG IS PROTECTED.
This song is protected, and cannot be edited or recorded.
TOO MANY REGIONS!!
The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.
UNDO COMPLETED
Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed.
USB STORAGE MODE NOW
Since the AW1600 is in USB Storage mode, this operation cannot be executed.
WRONG WORD CLOCK
An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to which
you are synchronizing.
* A “region” is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.
206
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Display message list
ALL Song Data Corrupt!
Format INT.HDD.
The file system is corrupt. The internal hard disk will be initialized.
Audio Data Too Short!
The sample is too short.
Buffer Underrun!
A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD.
CD Import Prohibited!
Enable DIGITAL REC.
Can’t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited.
CD or HD Access Error!
An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD-RW drive.
CD-RW Drive Not Found!
A problem occurred with the CD-RW drive.
Change Media,
Different Archive ID!
The medium contains the wrong backup file. Insert the correct medium.
Change Media,
Wrong Media Order!
Please exchange the media. The order of media volumes is incorrect.
Compare Error!
The data was not written correctly.
Corrupt File!
The file is corrupt.
Data Mismatch Found!
A data mismatch has been found in the song.
Data Too Long!
No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been exceeded.
End of Archive File Not Found!
The end of the backup file cannot be located.
End Range Over!
The operation could not be executed, since the end of the song would be later than
24 hours.
Erase CD-RW Media?
Is it OK to erase the CD-RW media?
File in Use!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is in use.
File List Full!
The file list is full and cannot be appended.
File Name Already Exists!
The specified file name already exists. Use a different file name.
File Number Full!
No more songs can be created or restored, since this would exceed the maximum
number of files.
File Size Exceeds Limit!
The file is too large to be saved.
HD Full!
The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data.
HD Status is Out Of Range!
The hard disk reliability status (the number of past errors) has exceeded the
threshold. Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possible.
HDD Error!
A problem occurred with the internal hard disk.
Illegal/Unsupported Media!
An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted.
Insert Next Media #***.
Insert medium number ***.
Invalid Parameter!
The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range.
Invalid Region!
An invalid region has been specified.
Marker Interval Under 4 sec!
Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds, you
cannot divide it with a marker.
Media Too Small. Cannot Save!
The medium does not have enough space available to save the data.
No Data!
The selected region does not contain data.
No File!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because no file is found.
No Media!
Media has not been inserted.
No Pad Memory!
There is no more free space in sampling pad memory.
No Region!
No region* is found.
No Song to Write!
No songs to write to the CD have been selected.
No Stereo Track!
There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds.
Not 44.1kHz/16Bit Song!
The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44.1 kHz/16-bit song.
Number Ejected Media,
Insert Blank Media.
Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to, then insert a
blank medium.
Number of Media Exceeds Limit!
The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been
exceeded.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
■ Popup messages
207
Display message list
Protected!
Can’t edit the file because it is protected.
Read-Only File!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is read-only.
Region Full!
The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.
Selected Pad Not Assigned.
No sample is assigned to the selected pad.
Song Data Corrupt!
Load Another Song.
The song data is corrupt. A different song will be loaded.
Song Too Large to Export!
The song file is too large to be exported.
System Error!
An internal system error has occurred.
This Song is Protected!
Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the song is protected.
Too Many CD Tracks!
No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks
has been exceeded.
Track Not Recorded!
The track you selected does not contain any recorded data.
Wav File Link Error!
Delete Wrong Data?
A portion of the song data is corrupt. Erase the corrupt data?
If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key, the corrupt
portion of the song will be erased. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button
and press the [ENTER] key, another song will be loaded instead.
Wave File Link Error!
A WAV file link error has been found.
Wrong Bit Depth!
The bit depth of the selected file is incorrect.
Wrong File Format!
The selected file is not PCM format.
Wrong HD Format!
The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted. The disk cannot be formatted from a
computer.
Wrong Number of Channels!
The number of channels in the selected file is incorrect.
Wrong Sampling Frequency!
The sampling rate of the selected file is incorrect.
Wrong Wav Chunk Data!
The WAV file’s chunk data is incorrect.
Wrong Wav File!
The WAV file cannot be used.
* A “region” is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.
Appendix
208
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
Installing USB MIDI driver
• The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive
copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual
in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden
without the written consent of the manufacturer.
• Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with
regard to the use of the software and documentation and
cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of
this manual and the software.
• This disk is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disk
on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irreparable damage to your audio CD player.
• Future upgrades of application and system software and
any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.
Contents of the CD-ROM
The included CD-ROM contains a backup file that you
can use to restore the AW1600 to its factory-set condition,
setting files that let you use the AW1600’s MIDI Remote
function with various DAW software, and a USB MIDI
driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmission and reception via the USB connector.
Folder/
file name
Software name
Demo song
AW16_000.TAR
Sample library
Backup file for restoring the
internal hard disk to its factory-set condition.
Cubase/Nuendo
remote setup file
Setting file for remotely controlling the Cubase/Nuendo
software from the AW1600.
Logic preference file
Setting file for remotely controlling the Logic software
from the AW1600.
SONAR template file
(Windows only)
Setting file for remotely
controlling the SONAR software from the AW1600.
Remote
USBdrv_
Contents
Yamaha USB MIDI
Driver
If you are connecting the AW1600 to your computer via a
USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception,
you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver.
■ System Requirements
OS: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or
higher, or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
■ Installing on Windows XP
1
Start your computer to launch Windows, then
log in as Administrator.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click
“Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed.
3
Go to [System Hardware] ➝ [Driver signatures] ➝ [Driver signature options], select
“Ignore — Install software without asking for
confirmation,” and then click [OK].
4
Click [OK] to close the “System Properties”
window, and then click the Close button to
close the “Control Panel” window.
5
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
6
First, make sure the POWER switch on the
AW1600 is set to STANDBY, then use a USB
cable to connect the USB connector of the
computer to the USB connector of the
AW1600. When the AW1600 is turned on, the
computer automatically displays the “Found
New Hardware Wizard.”
7
If the “Can Windows connect to Windows
Update to search for software?” is displayed,
select “No, not this time”, and then click
[Next].
8
Select “Install software automatically (recommended) (I),” and then click [Next].
The system starts the installation.
Driver file for exchanging
MIDI messages between
the AW1600 and a computer via a USB cable.
NOTE
• Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen.
Appendix
Special Notices
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
209
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
9
When the installation is complete, the system
displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Finish].
5
Click [Continue].
The “Select a Destination” is displayed.
6
Select a destination for the driver installation,
then click [Continue].
The message “Installing this software requires 100MB
of disk space” may appear. However, the actual
required free disk space is 2MB.
7
A window opens, displaying the message
“Click install to perform a basic installation of
this software.” Click [Install].
If the driver has already been installed, the [Upgrade]
button is displayed instead of the [Install] button.
The driver is installed, and message “The software
was successfully installed” is displayed.
8
Click the [Close] button.
The driver installation is complete.
You can check the following locations to confirm that
the driver has been installed:
NOTE
• Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this
screen after the installation is complete.
10 Restart the computer.
The driver has been installed.
■ Installing on Macintosh computer
1
Start your computer, then log in as Administrator.
To confirm that the Administrator account is available,
select [System Preferences], then [Users (Account)].
2
Double-click the “USBdrv_” folder on the
included CD-ROM.
3
Double-click “YAMAHA USB-MIDI Driver
v1.*****.mpkg” (***** represents the version
number).
An “Authenticate” window opens, prompting the password.
If the window does not prompt you to enter the password, click the lock icon.
• Library ➝ Audio ➝ MIDI Drivers ➝
YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver.plugin
• Library ➝ PreferencePanes ➝
YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch.prefPane
4
Enter the password for the Administrator’s
account. If you have not set the password,
click [OK].
The “Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver
Installer” window is displayed.
Appendix
210
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
Restoring the internal hard disk to the
factory-set condition
5
Move the cursor to the PAD button and press
the [ENTER] key.
Once again, loading from the CD-ROM will begin.
When loading is finished, the contents of the display
will change as follows.
6
Move the cursor to the ALL button and press
the [ENTER] key.
7
Move the cursor to the DISABLE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The DISPLAY button will change to ENABLE, and all
symbols at the right of the list will change to ●.
This selects all songs and sample libraries.
8
Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
9
A popup window will ask you for confirmation, so move the cursor to the OK button or
CANCEL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
While the Restore operation is being executed, the
state of progress will be shown in a popup window.
When this popup window closes, the operation has
been completed.
In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory-set
condition, you will need to perform the following two procedures.
A Initialize the internal hard disk
B Load the demo song and sample library
■ Initializing the internal hard disk
Initialize the internal hard disk. (→ p. 168)
When you initialize the internal hard disk, the system settings will return to their factory-set state.
NOTE
• Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard
disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend you to
backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing this operation.
■ Loading the demo song and sample library
You can load the demo song and sample library from the
included CD-ROM to restore the AW1600 to its factoryset condition.
1
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-RW
drive of the AW1600.
2
In the Work Navigate section, repeatedly
press the [CD] key to access the CD screen
RESTORE page.
3
Make sure that the cursor is located at the
READ CD INFO button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Loading from the CD-ROM will begin. When loading
is finished, the contents of the display will change as
follows.
Installing a remote file
■ Supported DAW software
• Windows
•
•
•
•
Logic Platinum 5.5.1 (*1)
Cubase SX 3.0.1
Nuendo 3.0.1
Sonar 4.0.1 Producer Edition
• Macintosh
Move the cursor to the DISABLE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The DISABLE button will change to ENABLE, and
the symbol at the right of the list will change to ●.
Logic Pro 7.0.1 (*1)
Cubase SX 3.0.1
Nuendo 3.0.1
Protools TDM 6.7 (*2)
*1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the
AW1600’s faders/[TRACK SEL] keys/transport keys to the
Logic key commands. Track assignments must be made
within Logic as appropriate for your system.
*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For
details on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
4
•
•
•
•
211
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
■ Windows users
NOTE
5
6
Click the [Import] button.
7
Close the Device Setup window.
Fader and [TRACK SEL] key operations can be used
to control Cubase/Nuendo audio tracks. Create new
projects with more than 16 audio tracks.
• In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be
installed.
• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in
the explanation below may differ depending on the software you
are using.
A dialog box like the following will appear.
Select the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file
(Yamaha AW1600 Remote.xml) from the
included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button.
● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote
setup file
1
2
Start up Cubase/Nuendo.
3
The Device Setup window will appear. Select
[Add Device] ➝ [Generic Remote].
In the menu bar, select [Devices] menu ➝
[Device Setup...].
● Installing the Logic preference file
1
2
4
The Generic Remote setting display will
appear. Set the “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output” filed.
MIDI Output : your MIDI output device
MIDI Input : your MIDI input device
Start up Logic.
In the menu bar, select [Options] menu ➝
[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].
3
The Key Commands window will open. In the
menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key
Commands...].
4
A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic
preference file (Logic32.prf) from the included
CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button.
When you import the file, the following settings will
be made.
NOTE
Appendix
212
• The content that is shown for “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output”
will depend on the MIDI device(s) you are using. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for the MIDI device(s) you are
using.
* Please note that all the previously-specified key commands will be initialized. If you do not want to change
your existing user key command settings, you can manually make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown
above.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
● Installing the SONAR template file
1
2
3
4
Copy the SONAR template file from the
included CD-ROM to the folder in which
SONAR is installed.
■ Macintosh users
NOTE
• In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be
installed.
Start up SONAR.
• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in
the explanation below may differ depending on the software you
are using.
In the menu bar, select [File] menu ➝ [Open].
The “Open file” dialog box will appear.
Choose Cakewalk template files as the type of
file to be loaded. From the list in the dialog
box, choose “Yamaha AW1600 Remote” and
click the [OK] button.
● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote
setup file
For Cubase/Nuendo, the procedure is the same as for
the Windows version. (→ p. 212).
5
In the menu bar, select [Option] ➝
[MIDI Devices].
● Installing the Logic Pro preference file
6
The MIDI Ports window will open. In the Input
Ports field, assign the MIDI device that you
are using.
1
2
Start up Logic Pro.
3
The Key Commands window will open. In the
menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key
Commands].
4
A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic
preference file (Logic Preferences) from the
included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button.
When you import the file, the following settings will
be made.
With the Yamaha AW1600 Remote template started,
click the [CONFIG] button in the StudioWare panel
window. A cluster will open at the right.
Drag the [SET MIDI First Track] knob to the first
track number of the MIDI tracks.
* If you use this template, you will not be able to control
the tracks correctly from the AW1600 unless the MIDI
tracks are continuous from 1 – 16.
* If you set the value to an invalid track (an unused track),
the panel knobs, buttons, or sliders may be shaded. If
this occurs, set the value back to the correct track.
* Please note that all the previously-specified key commands will be initialized. If you do not want to change
your existing user key command settings, you can manually make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown
above.
Appendix
If you changed the track structure from the
default settings of the template ...
In the menu bar, select [Logic Pro] menu ➝
[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
213
About the CD-ROM included with the AW1600
● Setting Pro Tools remote control
You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the
AW1600. No special setting file is required. Use the following procedure to make settings.
1
In the menu bar, select [Setup] ➝
[Peripherals...].
2
The Peripherals window will open. Click the
[MIDI Controllers] button.
In the MIDI Controllers window, make the following
settings. In the Receive From field and the Send To
field, specify the MIDI device you are using.
Type
#1
CS-10
Receive From
Your MIDI input
device
Send To
Your MIDI output
device
#ch’s
16
This completes preparations for using the AW1600’s
MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools software.
Appendix
214
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
MIDI data format
MIDI data format
1. Functions
2. MIDI data flow diagram
1.1. Scene Change
The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify
the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is
received.
The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify
the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled. If
more than one program number has been assigned to that scene
memory number, the lowest-numbered program number will be
transmitted.
MTC SLAVE
USB-1 IN
MTC (MTC Slave)
USB-2 IN
EFF MIDI
NOTE ON/OFF (Effect Control)
MIDI IN
PGM CHG
PROGRAM CHANGE (Scene Recall)
CTRL CHG
CONTROL CHANGE (Parameter Edit)
MMC SLAVE
MMC (Transport Control)
1.2. MMC Control
LEARN
Channel Message/Exclusive Message
(MIDI REMOTE Learn)
These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP/
PLAY/REC/LOCATE.
If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER, MMC
commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the
transport. If you select MMC SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate according to the received MMC commands.
PROGRAM
CHANGE
1.3. Effect Control
CONTROL
CHANGE
THRU
USB-2 OUT
Depending on the type of effect, note-on/off messages can be used
for control.
These settings are made for the parameters of each effect.
REMOTE
Transport
1.4. Pitch Fix Control
REMOTE
Fader/Sel
SW1
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
CTRL CHG
SW2
SW3
MMC MASTER
SW4
MIDI OUT (MTC)
SW4
MMC
1.5. MIDI Clock transmission
If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK, MIDI clock messages can be
transmitted during playback or recording.
In MIDI Clock transmission mode, Song Position Pointer and Start/
Stop/Continue commands will also be issued, and during playback or
recording, MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI
Tempo Map.
PGM CHG
MTC
MIDI OUT (CLK)
SW1 : REMOTE OFF
SW2 : REMOTE ON (Remote)
SW3 : REMOTE ON
SW4 : REMOTE OFF or
REMOTE ON (Normal)
MIDI
CLOCK
1.6. MTC transmission (MTC Master)
3. AW1600 settings and operation
If you set MIDI OUT to MTC, MTC can be transmitted during playback or recording.
3.1. MIDI Setup
1.7. MTC reception (MTC Slave)
If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate
in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN
connector.
Set basic MIDI operation.
3.1.1. MIDI OUT
Turn on/off the MIDI output other than MTC/MIDI CLOCK.
3.1.2. IN PORT
1.8. Realtime control of parameters
Specify the input port for MIDI communication.
Control changes can be used to send/receive internal parameters in
realtime.
3.1.3. OUT PORT
1.9. MIDI Remote
3.1.4. THRU
The faders, SEL keys, and RTZ / FF / REW / STOP / PLAY / REC
keys can be used to control an external MIDI device.
In PRESET mode, operating the above controllers will transmit
MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW1600.
In USER mode, operating the above controllers will transmit the
MIDI data that you specify.
Set the MIDI through function.
Specify the output port for MIDI communication.
3.1.5. SYNC OUT
Turn on/off the output of MTC/MIDI CLOCK.
3.1.6. MMC MODE
Select whether the AW1600 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE.
3.1.7. MMC Dev.
Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiving MMC commands.
3.1.8. MTC SYNC MODE
Select whether the AW1600 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE.
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged, note-on/off messages can be
used to control pitches.
USB-1 OUT
215
MIDI data format
5. MIDI format details
3.1.9. MTC SYNC AVERAGE
When the AW1600 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting
specifies how it will follow the MTC data. Set this to 0 if the incoming MTC data has a highly accurate timing; set this to 1 or 2 if the
timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate (such as when
receiving MTC from a software sequencer).
3.1.10. MTC SYNC OFFSET
When the AW1600 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting
adds an offset to the received MTC data. The received time code
value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated
by the internal time code of the AW1600.
5.1. NOTE OFF (8n)
< Reception >
Received when [Rx CH] matches.
Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer NOTE ON for details.
STATUS
DATA
5.2. NOTE ON (9n)
< Reception >
3.1.11. MIDI Tx Ch
3.1.12. MIDI Rx Ch
Received when [Rx CH] matches.
Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer below for details.
Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note-Off.
This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception. If this is
set to ALL, data of all MIDI channels will be received.
STATUS
DATA
This sets the MIDI channel that will normally be used.
3.1.13. Program Change Mode
Enable/disable reception and transmission. If MIDI Rx Ch is set to
ALL, these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI channel.
3.1.14. Control Change Mode
Enable/disable reception and transmission. If this is enabled, you can
specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations
of the mixer section. Three modes are available for correspondence
with control numbers. For mode 1, transmission and reception will
occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings.
For modes 2 and 3, reception will occur without regard to MIDI
channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to ALL.
1001nnnn 9n Note On Message
0nnnnnnn nn Note No.
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:On, 0:Off)
* Effect control by Note
1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter
When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, the note velocity (both
note-on and note-off) is used to control the Modulation frequency
width.
5.3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
< Reception >
If [Control Change Mode] is mode 1, control change messages will
be received and transmitted regardless of the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI
Rx Ch settings. For modes 2 and 3, reception will occur regardless of
MIDI channel if MIDI Rx Ch is set to ALL.
4. MIDI format list
< Transmission >
4.1. CHANNEL MESSAGE
If [Control Change Mode] is TX or TX/RX, control change messages
will be transmitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] channel when you operate a
parameter.
Command
Rx/Tx
function
8n
NOTE OFF
Rx
Control the internal effect
9n
NOTE ON
Rx
Control the internal effect
Bn
CONTROL CHANGE
Rx/Tx
Edit parameters
Cn
PROGRAM CHANGE
Rx/Tx
Switch scene memories
4.2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
Rx/Tx
function
F1
MIDI TIME CODE
Rx/Tx
MTC transmission
F2
SONG POSITION POINTER
Tx
Song position transmission
4.3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
Rx/Tx
function
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control Change
0ccccccc cc Control No. (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
The control value is converted into a parameter value according to
the following equation.
S= total number of steps in the parameter’s variable range
128 / S = X remainder Y
INT((Y+1)/2) = Z
If (MIDI DATA - Z) < 0, then Value = 0
If ((MIDI DATA - Z)/X) > MAX, then Value = MAX
Otherwise, Value = INT ((MIDI DATA -Z)/X)
F8
TIMING CLOCK
Tx
MIDI Clock transmission
FA
START
Tx
Start command transmission
FB
CONTINUE
Tx
Continue command transmission
< Reception >
FC
STOP
Tx
Stop command transmit
FE
ACTIVE SENSING
Rx
Check MIDI cable connections
FF
RESET
Rx
Clear running status
Program change messages will be received if the [Program Change
Mode] is RX or TX/RX and the [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However if
[MIDI Rx Ch] is ALL, this message is received regardless of the
channel.
A scene memory will be recalled according to the [PROGRAM
CHANGE TABLE] settings.
4.4. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
4.4.1. REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
4.4.1.1. MMC
Command
Appendix
216
1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message
0nnnnnnn nn Note No.
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
Rx/Tx
function
01
STOP
Rx/Tx
Transport stop
02
PLAY
Rx
Transport play
03
DEFERRED PLAY
Rx/Tx
Transport play
04
FAST FORWARD
Rx/TX
Transport fast-forward
05
REWIND
Rx/Tx
Transport rewind
06
RECORD STROBE
Rx
Transport punch-in record
07
RECORD EXIT
Rx
Transport punch-out
0F
RESET
Rx/Tx
MMC reset
44
LOCATE
Rx/Tx
Transport locate
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
5.4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
< Transmission >
If [Program Change Mode] is TX or TX/RX, a program change will
be transmitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] according to the [PROGRAM
CHANGE TABLE] settings when you recall a memory number. If
the recalled memory number has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program Change
0nnnnnnn nn Program No. ( 0-127)
MIDI data format
5.5. MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME (F1)
5.13. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)
< Transmission >
5.13.1. MMC
5.13.1.1. MMC STOP
< Reception >
This message is received if [MTC SYNC MODE] is set to SLAVE.
Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assembled into time code that controls the recorder.
STATUS
DATA
11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message
0nnndddd dd nnn = message type (0-7) dddd = data
5.6. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2)
< Transmission >
If [MIDI OUT] is set to CLK, a song position message will be transmitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder, to indicate the song position from which the song should start at the next
START or CONTINUE message.
STATUS
DATA
11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer
0ddddddd dd0 data ( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits data
0ddddddd dd1 data ( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits data
5.7. TIMING CLOCK (F8)
< Transmission >
If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the
MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins playing or recording, until it stops.
STATUS
11111000 F8 Timing Clock
5.8. START (FA)
< Transmission >
If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when the recorder
begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure.
STATUS
11111010 FA Start
5.9. CONTINUE (FB)
< Transmission >
If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when the recorder
begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure.
STATUS
11111011 FB Continue
5.10. STOP (FC)
< Transmission >
If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when the recorder
stops.
STATUS
11111100 FC Stop
5.11. ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
< Reception >
Once this message is received, subsequent failure to receive any message for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared,
and MIDI communications to be initialized.
STATUS
11111110 FE Active Sensing
< Transmission >
When the STOP key is pressed, this message is transmitted with a
device number of 7F.
< Reception >
If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will stop
when this message is received with a matching device number or a
device number of 7F.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
F0
7F
dd
06
01
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Stop (MCS)
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.2. MMC PLAY
< Reception >
If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin playback when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000010
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
02
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Play (MCS)
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.3. MMC DEFERRED PLAY
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the
PLAY key is pressed.
< Reception >
If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin playback when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000011
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
03
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Deferred play (MCS)
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.4. MMC FAST FORWARD
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF
key is pressed.
< Reception >
If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin fast-forward when this message is received with a matching
device number or a device number of 7F.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
5.12. RESET (FF)
< Reception >
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000001
11110111
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000110
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
04
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Fast Forward (MCS)
End Of Exclusive
When a Reset message is received, MIDI communications will be
initialized by clearing Running Status etc.
STATUS
11111111 FF Reset
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
If [MIDI OUT] is set to MTC, Quarter Frame messages will be transmitted according to the time code movements of the recorder when
the recorder is playing or recording.
217
MIDI data format
5.13.1.5. MMC REWIND
5.13.1.9. MMC LOCATE (TARGET)
< Transmission >
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the
REWIND key is pressed.
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a
locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/OUT is pressed, a
FF/REW operation is performed, when the transport returns to the
auto-punch pre-roll point, or when repeating.
< Reception >
If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will
begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device
number or a device number of 7F.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000101
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
05
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Rewind (MCS)
End Of Exclusive
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW1600 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches. The transport will locate to the
time code position specified within the command data.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
5.13.1.6. MMC RECORD STROBE
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW1600 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is
stopped, then recording will begin. If the transport is playing, then
punch-in will occur.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000110
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
06
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Record strobe
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.7. MMC RECORD EXIT
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW1600 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is
recording, then punch-out will occur.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000111
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
07
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Record Exit
End Of Exclusive
5.13.1.8. MMC RESET
< Transmission >
This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song
loading is finished.
< Reception >
This message is received if the AW1600 is operating as an MMC
Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. MMC-related internal
settings will be reset to the power-on state.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
Command
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00001101
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
0D
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Reset
End Of Exclusive
Appendix
218
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
01000100
00000110
00000001
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0sssssss
0fffffff
0sssssss
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
44
06
01
hh
mm
ss
ff
ss
F7
System Exclusive Message
Real Time System Exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id
Locate
byte count
“target” sub command
hour (Standard Time Code)
minute
second
frame
sub-frame
End Of Exclusive
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA
[ Professional Audio Workstation ]
Model AW1600 MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Date :21-JUL-2004
Version : 1.0
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
Memorized
x
x
**************
1, 3
x
x
Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
x
: True voice **************
0 - 127
x
Velocity
Note ON
Note OFF
x
x
x
x
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Assignable
Assignable
Assignable
Assignable
Assignable
Assignable
Assignable
o 0 - 127
**************
o 0 - 127
Assignable
o
o
*1
o
x
x
x
x
x
*2
System
: Clock
Real Time: Commands
o
o
x
x
*2
*2
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
Mes- :All Notes OFF
sages:Active Sense
:Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
1-16
21-27
33-34
41-56
63-79
91-93
102-117
: True #
System Exclusive
Common
Aux
Notes:
: Song Pos.
: Song Sel.
: Tune
Cntrl
Cntrl
Cntrl
Cntrl
Cntrl
Cntrl
Cntrl
MTC quarter frame message is transmitted.
MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(When MTC Slave mode)
*1 :MMC
*2 :When BCLK Sync mode
For MIDI remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
Appendix
Note
Number
o : Yes
x : No
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
219
Specifications
Specifications
■ General Specifications
Built-in Hard Disk Drive
40 GB, 3.5" IDE
Frequency Response
0 +1/–3 dB @20Hz – 20kHz
(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO/AUX OUT, GAIN: min.)
Maximum Number of Songs
100 Songs
Total Harmonic Distortion (measured with 20kHz LPF)
Less than 0.03 % @1kHz/–10dBV
(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO/AUX OUT, GAIN: min.)
Dynamic Range (measured with IHF-A)
109 dB typ. : DA Converter (STEREO/AUX OUT)
103 dB min. : DA Converter (STEREO/AUX OUT,
INPUT CH SEL: all off)
103 dB typ. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to
STEREO/AUX OUT)
97 dB min.
: AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to
STEREO/AUX OUT, GAIN: min.)
AD Converter
24-bit Linear, 64-times Oversampling
DA Converter
24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling
Internal Processing
32-bit
Sampling Frequency
Internal : 44.1 kHz (–6% – +6%)
External : 44.1 kHz (–10% – +6%)
Audio Input Section
MIC/LINE INPUT
: 8 CH (XLR/phone combo)
DIGITAL STEREO IN : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)
Audio Output Section
MONITOR OUT
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
PHONES
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
STEREO/AUX OUT
: 2 CH (stereo x 1)
DIGITAL STEREO OUT : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)
Mixer Input Section (Total 36 CH)
MIC/LINE INPUT
: 8 CH
Internal Effect Return : 4 CH (stereo x 2)
Track
: 16 CH
Quick Loop Sampler : 8 CH (stereo x 4)
Internal Effect Section
2 Built-in Multi-Effect Processors
Appendix
220
Master Section (Total 8 Bus)
BUS
: 2 CH
AUX
: 2 CH
STEREO : 2 CH (stereo x 1)
EFFECT : 2 CH
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Recording Resolution
16-bit/24-bit Linear (non-compressed)
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording/
Playback Tracks
8 Recording Tracks/16 Playback Tracks (16-bit)
8 Recording or Playback Tracks (24-bit)
Number of Tracks
144 Tracks
(16 Tracks + Stereo Tracks) x 8 Virtual
Faders
45 mm x 13
Display
240 x 650 dot LCD (with contrast control)
MIDI
MTC (Master/Slave), MIDI Clock (Master),
MMC (Master/Slave), Program Change,
Control Change
Memory
Scene Memory, EQ Library, Dynamics Library,
Effect Library, Channel Library, Sample Library
AC Adaptor
PA-300
Dimensions (W x H x D)
455 x 107 x 349 mm
Net Weight
6.2 kg
Operating Temperature
5 – 35 °C
Optional Accessories
Foot switch Yamaha FC5
Specifications
■ Mixer Section
■ Recorder Section
● Input/Output
MIC/LINE INPUT 1 – 8 (balanced XLR/phone combo)
Phantom Power Supply : +48 ± 3V
Input Impedance
: 3 kΩ
Nominal Input Level
: –46 dBu to + 4 dBu
Minimum Input Level
: –52 dBu
Maximum Input Level
: +18 dBu
MIC/LINE INPUT (Hi-Z) 8 (unbalanced phone)
Input Impedance
: 500 kΩ
Nominal Input Level
: –46 dBu to + 4 dBu
Minimum Input Level
: –52 dBu
Maximum Input Level
: +18 dBu
STEREO/AUX OUT L, R (unbalanced phone)
Output Impedance
: 150 Ω
Nominal Load Impedance : 10 kΩ
Nominal Output Level
: –10 dBV
Maximum Output Level
: +4 dBV
Overview
Recording Resolution : 16-bit/24-bit
Sampling Frequency : 44.1 kHz
Edit Functions
Song Edit : OPTIMIZE, DELETE, COPY, IMPORT
Track Edit : ERASE, DELETE, INSERT,
COPY, MOVE, EXCHANGE,
TIME COMP/EXPAND,
PITCH CHANGE, EXPORT,
CD IMPORT, WAV IMPORT
Other Functions
Locate/Marker
Locate
: RTZ, A/B, LAST REC IN/OUT
Marker
: 1 – 99
Punch-In/Out : Manual, Auto
Pitch Fix
CD-RW Drive
Data Backup, Audio CD Burning and Playback,
WAV File Import, Audio CD Import
MONITOR OUT L, R (unbalanced phone)
Output Impedance
: 150 Ω
Nominal Load Impedance : 10 kΩ
Nominal Output Level
: –10 dBV
Maximum Output Level
: +4 dBV
PHONES (unbalanced TRS phone)
Nominal Load Impedance : 8 – 40Ω
Maximum Output Level
: 25 mW (8 Ω load)
35 mW (40 Ω load)
■ Quick Loop Sampler
Polyphony
4 voices (stereo)
Recordable Time
Total 47 seconds (16-bit stereo)
Total 29 seconds (24-bit stereo)
DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT (coaxial)
* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV = 1 Vrms
● Digital Mixing Functions
Input Channels (INPUT 1-8, Track 1-16, PAD 1-4)
Attenuation, Phase (Normal/Reverse),
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Dynamics,
Pan, Bus Assign (STEREO, BUS, AUX, EFF)
Internal Effect Return Channels
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan,
Bus Assign (STEREO, AUX)
Edit Functions
NAME, TRIM, PLAYBACK MODE, ERASE,
EXTRACT, CD IMPORT, TRACK IMPORT,
WAV IMPORT
■ External Control
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT/THRU
FOOT SW
USB
:
:
:
:
5-pin DIN
5-pin DIN
phone
USB 2.0
Master Channels
STEREO L, R : Attenuation,
Equalizer (4-Band PEQ),
Dynamics, Balance
BUS L, R
Appendix
AUX 1 – 2
EFF 1 – 2
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
221
Dimensions
Dimensions
107
98
5
349
341
455
Unit: mm
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every
locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
For European models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 13A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4
Appendix
222
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Index
Index
A
Bus
A/B key ........................................ 20
Bus recording............................... 41
D.OUT COPYRIGHT
ON/OFF button...........................169
C
DATA WRITE SPEED ................103
terminology ................................ 16
A/B point ...................................... 65
Access indicator .................... 18, 23
Accessing a
screen/page/channel ................... 24
Adjusting the input level .............. 34
AMP............................................. 72
Assigning input signals
(Bus recording) ............................ 45
Assigning input signals
(Direct recording)......................... 42
DATA/JOG dial.............................20
CANCEL key................................ 20
CD key ......................................... 18
CD PLAY button ........................ 110
CD Play function ........................ 110
CD-R/RW drive
Handling the media ...................... 5
CD-ROM included
with the AW1600........................ 209
DC IN connector...........................23
demo song ...................................28
Loading ......................................28
Mixing ........................................30
Playing .......................................29
DIGITAL IN jack
DIGITAL IN PATCH ..................168
DIGITAL IN PATCH ...................168
Digital input setting.....................168
AUDIO WRITE SPEED ............. 103
CD-RW drive.......................... 10, 23
Access indicator ......................... 23
Basic settings........................... 103
Disc At Once ............................ 102
Eject hole................................... 23
Eject switch................................ 23
Handling .................................... 10
media ...................................... 101
Methods .................................. 102
Track At Once .......................... 102
Using ......................................... 10
AUTO PUNCH key ...................... 20
CD-RW MEDIA ERASE ............. 103
Ducking ......................................184
Auto punch-in/out ........................ 59
rehearse .................................... 60
CH RECALL SAFE ...................... 80
DYN button...................................53
DYN knob...............................19, 26
AUTO SAVE button ................... 169
Channel library............................. 79
Recall ........................................ 79
AVRG (Average) ....................... 159
Compander ................................ 183
Dynamics library...............53, 57, 78
library list..................................185
Recall ..................................57, 78
ATT knob ................................... 168
audio CD ................................... 101
Basic settings .......................... 103
Disc At Once ........................... 102
Erasing.................................... 109
Finalizing ................................. 108
Methods .................................. 102
Playing .................................... 110
Track At Once ......................... 102
COMPARE button...................... 103
B
Compressor ............................... 182
Back up ..................................... 152
Connect external devices ............ 27
balance ........................................ 57
PAN/BALANCE knob ................. 94
Connecting instrument or mic ...... 33
Basic operation............................ 24
Dimensions ................................222
Direct recording ............................40
Disc At Once ..............................102
Writing .....................................106
Display message list ..................206
Dynamics .....................................50
Dynamics parameter ..................182
KEYIN SOURCE ........................96
control change ........................... 160
Edit ...................................95, 96, 97
dynamics parameters .................96
EQ parameters ...........................95
parameters of an internal effect ...97
Block diagram............................ 227
COUNTER DISPLAY ................. 146
bounce......................................... 81
Convenient functions ................. 92
Creating a new song .................... 39
bounce recording......................... 88
CURSOR key............................... 20
Responsibility .............................. 9
DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT jack ...22
E
Counter ........................................ 24
COUNTER DISPLAY ............... 146
buck up
Digital recorder ...........................177
Connecting the AC adaptor ......... 11
DC IN connector ........................ 23
Accessing a
screen/page/channel ............... 24
Editing a value in the display ...... 25
Inputting text .............................. 25
Switching a button on/off ............ 25
Using the Selected
Channel section ...................... 26
Viewing the display .................... 24
BPM........................................... 124
DIGITAL REC ON/OFF button ...168
controlling a tone
generator module....................... 174
Copyright ....................................... 9
Notice .......................................... 6
Current song ................................ 28
Edit command
COPY ......................................132
DELETE ...................................131
ERASE ....................................130
EXCHANGE .............................134
EXPORT ..................................135
INSERT ...................................131
MOVE ......................................133
PITCH CHANGE ......................135
TIME COMP/EXP (Time
Compression/Expansion) ........134
Appendix
A-B Repeat .................................. 70
D
EDIT key ......................................18
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
223
Index
Gate ........................................... 184
Recall ........................................75
Sample library ............................78
Storing .......................................74
terminology ................................16
Gate mode ................................. 112
LIBRARY button...........................50
Ground Screw .............................. 22
LISTEN button..............................72
Editing a value in the display ....... 25
G
Editing command....................... 127
List .......................................... 130
GAIN knob ................................... 17
effect............................................ 99
BYPASS.................................... 97
USED AS .................................. 98
EFFECT 1 knob..................... 19, 26
EFFECT 2 knob..................... 19, 26
Effect library ................................ 78
Effect Parameters .................... 188
library list ................................. 186
Recall ........................................ 78
H
Locate points................................68
Hard disk
folder organization.................... 144
initialize ................................... 168
Eject hole..................................... 23
HIGH key ..................................... 19
Eject switch ................................. 23
HI-MID key ................................... 19
ENTER key.................................. 20
EQ ............................................... 50
I
EQ button .................................... 52
IN/OUT key .................................. 20
EQ knob ................................ 19, 26
In/out point ................................... 65
EQ library......................... 52, 56, 77
library list ................................. 181
Recall ........................................ 77
included items ................................ 9
example of connections............... 27
Expander ................................... 183
Exporting WAV files and
importing audio CD or
WAV files ................................... 136
external devices ........................ 171
digital recorder ......................... 177
external effects ........................ 175
tone generator module ............. 174
workstation synth ..................... 171
external effects .......................... 175
F
Fader ........................................... 19
FADER FLIP.............................. 170
FADER RECALL SAFE ............... 80
Features ...................................... 13
CD-RW drive ............................. 14
computer ................................... 14
Mixer section ............................. 13
Quick Loop Sampler section ....... 14
Recorder section ....................... 14
FF key ......................................... 21
Finalizing ........................... 102, 108
FOOT SW jack ...................... 22, 59
foot switch ................................... 59
Appendix
224
Loading a song.............................64
FORMAT button ........................ 169
free space on the hard disk ....... 148
Front panel .................................. 23
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
locator ..........................................65
A/B point ....................................65
Adjusting the position..................68
Erasing ......................................69
icon ............................................66
In/out point .................................65
Locate points ..............................68
LOCATOR button .......................68
Initializing a channel .................... 94
Locator point/marker
display area .............................68
marker .......................................67
MARKER button .........................68
POSITION ..................................68
Relative zero point ......................65
Start/end point ............................65
INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button .... 110
LOCATOR button .........................68
INPUT LEVEL knob ..................... 34
Locator point/marker
display area ..................................68
Index .......................................... 223
Input library ............................ 50, 77
library list ................................. 179
LO-MID key ..................................19
INPUT LIBRARY popup window.. 77
Loop mode .........................112, 123
INPUT SEL key............................ 17
LOW key ......................................19
INPUT SETTING
popup window ........................ 34, 77
M
Inputting text ................................ 25
internal effect ......................... 50, 85
EFF ........................................... 85
PRE/POST ................................ 85
J
JOG ON key .......................... 20, 71
L
LATCH button ............................ 166
LEARN button ............................ 166
Level meter ............................ 34, 93
PRE/POST buttons .................... 93
library ........................................... 73
Basic operation .......................... 74
Channel library ........................... 79
Delete ........................................ 75
Details ....................................... 77
Dynamics library .................. 57, 78
Effect library............................... 78
EQ library ............................ 56, 77
Input library ................................ 77
Mastering library ........................ 78
Naming ...................................... 76
Manual punch-in/out.....................59
MARK key ....................................20
MARK SEARCH key ....................20
marker ..........................................67
Adjusting the position..................68
Erasing ......................................69
icon ............................................67
List.............................................68
Locate points ..............................68
LOCATOR button .......................68
Locator point/marker
display area .............................68
MARKER ...................................68
MARKER button .........................68
MEAS ........................................69
POSITION ..................................68
MARKER button ...........................68
Mastering library...........................78
library list..................................180
Recall ........................................78
MASTERING LIBRARY
popup window ..............................78
MEAS ...........................................68
media .........................................101
Erasing ....................................109
Index
message list .............................. 206
Overall setting ............................ 169
metronome .................................. 47
Overdubbing .......................... 55, 58
Assigning the input signal ........... 56
Auto punch-in/out ....................... 59
Manual punch-in/out ................... 59
Virtual track................................ 62
Metronome knob ......................... 36
MIC/LINE INPUT jack............ 21, 33
MIC/LINE INPUT jack (Hi-Z).. 21, 33
MIDI ........................................... 157
Basic ....................................... 158
CTRL CHG MODE................... 160
DEV (device number) ............... 159
IN PORT ................................. 158
MIDI CH .................................. 160
MIDI data format ...................... 215
MIDI Remote ........................... 163
MMC MODE ............................ 159
MTC MODE............................. 159
OUT PORT.............................. 158
PGM CHG MODE .................... 160
settings ................................... 158
SYNC OUT.............................. 158
THRU ...................................... 158
MIDI data format........................ 215
MIDI IN connector ....................... 22
MIDI OUT/THRU connector......... 22
MIDI Remote ..................... 157, 163
user-defined Remote function... 165
mix balance ................................. 57
mixdown ...................................... 81
check the level ........................... 93
Convenient functions ................. 92
Preparing .................................. 83
Recording .................................. 87
Viewing all parameters ............... 93
P
R
pad ..................................... 111, 117
playback mode ......................... 123
Pad track.................................... 112
terminology ................................ 16
Rear panel....................................21
REC key .......................................21
Pads 1-4 ...................................... 18
RECALL CONFIRM
ON/OFF button...........................169
Pair ........................................ 49, 84
Recall Safe...................................80
Paired channels
terminology ................................ 16
RECORD key ...............................18
Pan ........................................ 57, 84
Recording/playing a sound clip ....35
PAN/BAL knob ....................... 19, 26
Relative zero point .......................65
PARAM DISP TIME ................... 169
REMOTE key ...............................18
PERFECTLY button................... 109
REPEAT key ................................20
PHANTOM +48V switch .............. 22
Responsibility for loss of data ........9
PHASE......................................... 84
REW key ......................................21
PHONES jack .............................. 21
RTZ key........................................21
Recording on a track ....................48
ping-pong recording ............... 81, 88
Pitch Fix ....................................... 89
PLAY key ..................................... 21
playback....................................... 65
A-B Repeat ................................ 70
popup window
INPUT LIBRARY popup window . 77
INPUT SETTING popup window . 77
S
Sample bank ..............................111
Sample bank and sample
terminology ................................16
SAMPLE EDIT key.......................18
MMC device number ................. 159
POSITION.................................... 68
MMC MODE .............................. 159
POSTROLL TIME ...................... 170
MONITOR key ............................. 18
POWER switch ............................ 23
Sample library ......................78, 113
Back up....................................152
library list..................................200
Recall ........................................79
Restoring .................................154
MONITOR OUT jack.................... 21
PRECAUTIONS ............................. 3
Sampling
MONITOR TEMPO.................... 124
PREROLL TIME ........................ 170
MONITOR/PHONES knob .......... 17
program change......................... 160
MTC MODE ............................... 159
AVRG (Average)...................... 159
OFST (Offset) .......................... 159
PROTECT button....................... 146
N
Nudge function ............................ 71
NUDGE MODE.................... 71, 170
NUDGE TIME ...................... 71, 170
O
OFST (Offset) ............................ 159
One shot mode .................. 112, 123
OPTIMZ button .......................... 148
Punch-in/out................................. 59
Q
Quick loop sampler .............. 14, 111
an audio CD............................. 117
computer ................................. 120
Delete ...................................... 126
Editing the sample name .......... 121
Gate ........................................ 123
Gate mode ............................... 112
Grid recording .......................... 116
Importing ................................. 117
Importing from
an audio track/stereo track ..... 119
Loop mode....................... 112, 123
Editing the sample name...........121
Trimming ..................................122
Saving the current song ...............63
scene
Naming ......................................76
PROTECT button .......................79
Recall Safe function ....................80
SCENE key ..................................20
scene memory........................73, 79
About .........................................73
Basic operation ..........................74
Details .......................................77
Recall ........................................79
Storing .......................................74
terminology ................................16
SELECT key.................................18
Appendix
Metronome button ................. 36, 47
One shot mode .................112, 123
Pad Track ................................112
Slice function ............................124
Switching the playback mode ....123
Trigger .....................................123
Trigger mode ............................112
WAV file ...................................117
Selected channel..........................24
Selected Channel section ............26
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
225
Index
Paired channels ......................... 16
Paired tracks .............................. 15
Sample bank and sample ........... 16
Scene and scene memory .......... 16
Song.......................................... 16
System data............................... 16
Tempo map ............................... 16
Tracks ....................................... 15
SET key ....................................... 20
shut down .................................... 11
SHUTDOWN page ...................... 11
SIMPLY button .......................... 109
SLICE ........................................ 124
Slice function ............................. 124
Song .......................................... 143
AW2816 .................................. 155
AW-series ............................... 155
Back up ................................... 152
bit depth .................................. 143
Copy ....................................... 147
Delete ..................................... 147
Editing settings ........................ 146
Editing the song name ............. 145
folder organization ................... 144
Importing data ......................... 151
Loading ..................................... 64
management ........................... 143
Optimizing ............................... 148
Restoring................................. 154
Saving ....................................... 63
tempo map .............................. 149
terminology................................ 16
SONG key ................................... 18
SORT field ................................... 28
Sound Clip ............................. 14, 33
Recording/playing ...................... 35
TIME ............................................ 72
TIME CODE BASE .................... 146
tone generator module............... 174
Top panel ..................................... 17
Data entry/control section ........... 20
Display ...................................... 18
Input/output section .................... 17
Locate section............................ 20
Mixer section ............................. 19
Quick Loop Sampler section ....... 18
Selected Channel section ........... 19
Transport section ....................... 21
Work Navigate section................ 18
Track At Once ............................ 102
Writing ..................................... 104
Specifications ............................ 220
TRACK key .................................. 18
Start/end point ............................. 65
Switching a button on/off ............. 25
Track recording ............................ 39
Bus recording............................. 41
Creating a new song .................. 39
Direct recording.......................... 40
MUTE button ............................. 48
NAME button ............................. 48
Pairing ....................................... 49
TRACK field ............................... 48
Track name................................ 48
Track view ................................. 48
WAVE button ............................. 48
System data
TRACK SEL key .......................... 19
STOP key .................................... 21
STORE CONFIRM
ON/OFF button .......................... 169
terminology................................ 16
Trigger mode ............................. 112
Troubleshooting ......................... 202
T
Tempo map
Tempo map event ...................... 47
terminology................................ 16
Turning the power on/off .............. 11
POWER switch .......................... 23
U
Tempo map event ............... 47, 149
Appendix
terminology .................................. 15
Bus ........................................... 16
Channel .................................... 15
Library ....................................... 16
Locate point/marker ................... 15
Pad track ................................... 16
UNDERRUN PROTECT button . 103
Undo function............................... 61
Undo List...................................... 61
UNDO LIST popup window.......... 61
UNDO/REDO key ........................ 20
UNLATCH button ....................... 166
226
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
D.OUT COPYRIGHT
ON/OFF button ......................169
Digital input settings..................168
FADER FLIP ............................170
initializing the internal
hard disk ................................168
NUDGE MODE ........................170
NUDGE TIME...........................170
PARAM DISP TIME ..................169
POSTROLL TIME .....................170
PREROLL TIME .......................170
RECALL CONFIRM
ON/OFF button ......................169
SOUND CLIP TIME ..................170
STORE CONFIRM
ON/OFF button ......................169
test tone ...................................167
Text palette .................................. 25
TRACK field ................................. 48
STEREO/AUX OUT jack ............. 21
utility functions............................157
AUTO SAVE button ..................169
Text input box .............................. 25
SOUND CLIP TIME ................... 170
STEREO SEL key ....................... 19
USB Storage mode ..............22, 137
test tone ..................................... 167
SOUND CLIP key ........................ 20
STEREO fader ............................ 19
USB MIDI driver .........................209
TEST button............................... 103
Track editing .............................. 127
Basic procedure ....................... 128
Stereo bus assign switch............. 34
USB connector .............................22
UTILITY key .................................18
V
VARI PITCH knob ......................168
VARI PITCH ON/OFF button .....168
VIEW key .....................................19
Viewing the display ......................24
Virtual track ..................................62
Switching ...................................62
terminology ................................15
W
WAV file
CD-RW drive ............................140
computer ..................................137
export ......................................136
import ......................................139
Transport folder ................136, 144
WAVE button................................48
WAVE DISPLAY popup window ..72
waveform......................................72
workstation synth .......................171
WRITE button.............................103
COMBO
RECORDER
CH DIRECT
SELECT OUT 1(...8)
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
2
16
2
CD Playback
RECORDER
2
16
Stereo Track Out
Sound Clip Out
RECORDER
ATT
ATT
ATT
ON
(EQ)
METER
4BAND EQ
METER
(EQ)
4BAND EQ
ON
METER
(Gain Reduction)
DYNAMICS
(Gain Reduction)
METER
DYNAMICS
ON
PAN
PAN
R
L
ON
ENABLE
ON
METER
PRE/POST
PAN
PRE/
POST
LEVEL
OSCILLATOR
PAN
PAN
EFF
AUX
EFF
AUX
LEVEL
ATT
ON
EFF
AUX
METER
EFF
AUX
METER
ON
METER
METER
CH DIRECT OUT
ON
METER
PRE/POST
PAN
PRE/
POST
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
DIGITAL STEREO IN
(BUS CASCADE)
Mono in X 8 (1 - 8)
Stereo in X 4 (9/10 - 15/16)
INSERT
DYNAMICS
METER (EQ)
4BAND EQ
Stereo in X 4
INSERT
INSERT
QUICK LOOP SAMPLER 1(...4)
RECORDER MONITOR 1(...16)
CD-RW DRIVE
PAD 1(...4) R
INPUT
RECORDER
REPRO 1(...16) MONITOR
CD-RW
DRIVE
CH DIRECT
SELECT OUT 1(...8)
INPUT
MONITOR
PAD 1(...4) L
INPUT
MONITOR
METER
(Gain Reduction)
DYNAMICS
ON
RETURN1 cannot be assigned to EFF1
RETURN2 cannot be assigned to EFF2
Stereo in X 2
4BAND EQ
EFFECT 1(...2) R
RECORDER
INPUT 1(...16)
Stereo Track In
Sound Clip In
Mono in X 8
(EQ)
METER
4BAND EQ
INTERNAL EFFECT RETURN 1(...2)
ATT
INSERT
INPUT 1(...8)
4BAND EQ
QUICK
LOOP
SAMPLER
(to BUS CASCADE)
2
GAIN
AD
INPUT SELECT
EFFECT 1(...2) L
EFFECT
COAXIAL
[DIGITAL STEREO IN]
Hi-z
INPUT 8 ONLY
INPUT
1-8
PHANTOM
+48V
(CH1-4/CH5-8)
METRONOME
STEREO R
STEREO L
AUX 1(...2)
STEREO L/R
STEREO L/R
CH DIRECT OUT1(...8)
CH DIRECT OUT1(...8)
BUS L/R
INSERT SEND
ON
2
2
2
8
8
2
30
2
ATT
R
Stereo Track Out
Sound Clip Out
EFF1(...2)
L
DA
(EFF)
METER
Connection Type
Select
EFFECT 1(...2)R
EFFECT 1(...2)L
EFFECT
to INSERT
RETURN1(...30)
EFF1(...2)
AUX1(...2)
BUS R
BUS L
STEREO R
METER
STEREO L
METER
8
DA
MONITOR/
PHONES
DA
[MONITOR OUT]
[PHONES]
R
L
R
L
[STEREO/AUX OUT]
COAXIAL
[DIGITAL STEREO OUT]
Stereo Track In
Sound Clip In
RECORDER INPUT
CH DIRECT SELECT OUT 1(...8)
DA
(EFF)
METER
METER
METER
METER
METER
ON LEVEL BAL
RECORDER INPUT 1(...16)
16
EFFECT
X2
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
ENABLE
CD PLAY
mode
INSERT
METER
(Gain Reduction)
DYNAMICS
DYNAMICS
CD PlayBack
(EQ)
METER
4BAND EQ
METER
(EQ)
4BAND EQ
CD-RW DRIVE
RECORDER
ATT
ATT
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT
[MIC/LINE INPUT]
Block diagram
Block diagram
227
AUX 1
AUX 2
EFF 1
EFF 2
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS L
BUS R
MEMO
228
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
MEMO
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
229
MEMO
230
AW1600 Owner’s Manual
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à
Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans
la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den
jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
Yamaha Music Central Europe,
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen,
The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
U.S.A.
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10,
1140 - Brussels, Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,
Calif. 90620, U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
FRANCE
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400
Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil
Tel: 011-3085-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización
Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa,
Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
ASIA
THE NETHERLANDS
CANADA
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF
CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China)
Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road
(West), Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend.
Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8
Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0660
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA12
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2005 Yamaha Corporation
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
511POCP2.3-02B0
WE23260 Printed in Japan